GE Computer Accessories 2300 V User Manual
GEH-6385  
g
GE Industrial Systems  
ACMVAC2-G  
™
Innovation Series  
Medium Voltage – GP Type G Drives  
Reference and Troubleshooting  
2300 V Drives  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
g
GE Industrial Systems  
Publication: GEH-6385  
Issued: 2000-06-29  
ACMVAC2-G  
™
Innovation Series  
Medium Voltage – GP Type G Drives  
Reference and Troubleshooting  
2300 V Drives  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2000 General Electric Company, USA.  
All rights reserved.  
Printed in the United States of America.  
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to  
provide every possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and  
maintenance. If further information is desired or if particular problems arise that are not  
covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter should be referred to GE  
Industrial Systems, Salem, Virginia, USA.  
This document contains proprietary information of General Electric Company, USA and is  
furnished to its customer solely to assist that customer in the installation, testing,  
operation, and/or maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall not be  
reproduced in whole or in part nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party without  
the written approval of GE Industrial Systems.  
Document Identification: GEH-6385, original release  
Technical Writer/Editor: Teresa Davidson  
The Innovation Series is a trademark of the General Electric Company, USA.  
Microsoft is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.  
Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.  
Modbus is a trademark of Modicon.  
Profibus is trademark of Profibus International  
Genius is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Symbol Legend  
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not  
strictly observed, could result in personal injury or death.  
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not  
strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of  
equipment.  
Note Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Safety Symbol Legend • a  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock  
or burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and  
thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the instructions  
should install, operate, or maintain this equipment.  
Isolation of test equipment from the equipment under test  
presents potential electrical hazards. If the test equipment  
cannot be grounded to the equipment under test, the test  
equipment’s case must be shielded to prevent contact by  
personnel.  
To minimize hazard of electrical shock or burn, approved  
grounding practices and procedures must be strictly followed.  
To prevent personal injury or equipment damage caused by  
equipment malfunction, only adequately trained personnel  
should modify any programmable machine.  
b • Safety Symbol Legend  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP – Type G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-1  
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 1-1  
Using Toolbox Help for Reference and Troubleshooting ................................................... 1-2  
Related Documents........................................................................................................... 1-3  
How to Get Help............................................................................................................... 1-3  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
2-1  
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 2-1  
Types of Faults................................................................................................................. 2-2  
Fault Indication................................................................................................................. 2-2  
Fault Descriptions............................................................................................................. 2-3  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
3-1  
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 3-1  
Diagnostic and Utility Functions....................................................................................... 3-4  
Diagnostic and Utility Overview ................................................................................ 3-4  
Capture Buffer ........................................................................................................... 3-4  
General Purpose Constants........................................................................................3-10  
General Purpose Filters.............................................................................................3-11  
Oscillator..................................................................................................................3-12  
Position Feedback.....................................................................................................3-13  
Predefined Constants.................................................................................................3-14  
Signal Level Detector (SLD).....................................................................................3-15  
Simulator..................................................................................................................3-18  
Control Diagnostic Variables.....................................................................................3-19  
Line Simulator..........................................................................................................3-19  
Drive Configuration Functions.........................................................................................3-20  
Intelligent Part Number (IPN) ...................................................................................3-20  
Primary Motor & Application Data ...........................................................................3-21  
General Setup Functions ..................................................................................................3-24  
Keypad Overview .....................................................................................................3-24  
Keypad Contrast Adjustment.....................................................................................3-25  
Keypad Meter Configuration.....................................................................................3-25  
Keypad Security Configuration .................................................................................3-27  
Language and Units Presentation...............................................................................3-28  
Language Display .....................................................................................................3-29  
I/O Functions...................................................................................................................3-30  
Analog and Digital I/O Testing .................................................................................3-30  
Analog Inputs/Outputs and Mapping .........................................................................3-32  
Digital Inputs/Outputs and Mapping..........................................................................3-33  
LAN Functions................................................................................................................3-34  
LAN Overview .........................................................................................................3-34  
Frame Phaselock Loop..............................................................................................3-34  
LAN Configuration and Health .................................................................................3-35  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Contents • i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LAN Signal Map.......................................................................................................3-38  
Motor Control Functions..................................................................................................3-44  
Motor Control Overview...........................................................................................3-44  
Flux Curve................................................................................................................3-45  
Leakage Inductance Curve ........................................................................................3-46  
Line Transfer ............................................................................................................3-46  
Motor Equivalent Circuit...........................................................................................3-48  
Motor Temperature Estimation..................................................................................3-49  
Power Dip Protection................................................................................................3-49  
Tach Loss Detection..................................................................................................3-50  
Protective Functions ........................................................................................................3-52  
Custom User Faults...................................................................................................3-52  
DC Link Protection...................................................................................................3-52  
Ground Fault Protection (Fast) ..................................................................................3-54  
Hardware Fault Strings .............................................................................................3-55  
Heatsink Thermal Protection .....................................................................................3-56  
Line-Line Voltage Protection ....................................................................................3-58  
Motor Overtemperature Detection .............................................................................3-59  
Phase Current Protection...........................................................................................3-60  
Timed Overcurrent Detection....................................................................................3-61  
Transformer Overtemperature Detection....................................................................3-65  
Motor Ground Protection ..........................................................................................3-66  
Phase Imbalance Monitor..........................................................................................3-68  
Line Monitor.............................................................................................................3-70  
Phase Lock Loop ......................................................................................................3-72  
Sequencer Functions........................................................................................................3-74  
Sequencer Overview .................................................................................................3-74  
Fault Reset Logic......................................................................................................3-74  
Sequencer Permissives ..............................................................................................3-76  
Stopping Commands and Modes ...............................................................................3-78  
Sequencer Commands...............................................................................................3-82  
Sequencer Status.......................................................................................................3-85  
Main Contactor Configuration...................................................................................3-87  
Speed Reference Functions ..............................................................................................3-89  
Critical Speed Avoidance..........................................................................................3-89  
Local Speed Reference..............................................................................................3-90  
Minimum Speed Limit..............................................................................................3-91  
Remote Speed Reference...........................................................................................3-92  
Speed Reference Generation .....................................................................................3-93  
Speed Reference Ramp .............................................................................................3-94  
Speed Reference Reverse ..........................................................................................3-97  
Speed/Torque Control Functions......................................................................................3-99  
Droop .......................................................................................................................3-99  
Motor Control Interface...........................................................................................3-100  
Speed Control Fault Check......................................................................................3-103  
Speed Feedback Calculation....................................................................................3-105  
Speed/Torque Overview..........................................................................................3-106  
Speed/Torque Regulator..........................................................................................3-107  
System Data Parameters.................................................................................................3-112  
Exec time/Chop freq ...............................................................................................3-112  
Motor ctrl alg sel.....................................................................................................3-112  
Motor efficiency .....................................................................................................3-113  
Motor service factor................................................................................................3-114  
Motor winding cfg ..................................................................................................3-114  
Preflux Forcing.......................................................................................................3-114  
ii • Contents  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type – G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Wizards  
4-1  
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 4-1  
Cell Test Wizard............................................................................................................... 4-4  
Cell Test Options....................................................................................................... 4-4  
Running the Fiber-Optic Test ..................................................................................... 4-5  
Running the Bridge Cell Test ..................................................................................... 4-8  
DAC Setup......................................................................................................................4-10  
Drive Commissioning......................................................................................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: Overview...............................................................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: Intelligent Part Number .........................................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: Drive Units............................................................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: AC Source Selection..............................................................4-12  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Nameplate Data ..........................................................4-12  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Crossover Voltage.......................................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Protection Class ..........................................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Poles...........................................................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet ..................................................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet - Equivalent Circuit Data ...........................4-14  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet - Flux Curve ..............................................4-15  
Drive Commissioning: Motor and Process Speed Referencing ...................................4-15  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Support ..............................................................4-16  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Pulses Per Revolution.........................................4-16  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Loss Protection...................................................4-16  
Drive Commissioning: Stopping Configuration .........................................................4-17  
Drive Commissioning: Flying Restart........................................................................4-17  
Drive Commissioning: X-Stop Configuration ............................................................4-18  
Drive Commissioning: X-Stop Ramp Time ...............................................................4-18  
Drive Commissioning: Run Ready Permissive String.................................................4-19  
Drive Commissioning: Starting and Stopping the Drive .............................................4-19  
Drive Commissioning: Manual Reference..................................................................4-19  
Drive Commissioning: Maximum Speed References..................................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Jog Speed Setpoints...............................................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Bypass ........................................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Mode ..........................................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Speed Independent Rates.............................4-21  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Speed Independent Rate Set Selection .........4-21  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Acceleration Rates..................4-22  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Acceleration Speeds................4-22  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Deceleration Rates..................4-22  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Deceleration Speeds................4-23  
Drive Commissioning: DDI Increment and Decrement Rates (Local Mode) ...............4-23  
Drive Commissioning: Speed/Torque Regulator Configuration..................................4-23  
Drive Commissioning: Speed/Torque Regulator Modes.............................................4-23  
Drive Commissioning: Torque Regulator Reference and Output ................................4-24  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override Reference and Output................4-24  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override Speed Error...............................4-24  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override Stopping Behavior.....................4-25  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limits.....................................................4-25  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limits Uniform.......................................4-25  
Drive Commissioning: Failed Calculation .................................................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limit Selection.......................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Normal Torque and Current Limits........................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Alternate Torque and Current Limits......................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Motoring Torque Limits ........................................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Generating Torque Limits......................................................4-26  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Contents • iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Current Limits.......................................................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Power Dip Ride-Through.......................................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Parameter Calculation............................................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Simulator Mode.....................................................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Hardware Fault Strings in Simulator Mode ............................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Simulator Mechanical Configuration......................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Exit Reminder .......................................................................4-28  
Drive Commissioning: Conclusion............................................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup ......................................................................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Overview...............................................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Motor Transfer Data ..............................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Motor Capture Data ...............................................................4-29  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Operation ..............................................................................4-29  
Motor Control Tuneup.....................................................................................................4-31  
Motor Control Tuneup: Equivalent Circuit ................................................................4-31  
Motor Control Tuneup: Measurements ......................................................................4-32  
Motor Control Tuneup: Operation .............................................................................4-32  
Panel Meter Setup............................................................................................................4-32  
Per Unit Setup .................................................................................................................4-32  
Line Protection Setup.......................................................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Introduction.....................................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Default Settings...............................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Overvoltage.....................................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Undervoltage...................................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Overfrequency.................................................................................4-34  
Line Protection: Underfrequency...............................................................................4-34  
Line Protection: Conclusion ......................................................................................4-34  
Pulse Test........................................................................................................................4-34  
Pulse Test: Introduction ............................................................................................4-34  
Pulse Test: Analog Output Configuration ..................................................................4-35  
Pulse Test: Bridge State Configuration ......................................................................4-35  
Pulse Test: Timer Configuration................................................................................4-37  
Pulse Test: Operation................................................................................................4-37  
Remaining Parameter Setup .............................................................................................4-37  
Simulator Setup...............................................................................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Introduction....................................................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Simulator Mode..............................................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Hardware Fault String Override......................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Simulator Mechanical Configuration...............................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Conclusion .....................................................................................4-38  
Speed Regulator Tuneup..................................................................................................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Model ...............................................................................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: System Inertia ...................................................................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Inertia Measurement Command.........................................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Speed Regulator Mode ......................................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Manual Regulator Tuneup .................................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 1st Order Response............................................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 2nd Order Response ..........................................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 2nd Order Response with Stiffness Filter ...........................4-41  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Calculate Speed Regulator Gains Command ......................4-41  
iv • Contents  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type – G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Signal Mapping  
5-1  
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 5-1  
LAN Interfaces................................................................................................................. 5-2  
Parameter Configuration for Signal Mapping .................................................................... 5-3  
Variable Mapping............................................................................................................. 5-4  
Applying the LAN Heartbeat Echo Feature ....................................................................... 5-5  
Application of Feedback Signals....................................................................................... 5-6  
Variable Maps .................................................................................................................. 5-6  
Real Variable Map..................................................................................................... 5-7  
Boolean Variable Map ............................................................................................... 5-8  
Appendix A Function Block Diagrams  
A-1  
Introduction......................................................................................................................A-1  
Index  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Contents • v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Overview  
Introduction  
This document provides reference and troubleshooting information for the 2300 V  
model of the Innovation Series™ Medium Voltage – GP Type G drives. The purpose  
of the document is to assist installation and maintenance technicians in  
understanding the drive’s diagnostic and configuration software, as well as using  
fault codes to troubleshoot drive problems.  
Chapter 1 defines the document contents. Its purpose is to present a general product  
overview for the reader, as follows:  
Section  
Page  
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1-1  
Using Toolbox Help for Reference and Troubleshooting...................................... 1-2  
Related Documents ............................................................................................. 1-3  
How to Get Help ................................................................................................. 1-3  
Notes .................................................................................................................. 1-4  
Chapter 2, Faults and Troubleshooting, lists and defines drive fault messages,  
with troubleshooting suggestions if a fault occurs.  
Chapter 3, Functions/Parameters, lists and describes the drive application program  
functions, including input parameters, output variables, and configuration.  
Chapter 4, Wizards, describes in detail the automated Windows-based “forms” that  
guide the user through drive configuration and tuneup.  
Chapter 5, Signal Mapping, describes LAN interfaces and parameter configuration  
for variable signal mapping.  
Note The information in Chapters 2, 3, and 4 is duplicated from the GE Control  
System Toolbox’s online Help files. This document, GEH-6385, is provided as  
assistance when the toolbox is not available or was not purchased with the drive  
system. (Refer to Using Toolbox Help for Reference and Troubleshooting in this  
chapter.)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 1 Overview • 1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Toolbox Help for Reference and Troubleshooting  
The GE Control System Toolbox is an optionally purchased drive configuration  
program used to tune and commission the drive as needed for each application. The  
toolbox provides Microsoft® Windows®-based menus, block diagrams, dialog  
boxes, and wizards on a PC-based drive interface.  
GE document GEH-6401  
describes toolbox features  
and use.  
When you choose Help on the toolbox main menu bar, a drop-down menu provides  
several options for finding information.  
Organized Help topics, a Help Index tab,  
and a Find tab for searching the Help  
database.  
Send a toolbox "bug" report or  
enhancement request directly to GE  
(requires that e-mail is installed).  
How to find information in Help and how to  
customize the toolbox Help features.  
Additional information about the toolbox  
and GE contacts (requires access to the  
GE intranet).  
Information about faults, functions, wizards,  
and special messages.  
Information about the drive and toolbox  
version, installation notes (compatibilities),  
and requirements.  
Identifies toolbox release, version, and  
platform information.  
From that menu, select Product Help to access online help files that contain the  
fault, function, and wizard information provided in this manual.  
Help Topics: Innovation Series ACMVAC4-G Help  
Drive firmware and associated  
reference files may change with  
product upgrades and revisions.  
The information provided in this  
document, GEH-6385, is current  
at the time of its issue. However,  
the toolbox Help files provided  
with your drive may be a more  
current representation of your  
drive configuration.  
1-2 • Chapter 1 Overview  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related Documents  
If needed for supplementary information, refer to the following documents for the  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage – GP Type G drives, as applicable:  
GEH-6381, Installation and Startup  
GEH-6382, User’s Guide  
GEH-6401, Control System Toolbox  
How to Get Help  
If help is needed beyond the instructions provided in the documentation, contact GE  
as follows:  
GE Industrial Systems  
Product Service Engineering  
1501 Roanoke Blvd.  
Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA  
“+” indicates the  
Phone: + 1 800 533 5885 (United States, Canada, Mexico)  
+ 1 540 378 3280 (International)  
international access code  
required when calling from  
outside of the USA.  
Fax:  
+ 1 540 387 8606 (All)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 1 Overview • 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
1-4 • Chapter 1 Overview  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Introduction  
The drive software includes selftest diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. When  
these tests detect an unfavorable condition, they output fault indications to the  
drive’s operator interfaces: the door-mounted Drive Diagnostic Interface (DDI,  
referred to as the keypad) or a connected PC running the GE Control System  
Toolbox (the toolbox). An operator can then use either interface to examine the fault  
and clear it, as applicable.  
For information on using the  
keypad refer to the drive  
User's Guide, GEH-6382.  
GEH-6401 describes the  
toolbox.  
This chapter lists and defines the relevant fault messages for the drive, with  
troubleshooting suggestions. It is organized as follows:  
Section  
Page  
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 2-1  
Types of Faults ................................................................................................... 2-2  
Fault Indication................................................................................................... 2-2  
Fault Descriptions ............................................................................................... 2-3  
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock  
or burn. Only adequately trained persons who are  
thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the instructions  
should maintain this equipment.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Types of Faults  
There are currently two types of fault conditions:  
•
Alarm faults indicate conditions that you should note, but that are not serious  
enough to automatically shut down or trip the drive. If the condition goes away,  
some alarm faults clear themselves and the display then identifies the alarm as  
brief. Otherwise, you must stop the drive to clear this type of fault.  
•
Trip faults indicate a more serious condition that needs to be corrected.  
Therefore, it trips the drive. The drive should not be restarted until the condition  
is corrected.  
You can clear most faults by selecting Clear Faults on the drive’s keypad or in the  
(optional) toolbox program.  
Fault Indication  
The drive indicates a fault condition on the keypad, toolbox display, and on the  
DSPX board.  
The DSPX board is the  
IS200DSPX Digital Signal  
Processor, located in the  
drive control rack.  
On the keypad, a fault icon appears in the right side of the display: The operator can  
then use the keypad to access the fault/alarm description (see Figure 5-1) and to clear  
the fault.  
Abbreviated Description  
Fault No.  
ACTIVE FAULT  
Fault Icon:  
50 Trip  
108 Brief  
12 Trip  
HtSink temp low,  
DC bus voltage  
Gnd flt,  
Flashing = fault  
Not flashing (on steady) = alarm  
113 Trip  
Invalid board  
--- RESET FAULTS NOW --  
Fault Behavior  
Figure 2-1. Sample Fault Display Screen on Keypad  
The toolbox uses a Windows -based PC display. When a fault occurs, the word  
Alarm or Trip appears in the lower right corner of the screen. You can view a  
description and clear the fault using the toolbox functions. (GE publication GEH-  
6401 describes these tools and this feature.)  
The DSPX Fault LED displays at the front of the drive’s control rack. This red  
indicator is on solid for a fault and flashes for an alarm.  
A fault is identified by an assigned number and abbreviated description. Both of  
these are displayed when an operator examines a fault using the keypad (see Figure  
2-1) or the toolbox.  
Table 2-1 lists the drive faults and their probable cause.  
2-2 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fault Descriptions  
Note When troubleshooting leads to a hardware inspection or component  
replacement, be sure to follow the procedures described in the drive User’s Guide,  
GEH-6382. This will help ensure that the equipment operates correctly.  
When troubleshooting leads to a hardware inspection or  
component replacement, be sure to follow the procedures  
described in the drive User’s Guide, GEH-6382. This will help  
prevent damage caused by incorrect installation and ensure  
that the equipment operates correctly.  
Table 2-1. Fault Definitions and Probable Cause  
No. Name  
1 CPFP isolation lost  
Type Description  
Trip  
The CPFP isolation lost trip fault is hardware generated. The CPFP power  
supply isolation card is indicating that power supply isolation to the phase  
modules has been compromised. The CPFP card is designed to provide  
control power to circuit cards in the high voltage compartment. This card has  
a double voltage barrier that isolates the phases from each other and from the  
control. This fault indicates that one of these voltage barriers has failed. This  
is a dangerous situation since failure of the second barrier could cause  
dangerous voltages to conduct into the control cabinet or cause a phase-  
phase short on the CPFP card. The fault is generated when the status light  
conducted via fiber from the CPFP goes out. The fiber connects CPFP (PWR  
OK) to FOSA (SPARE-R). Check that the fiber is installed correctly.  
Disconnect the fiber from FOSA and look for the status light traveling up the  
fiber. If you do not see a light then the problem is on CPFP. If there is light  
then the problem is on FOSA or BICM.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
Fiber not connected  
Possible board failures:  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Power distribution wiring to CPFP.  
2
Illegal seq state  
Trip  
The Illegal seq state trip fault occurs when the sequencer state (variable  
Sequencer state) is unrecognized. This trip may occur during system  
development but should not occur in the field.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
The Cont failed to close trip fault occurs when contactor A is commanded to  
3 Cont failed to close Trip  
open or close and fails to do so within the allowed time (defined by parameter  
MA pickup time).  
Primary causes:  
The contactor A feedback is missing or bad.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The allowed time for contactor A to open and close is too short. The allowed  
time is represented by parameter MA pickup time.  
Contactor A feedback is enabled when no contactor is present in the system.  
In the absence of the contactor, parameter MA contactor fbk should be set  
equal to Disable.  
Related functions:  
Main Contactor Configuration  
4
Local flt  
Trip  
Trip  
The Local flt trip fault occurs when the local permissive circuit is open and a  
Run request, Jog request, Full flux request, or diagnostic test (cell test, pulse  
test, autotune) request is issued.  
Possible wiring faults:  
The connections to ATBA terminal board locations 8 (L115), 10 (L24), and 12  
(LCOM) are missing or damaged.  
The connection to backplane connector J2 is missing or damaged.  
5
6
Tool requested trip  
The Tool requested trip trip fault is generated from the engineering monitor  
issuing the “uf” command. It is for test purposes only.  
Run cmd during init Alarm  
The Run cmd during init alarm occurs when a Run request, Jog request, Full  
flux request, or diagnostic test (cell test, pulse test, autotune) request is issued  
during drive initialization. When the alarm occurs, the request to perform a  
drive action is ignored.  
Primary causes:  
The external application layer issues a request to perform a drive action during  
drive initialization.  
An external input (i.e. digital input) used to request a drive action was high  
during drive initialization.  
7
Over speed  
Trip  
The Over speed trip fault occurs when the magnitude of speed (variable  
Speed reg fbk) is greater than the over speed threshold (parameter Over  
speed flt level).  
Primary causes:  
Motor speed is too high.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Parameter Over speed flt level is set too low.  
Related functions:  
Speed Control Fault Check  
8
9
Timed over current  
EE flash corrupted  
Trip  
Trip  
The Timed over current trip fault occurs when one of the squared phase  
currents (variables Ia^2 filtered, Ib^2 filtered, and Ic^2 filtered) in the timed  
over current detection model exceeds the timed over current threshold level.  
This fault indicates that the motor has exceeded its thermal limit.  
The EE flash corrupted trip fault occurs when the memory containing the drive  
parameters is determined to be bad during drive initialization.  
EE flash corrupted requires a hard reset to clear.  
Possible board failures:  
DSPX  
2-4 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Alarm  
10  
Run cmd w high  
flux  
The Run cmd w high flux alarm occurs when a Run request, Jog request, Full  
flux request, or diagnostic test (cell test, pulse test, autotune) request is issued  
and the variable Flux reference is greater than 2 percent rated flux (100%  
Flux).  
Primary causes:  
An attempt is made to restart the drive quickly. Normally four rotor time  
constants are required to allow the flux to decay after the drive stops running.  
Related functions:  
Sequencer Permissives  
11  
EE erase failed  
Alarm  
The EE erase failed trip fault occurs when the preparation of memory for the  
next parameter save operation fails to happen satisfactorily. The next  
parameter save operation is expected to be invalid, and the integrity of future  
parameter save operations are in doubt.  
EE erase failed requires a hard reset to clear.  
Possible board failures:  
DSPX  
12  
13  
Gnd flt, coarse  
Trip  
The Gnd flt, coarse trip fault occurs when a large ground current is detected.  
The trip fault occurs when the magnitude of the sum of the three phase  
currents is too large.  
Vdc Fbk voltage  
trim  
Alarm  
The Vdc Fbk voltage trim alarm occurs when the automatic Vdc feedback trim  
function on the BICM is not functioning correctly. You will not receive this  
warning unless you are using drive firmware version V02.21.00B or higher  
AND you have a BICMH1AB version card or higher. Older versions of  
software and hardware suffer from Vdc feedback inaccuracy, which can lead  
to problems in some circumstances. Getting the trim function to operate  
properly is important to optimum performance of the drive. There are several  
situations that can lead to this alarm.  
First, make sure you have run the Cell Test Wizard (either fiber optic test or  
bridge cell test) at least once when the DC link is fully discharged (<100V).  
This wizard calibrates the DC bus feedback and saves a parameter in the  
drive. This procedure does not need to be repeated unless hardware has  
changed in the drive or the previously saved parameter was overwritten by a  
parameter downloaded from the toolbox. If this procedure has not been  
performed then this alarm is generated.  
Second, make sure that JP1 on the BICMH1AB card has been moved to the  
non-default position. This jumper enables the circuit that this alarm is  
concerned with. The jumper JP1 being in the dashed-box indicates the non-  
default position. The jumper being in the solid box indicates the default  
position. The default position is used only when the card is placed in drives  
that have software versions prior to V02.21.00B  
If both if these steps fail to clear this alarm then your BICM card may be  
defective.  
Primary board failures  
BICM  
14  
Cap buff init failed  
Alarm  
The capture buffer initialization has failed to allocate enough memory to run  
the capture buffer. The capture buffer has been disabled and will not run.  
However the drive should operate normally.  
A new version of firmware is required to correct this problem.  
15  
MA cont not closed Trip  
The MA cont not closed trip fault occurs when the MA feedback indicates that  
the MA contactor is open when it is commanded to close.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
16  
Illegal req for xfer  
Alarm  
The Illegal req for xfer alarm occurs when a motor transfer command is issued  
and a trip fault is present in the drive. The alarm may also occur when a motor  
transfer command is issued at the same time a diagnostic test (cell test, pulse  
test, autotune) is active.  
Primary causes:  
The external application layer issues an inappropriate motor transfer request.  
17  
Transfer req  
aborted  
Trip  
Trip  
The Transfer req aborted trip fault occurs when the motor control is unable to  
synchronize to the utility line in the allotted time in response to a motor transfer  
request.  
18  
Tune up failed  
The Tune up failed trip fault occurs when an attempt to run the motor control  
tune up or the speed regulator tune up fails.  
Primary causes:  
The external application layer issues an inappropriate motor control tune up  
request or speed regulator tune up request.  
An attempt by the motor control tune up or the speed regulator tune up to  
initialize the diagnostic message stack fails.  
19  
20  
Ext ref out of range Alarm  
The Ext ref out of range alarm occurs when the external line reference voltage  
is outside of the allowable range.  
TOC pending  
Alarm  
The TOC pending alarm occurs when one of the squared phase currents  
(variables Ia^2 filtered, Ib^2 filtered, and Ic^2 filtered) in the timed over current  
detection model exceeds the timed over current alarm level.  
This alarm indicates that the motor is nearing its thermal limit.  
21  
System flt  
Trip  
The System flt trip fault occurs when the system permissive circuit is open and  
a Run request, Jog request, Full flux request, or diagnostic test (cell test, pulse  
test, autotune) request is issued.  
Possible wiring faults:  
The connections to ATBA terminal board locations 2 (S115), 4 (S24), and 6  
(SCOM) are missing or damaged..  
22  
23  
Trip  
Trip  
Run before MA  
closed  
The Run before MA closed trip fault occurs when a Run request, Jog request,  
or Full flux request is issued to the motor control sequencer before contactor A  
is closed.  
Related functions:  
Sequencer Permissives  
Main Contactor Configuration  
Flying restrt disabl  
The Flying restrt disabl trip fault occurs when a Run request, Jog request, Full  
flux request, or diagnostic test (cell test, pulse test, autotune) request is issued  
when the motor is not at zero speed.  
Flying restrt disabl can be turned off and the drive allowed to start when the  
motor is not at zero speed by placing the drive in flying restart mode. Flying  
restart mode is enabled by setting parameter Flying restart equal to Enable fly  
restart.  
Related functions:  
Sequencer Permissives  
2-6 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
24  
Power dip  
Trip  
The Power dip trip fault occurs when the DC link voltage feedback (variable  
DC bus voltage) falls below the power dip level and remains below the power  
dip level longer than the power dip time.  
The power dip time is configurable through parameter Power dip control.  
If the DC link voltage feedback is at some moments below the power dip level  
and at some moments above the power dip level, the trip fault can occur. If  
over any time interval the DC link feedback spends more time below the power  
dip level than above the power dip level, and the time difference is greater  
than the power dip time, Power dip occurs.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Power dip functionality is disabled because parameter Power dip control is set  
incorrectly. To enable power dip functionality parameter Power dip control  
should be set equal to 0.500 sec (Enable).  
Related functions:  
Power Dip Protection  
25  
Cur reg in limit  
Alarm  
The Cur reg in limit alarm occurs when the X and/or Y current regulator output  
enter limits for more than 1 sec. It is cleared when the X and/or Y current  
regulator come out of limit for more than of equal to 1 sec.  
Primary causes:  
The tachometer feedback is bad.  
Large motor parameters errors.  
Motor inverter connection opens while running.  
Power dip.  
Loss of current feedback.  
26  
Volt reg in limit  
Alarm  
The Volt reg in limit alarm occurs when the X and/or Y voltage regulator output  
enter limits for more than 1 sec. It is cleared when the X and/or Y voltage  
regulator come out of limit for more than of equal to 1 sec.  
Primary causes:  
Motor inverter connection opens while running.  
Power dip.  
Loss of voltage feedback.  
28  
29  
R1 meas in limit  
R2 meas in limit  
Alarm  
Alarm  
The R1 meas in limit alarm occurs when the total primary resistance measured  
during drive pre-flux is outside of a reasonable bound. The total primary  
resistance consists of the stator and cable resistances. When the fault  
condition is present, the motor control does not use the resistance  
measurement.  
The R2 meas in limit alarm occurs when the online calculation of rotor  
resistance exceeds the positive or negative saturation level. The saturation  
levels are 80 percent and -40 percent.  
Primary causes:  
The rotor resistance calculation is incorrect due a large error in motor  
parameters.  
30  
Tach loss trip  
Trip  
The Tach loss trip fault occurs when the difference between the tachometer  
feedback (variable Motor speed) and the estimated speed (variable Calculated  
speed) is too large.  
The trip fault can be disabled by setting parameter Tach loss fault mode equal  
to Trip.  
Primary causes:  
The tachometer feedback is bad.  
The estimated speed is incorrect due to large errors in motor parameters.  
Related functions:  
Tach Loss Detection  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Tach loss alarm  
Type Description  
31  
32  
33  
34  
Alarm  
The Tach loss alarm occurs when the difference between the tachometer  
feedback (variable Motor speed) and the estimated speed (variable Calculated  
speed) is too large.  
When the alarm occurs, the drive dynamically switches to tachless control  
mode. The drive continues tachless operation until the fault is cleared by an  
operator.  
Tach loss fault mode can be used to change the fault behavior to trip if  
required.  
Primary causes:  
The tachometer feedback is bad.  
The estimated speed is incorrect due to large errors in motor parameters.  
Related functions:  
Tach Loss Detection  
IOC phase A  
IOC phase B  
IOC phase C  
Trip  
The IOC phase A trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs when  
the current measured by the phase A shunt exceeds the instantaneous  
overcurrent threshold, which is positive or negative 250 percent rated shunt  
current. It also occurs within 25 microseconds when the phase A current  
experiences a step change of 100 percent rated shunt. When either condition  
is detected, the power bridge IGBT gating is disabled immediately.  
Possible board failures:  
SHCA  
FOSA  
BICM  
HFPA (FU4)  
Possible wiring faults:  
Connections between FOSA and SHCA.  
Trip  
The IOC phase B trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs when  
the current measured by the phase B shunt exceeds the instantaneous  
overcurrent threshold, which is positive or negative 250 percent rated shunt  
current. It also occurs within 25 microseconds when the phase B current  
experiences a step change of 100 percent rated shunt. When either condition  
is detected, the power bridge IGBT gating is disabled immediately.  
Possible board failures:  
SHCA  
FOSA  
BICM  
HFPA (FU4)  
Possible wiring faults:  
Connections between FOSA and SHCA.  
Trip  
The IOC phase C trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs when  
the current measured by the phase C shunt exceeds the instantaneous  
overcurrent threshold, which is positive or negative 250 percent rated shunt  
current. It also occurs within 25 microseconds when the phase C current  
experiences a step change of 100 percent rated shunt. When either condition  
is detected, the power bridge IGBT gating is disabled immediately.  
Possible board failures:  
SHCA  
FOSA  
BICM  
HFPA (FU4)  
Possible wiring faults:  
Connections between FOSA and SHCA.  
2-8 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
36  
BICM card clock  
fail  
The BICM card clock fail trip fault occurs when FPGA logic on the BICM  
cannot detect the presence of either one of its clock signals. One of the clocks  
it is looking for is generated by a crystal on the BICM itself and the other is  
transmitted via the rack backplane from DSPX.  
Primary causes:  
Card or connector failure.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
DSPX  
CABP (Backplane)  
37  
Trip  
Rack pwr supply  
lost  
The Rack pwr supply lost trip fault occurs when logic on the BICM cannot  
detect the presence of one of the power supplies being generated by RAPA.  
The power supplies monitored include P5, P15, N15 and I24. These supplies  
are distributed via the backplane to control cards including BICM. I24 is also  
brought to ATBA for use in customer I/O.  
Primary causes:  
Short across one of the monitored power supplies  
Power supply module failure  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
RAPA  
CABP (Backplane)  
38  
DC bus imbalance  
Trip  
The DC bus imbalance trip fault occurs when the magnitude of the upper and  
lower half of the DC bus circuits in the bridge differ by more than 10% of  
nominal. A typical Nominal DC bus voltage would be 3500V so a difference of  
around 350V would trigger this trip fault.  
If the fault occurs immediately after but not during a DC bus charge cycle  
completes then a ground fault in the input section of the drive should be  
suspected. Check the transformer secondary windings and the input line filter  
assemblies for a ground.  
Primary causes:  
One or more failed bleeder resistors (BRES1-6).  
A ground fault in the input rectifier section  
A ground fault in a transformer secondary winding.  
39  
40  
41  
Trip  
Trip  
Trip  
DC pos bus over  
volt  
The DC pos bus over volt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault  
occurs when the positive DC link voltage is too large.  
Possible board failures:  
FOSA  
DSPX  
DC neg bus over  
volt  
The DC neg bus over volt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault  
occurs when the negative DC link voltage is too large.  
Possible board failures:  
FOSA  
DSPX  
DC bus over  
voltage  
The DC bus over voltage trip fault occurs when the DC link voltage feedback  
(variable DC bus voltage) is too large.  
The main purpose of the trip fault is to detect excessive and potentially  
dangerous DC link voltages. When the over voltage condition is detected the  
power bridge is shut off immediately.  
Possible board failures:  
FOSA  
DSPX  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
42  
Trip  
DC bus under  
voltage  
The DC bus under voltage trip fault occurs when the DC link voltage feedback  
(variable DC bus voltage) is too low.  
The trip fault only occurs when the drive is running.  
Possible board failures:  
FOSA  
DSPX  
43  
Ground flt alm, LP  
Alarm  
The Ground flt alm, LP alarm occurs when a large ground current is detected  
by the BICM Motor Ground Protection.  
The alarm occurs when the BICM ground current (variable Gnd cur signal) is  
greater than the BICM ground current alarm level (parameter Gnd signal alarm  
on).  
Ground flt alm, LP clears when the BICM ground current drops below the  
BICM ground current alarm turn off level (parameter Gnd signal alarm off).  
The alarm can be disabled by inhibiting BICM Motor Ground Protection  
functionality. Set parameter Detector mode equal to Disable.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The value of the BICM ground current alarm level, represented by parameter  
Gnd signal alarm on, is too low.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-MID  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
44  
Ground flt, LP  
Trip  
The Ground flt, LP trip fault occurs when a large ground current is detected by  
the BICM Motor Ground Protection.  
The trip fault occurs when the BICM ground current (variable Gnd cur signal)  
is greater than the BICM ground current trip fault level (parameter Gnd signal  
trip lvl).  
Ground flt, LP can be disabled by inhibiting BICM Motor Ground Protection  
functionality. Set parameter Detector mode equal to Disable.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The value of the BICM ground current fault threshold, represented by  
parameter Gnd signal trip lvl, is too low.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-MID  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
45  
AC filter fuse blown Alarm  
The AC filter fuse blown alarm occurs when the BICM Motor Ground  
Protection detects that the MOV fuse has blown. The trip fault occurs when  
the BICM fuse circuit is open.  
AC filter fuse blown can be disabled by inhibiting BICM Motor Ground  
Protection functionality. Set parameter Detector mode equal to Disable.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-MID  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
2-10 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
46  
X stop  
The X stop trip fault occurs when the X stop circuit is open and when X stop is  
configured as a trip fault. X stop is configured as a trip fault when parameter X  
stop mode is set equal to Trip flt stop. Any other setting for parameter X stop  
mode disables the X stop trip fault.  
The state of the X stop circuit is determined by the value of the variable to  
which parameter X stop request sel points. The X stop trip fault can be  
disabled, along with all other X stop behavior, by setting parameter X stop  
request sel equal to Unused.  
Related functions:  
Stopping Commands and Modes  
47  
Trip  
Run req & xstop  
open  
The Run req & xstop open trip fault occurs when the X stop circuit is open, the  
drive is stopped, and one of the following requests is issued: Run request, Jog  
request, or Full flux request.  
The state of the X stop circuit is determined by the value of the variable to  
which parameter X stop request sel points. The trip fault can be disabled,  
along with all other X stop behavior, by setting parameter X stop request sel  
equal to Unused.  
Related functions:  
Sequencer Permissives  
Stopping Commands and Modes  
48  
BICM card temp  
low  
Trip  
The BICM card temp low trip fault occurs when the sensor on BICM measures  
a temperature that is –20C or below.  
BIC ambient temp is the variable being monitored to generate this fault.  
Primary causes:  
Failed thermal sensor on BICM.  
Ambient temperature is too low.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
49  
HtSink DB temp  
low  
Trip  
The HtSink DB temp low trip fault occurs when the dynamic brake heatsink  
temperature (variable DB heat sink temp) is too low.  
The main purpose of this trip fault is to detect the absence of the thermal  
sensor input from the heatsink.  
Primary causes:  
The DB heatsink thermal sensor input is not present.  
No power to TFBA card or TFBA card failure.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
TFBA  
CPFP  
Possible wiring faults:  
Thermal sensor input to TFBA is missing or damaged.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
50  
Trip  
HtSink DS temp  
low  
The HtSink DS temp low trip fault occurs when the diode source heatsink  
temperature (variable DS heat sink temp) is too low.  
The main purpose of the fault is to detect the absence of the thermal sensor  
input from the heatsink.  
Primary causes:  
The DS heatsink thermal sensor input is not present.  
No power to TFBA card or TFBA card failure.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
TFBA  
CPFP  
Possible wiring faults:  
Thermal sensor input to TFBA is missing or damaged  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
51  
52  
53  
54  
HtSink A temp low  
HtSink B temp low  
HtSink C temp low  
Ambient temp low  
Trip  
Trip  
Trip  
Trip  
The HtSink A temp low trip fault occurs when heatsink A temperature (variable  
Heat sink A temp) is too low.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink B temp low trip fault occurs when when heatsink B temperature  
(variable Heat sink B temp) is too low.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink C temp low trip fault occurs when when heatsink C temperature  
(variable Heat sink C temp) is too low.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The Ambient temp low trip fault occurs when the ambient temperature  
(variable Bridge ambient temp) is too low.  
The main purpose of the trip fault is to detect the absence of the ambient  
thermal sensor input.  
Primary causes:  
The ambient thermal sensor input is not present.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
The thermal sensor input to backplane connector J4 pins 7 and 8 is missing or  
damaged.  
55  
56  
AC line fuse blown  
Trip  
Trip  
The AC line fuse blown trip fault occurs when one of the fuses feeding the  
diode source assembly opens.  
Primary causes:  
Loss of I24 supply on CTBC feeding this string .  
Shorted diode in source bridge.  
DB resistor  
overload  
The DB resistor overload trip fault occurs when the dynamic braking resistor  
thermal model indicates that the dynamic braking package has exceeded its  
rating.  
Primary causes:  
Incorrect configuration of DB thermal model.  
DB resistor package has not been sized correctly for application.  
2-12 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
57  
DB resistor hot  
Alarm  
The DB resistor hot alarm occurs when the dynamic braking resistor thermal  
model indicates that the dynamic braking package is approaching its rating.  
Primary causes:  
Incorrect configuration of DB thermal model.  
DB resistor package is marginal for application.  
58  
Motor reac parms  
bad  
Trip  
The Motor reac parms bad trip fault occurs when the primary motor reactance  
parameters have values that are not appropriate relative to one another.  
Primary causes:  
Internal calculations are performed using Starting react Xst, Magnetizing react  
Xm, Stator lkg react X1,and Rotor lkg react X2. The relationship between  
these parameters should be: (Rotor lkg react X2 || Magnetizing react Xm) +  
Stator lkg react X1 > Starting react Xst.  
This should be corrected before attempting to run the drive.  
63  
BICM card over  
temp  
Fault  
The BICM card over temp trip fault occurs when the sensor on BICM  
measures a temperature above 60C. The drive control electronics cannot  
operate reliably above this temperature. Reset the fault after the temperature  
drops below 60C.  
BIC ambient temp is the variable being monitored to generate this fault.  
Primary causes:  
Blocked air flow to control rack.  
Control rack cooling fan failure.  
Ambient temperature is too high.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
64  
65  
Trip  
Trip  
HtSink DB over  
temp  
The HtSink DB over temp trip fault occurs when the dynamic brake heatsink  
temperature (variable DB heat sink temp) is too high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
HtSink DS over  
temp  
The HtSink DS over temp trip fault occurs when the diode source heatsink  
temperature (variable DS heat sink temp) is too high.  
The bridge turns off in response to the fault to protect the IGBTs from thermal  
damage.  
Primary causes:  
Airflow to the heatsink is not sufficient.  
Blower is not operating correctly.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
66  
67  
HtSink A over temp Trip  
HtSink B over temp Trip  
The HtSink A over temp trip fault occurs when heatsink A temperature  
(variable Heat sink A temp) is too high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink B over temp trip fault occurs when heatsink B temperature  
(variable Heat sink B temp) is too high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
68  
HtSink C over temp Trip  
The HtSink C over temp trip fault occurs when heatsink C temperature  
(variable Heat sink C temp) is too high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
69  
BICM card hot  
Alarm  
The BICM card hot alarm occurs when the sensor on BICM measures a  
temperature that is hot. The sensed temperature is above 55C and the control  
electronics are operating outside of their design parameters. If the  
temperature continues to rise and exceeds 60C, the drive will trip. This  
warning is generated in order to allow time for corrective action to be taken.  
BIC ambient temp is the variable being monitored to generate this alarm.  
Primary causes:  
Blocked air flow to control rack.  
Control rack cooling fan failure.  
Ambient temperature is too high.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
HtSink DB temp hot Alarm  
HtSink DS temp hot Alarm  
The HtSink DB temp hot alarm occurs when the dynamic brake heatsink  
temperature (variable DB heat sink temp) is high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink DS temp hot alarm occurs when the diode source heatsink  
temperature (variable DS heat sink temp) is high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
HtSink A temp hot  
HtSink B temp hot  
HtSink C temp hot  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Alarm  
The HtSink A temp hot alarm occurs when heatsink A temperature (variable  
Heat sink A temp) is high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink B temp hot alarm occurs when heatsink B temperature (variable  
Heat sink B temp) is high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink C temp hot alarm occurs when heatsink C temperature (variable  
Heat sink C temp) is high.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
Switchgear not  
ready  
The Switchgear not ready alarm occurs when the permissive string to close  
the main switchgear is not present. This permissive string ends at BTBH(8)  
and includes customer contacts used to open the main. The primary purpose  
of the alarm is to prevent charging of the DC bus until the switchgear is ready  
to close.  
Primary causes:  
Switchgear not racked in.  
Customer switchgear permissive not met.  
76  
HtSink DB rise high Alarm  
The HtSink DB rise high alarm occurs when the dynamic brake heatsink  
temperature (variable DB heat sink temp) is too far above the ambient  
temperature (variable Bridge ambient temp).  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
2-14 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
The HtSink DS rise high alarm occurs when the diode source heatsink  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
HtSink DS rise high Alarm  
temperature (variable DS heat sink temp) is too far above the ambient  
temperature (variable Bridge ambient temp).  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
HtSink A rise high  
HtSink B rise high  
HtSink C rise high  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Trip  
The HtSink A rise high alarm occurs when heatsink A temperature (variable  
Heat sink A temp) is too far above the ambient temperature (variable Bridge  
ambient temp).  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink B rise high alarm occurs when heatsink B temperature (variable  
Heat sink B temp) is too far above above the ambient temperature (variable  
Bridge ambient temp).  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The HtSink C rise high alarm occurs when heatsink A temperature (variable  
Heat sink C temp) is too far above above the ambient temperature (variable  
Bridge ambient temp).  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
HtSink temp  
imbalanc  
The HtSink temp imbalanc trip fault occurs when two of the measured heatsink  
temperatures differ by an amount exceeding heatsink imbalance fault level.  
The main purpose of the trip fault is to detect the absence of a thermal sensor  
input from the heatsink, the failure of the sensor itself or heat pipe failure.  
Primary causes:  
A heatsink thermal sensor input is not present.  
A heatsink thermal sensor is defective  
The heatpipe system is defective.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
82  
Trip  
HtSink blower  
failed  
The HtSink blower failed trip fault occurs when the drive is running and the  
cooling fans are not operating.  
Primary causes:  
Blower starter tripped due to blower motor overload or failure.  
Related functions:  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
83  
84  
Run permissive lost Alarm  
The Run permissive lost alarm occurs when the run permissive circuit is open.  
The state of the run permissive circuit is determined by the value of the  
variable to which parameter Run permissive sel points. The alarm can be  
disabled by setting parameter Run permissive sel equal to Unused.  
Related functions:  
Sequencer Permissives  
Cont req while flt  
Alarm  
The Cont req while flt alarm occurs when contactor A is commanded to close  
and a trip fault is present in the drive.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
85  
Flux req while flt  
Alarm  
The Flux req while flt alarm occurs when a flux command is issued and a trip  
fault is present in the drive. The alarm may also occur when a flux command  
is issued at the same time a diagnostic test (cell test, pulse test, autotune) is  
active.  
Primary causes:  
The external application layer issues an inappropriate flux enable request.  
86  
AC line over  
voltage  
Trip  
The AC line over voltage trip fault occurs when the control firmware detects  
that the magnitude of the AC line is above the value of Line OV fault level,  
which has a suggested value of 117% of nominal.  
The voltage magnitude used for this comparison is a processed by a low-pass  
filter. This filter is set to 1.2 rad/sec as a default, so transient over-voltages  
are allowed above the threshold value without causing this trip fault.  
Primary causes:  
AC line voltage is excessive.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied at a voltage other than that set by the factory.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
87  
AC line voltage  
high  
Alarm  
The AC line voltage high alarm occurs when the control firmware detects that  
the magnitude of the AC line is above the value of Line OV alarm level, which  
has a suggested value of 112% of nominal.  
The voltage magnitude used for this comparison is a low-pass filtered version  
of the fastest version. The filter is set to 1.2 rad/sec as a default, so transient  
voltage above the alarm turn-on value can occur without causing this alarm.  
This alarm will cease once the filtered value of voltage magnitude has  
decreased to below Line OV alarm clear, which has a suggested value of  
110% of nominal.  
Primary causes:  
AC line voltage is marginally excessive.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied at a voltage other than that set by the factory.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
2-16 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
88 AC line under volt  
Type Description  
Trip  
The AC line under volt trip fault occurs when the control firmware detects that  
the magnitude of the ac line is below the value of Line UV fault level, which  
has a suggested value of 50% of the nominal ac line input.  
The voltage magnitude used for this comparison is a low-pass filtered version  
of the signal. The filter is set to 1.2 rad/sec as a default, so transient voltages  
below the alarm turn-on value can occur without causing this trip fault.  
Primary causes:  
AC line voltage too low.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied at a voltage other than that set by the factory.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
89  
AC line volts low  
Alarm  
The AC line volts low alarm occurs when the control firmware detects that the  
magnitude of the ac line is below the value of Line UV alarm level, which has a  
suggested value of 88% of nominal.  
The voltage magnitude used for this comparison is a low-pass filtered version  
of the fastest version. The filter is set to 1.2 rad/sec as a default, so transient  
voltage above the alarm turn-on value can occur without causing this alarm.  
This alarm will cease once the filtered value of voltage magnitude has  
increased to above the value of Line UV alarm clear, which has a suggested  
value of 90% of nominal.  
Primary causes:  
AC line voltage is marginally low.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied at a voltage other than that set by the factory.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
90  
AC line over freq  
Trip  
The AC line over freq trip fault occurs when the control firmware detects that  
the frequency of the AC line is above the value of Over freq flt level, which  
has a suggested value of 125% of nominal.  
The frequency value used for this comparison is a low-pass filtered version of  
the fastest version. The filter is set to .2 rad/sec as a default, so transient  
over-frequency values are allowed above the threshold value without causing  
this trip fault.  
Primary causes:  
AC line frequency is excessive.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied at a 60hz while the factory setup value, AC grid  
frequency was at 50hz.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
91 AC line freq high  
Type Description  
Alarm  
The AC line freq high alarm occurs when the control firmware detects that the  
frequency of the AC line is above the value of Over freq alm level, which has  
a suggested value of nominal frequency plus 17.3 rad/sec.  
The frequency value used for this comparison is a low-pass filtered version of  
the fastest version. The filter is set to .2 rad/sec as a default, so transient  
over-frequency values are allowed above the threshold value without causing  
this alarm.  
This alarm will cease once the filtered value of filtered frequency has  
decreased to below the value of Over freq alm clear, which has a suggested  
value of nominal frequency plus 15.7rad/sec.  
Primary causes:  
AC line frequency is marginally excessive.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied 60hz while the factory setup value, AC grid  
frequency was at 50hz.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
92  
AC line under freq  
Trip  
The AC line under freq trip fault occurs when the control firmware detects that  
the frequency of the AC line is below the value of Under freq flt level, which  
has a suggested value of nominal of 50% of nominal.  
The frequency value used for this comparison is a low-pass filtered version of  
the fastest version. The filter is set to .2 rad/sec as a default, so transient  
under-frequency values are allowed below the threshold value without  
causing this trip fault.  
Primary causes:  
AC line frequency is low.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied at 50hz while the factory setup value, AC grid  
frequency was at 60hz.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
2-18 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
93 AC line freq low  
Type Description  
Alarm  
The AC line freq low alarm occurs when the control firmware detects that the  
frequency of the AC line is below the value of Under freq alm level, which has  
a suggested value of nominal minus 17.3rad/sec.  
The frequency value used for this comparison is a low-pass filtered version of  
the fastest version. The filter is set to .2 rad/sec as a default, so transient  
under-frequency values are allowed below the threshold value without  
causing this alarm.  
This alarm will cease once the filtered value of filtered frequency has  
increased to a value above below the value of Under freq alarm clr, which has  
a suggested value of nominal frequency minus 15.7rad/sec.  
Primary causes:  
AC line frequency is transiently low.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Source has been applied at 50hz while the factory setup value, AC grid  
frequency was at 60hz.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
94  
Stat charger  
timeout  
Trip  
The Stat charger timeout trip fault occurs when the static charger is unable to  
completely charge the DC bus. Normal charge operation terminates when the  
DC bus reaches 90% of its nominal level. At this point the charger is turned  
off and the switch gear is closed. If after around 70 seconds of charging the  
DC bus does not reach this threshold then the trip fault is generated and the  
charging sequence is aborted.  
Primary causes:  
Static charger failure.  
DC bus capacitor defective.  
95  
96  
Stat charger failed  
Switchgear failure  
Trip  
Trip  
The Stat charger failed trip fault occurs when the static charger reports a fault  
during its operation. The DC bus charging procedure stops when the trip fault  
occurs.  
Primary causes:  
Static charger failure.  
The Switchgear failure trip fault occurs when the AC line switchgear does not  
close in response to a close command during the bus charging sequence.  
The trip fault also occurs when the switchgear opens unexpectedly during  
drive operation.  
Primary causes:  
Switchgear defective.  
Switchgear opened via external command.  
Switchgear tripped.  
97  
Vdc <200v after  
5sec  
Trip  
The Vdc <200v after 5sec trip fault occurs when the static charger fails to  
charge the DC bus voltage to 200 volts within 5 seconds. The DC bus  
charging procedure stops when the trip fault occurs.  
Primary causes:  
Static charger failure.  
Local Fault or System Fault Active  
DC bus shorted.  
DC feedback not working.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
98 Ambient over temp  
Type Description  
Trip  
The Ambient over temp trip fault occurs when the ambient temperature  
(variable Bridge ambient temp) is too high.  
The main purpose of the trip fault is to use the ambient temperature  
measurement to detect a condition which could endanger the power bridge.  
Primary causes:  
The bridge environment and running conditions cause the ambient  
temperature to rise above a safe operating level.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
The thermal sensor input to backplane connector J4 pins 7 and 8 is damaged.  
99  
Ambient temp hot  
Alarm  
The Ambient temp hot alarm occurs when the ambient temperature (variable  
Bridge ambient temp) is too high.  
The main purpose of the alarm is to use the ambient temperature  
measurement to detect a condition which could endanger the power bridge.  
Primary causes:  
The bridge environment and running conditions cause the ambient  
temperature to rise above a safe operating level.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
The thermal sensor input to backplane connector J4 pins 7 and 8 is damaged.  
100 Phase A cur offset  
101 Phase B cur offset  
102 Phase C cur offset  
Trip  
Trip  
Trip  
The Phase A cur offset trip fault occurs when the phase A current offset  
(variable Phs A current offset) is too large. The current offset threshold level is  
1 percent of the rated shunt current (parameter IPN shunt size).  
Phs A current offset is the output of an automatic current offset calculation.  
The trip fault only occurs when the offset calculation is not active.  
Phase A cur offset evaluates phase A current feedback information collected  
while the power bridge is turned off, when current feedbacks should be zero.  
It uses the information to detect power bridge and feedback circuitry problems.  
The Phase B cur offset trip fault occurs when the phase B current offset  
(variable Phs B current offset) is too large. The current offset threshold level is  
1 percent of the rated shunt current (parameter IPN shunt size).  
Phs B current offset is the output of an automatic current offset calculation.  
The trip fault only occurs when the offset calculation is not active.  
Phase B cur offset evaluates phase B current feedback information collected  
while the power bridge is turned off, when current feedbacks should be zero.  
It uses the information to detect power bridge and feedback circuitry problems.  
The Phase C cur offset trip fault occurs when the phase C current offset  
(variable Phs C current offset) is too large. The current offset threshold level  
is 1 percent of the rated shunt current, represented by parameter IPN shunt  
size.  
Phs C current offset is the output of an automatic current offset calculation.  
The trip fault only occurs when the offset calculation is not active.  
Phase C cur offset evaluates phase C current feedback information collected  
while the power bridge is turned off, when current feedbacks should be zero.  
It uses the information to detect power bridge and feedback circuitry problems.  
2-20 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
103 A-B voltage offset  
Trip  
The A-B voltage offset trip fault occurs when the A-B line-line voltage offset  
(variable A-B, Voltage offset) is too large.  
A-B, Voltage offset is the output of an automatic voltage offset calculation.  
The trip fault only occurs when the offset calculation is not active.  
A-B voltage offset evaluates A-B voltage feedback information collected while  
the power bridge is turned off, when voltage feedbacks should be zero. It  
uses the information to detect power bridge and feedback circuitry problems.  
104 B-C voltage offset  
Trip  
The B-C voltage offset trip fault occurs when the B-C line-line voltage offset  
(variable B-C, Voltage offset) is too large.  
B-C, Voltage offset is the output of an automatic voltage offset calculation.  
The trip fault only occurs when the offset calculation is not active.  
B-C voltage offset evaluates B-C voltage feedback information collected while  
the power bridge is turned off, when voltage feedbacks should be zero. It  
uses the information to detect power bridge and feedback circuitry problems.  
105 Pulse tst config bad Trip  
The Pulse tst config bad trip fault occurs when the pulse test configuration  
parameters are invalid and the pulse test is invoked. The purpose of the fault  
is to prevent the pulse test from running under poorly defined conditions.  
Primary causes:  
One or more of the following parameters is negative: Pulse 1 on time, Mid  
pulse off time, Pulse 2 on time, Post pulse off time.  
106 Ckt board list fail  
Trip  
The Ckt board list fail trip fault occurs when the electronic board ID  
interrogation which happens during drive initialization fails. Each circuit board  
in the rack has an electronic ID.  
Ckt board list fail requires a hard reset to clear.  
Primary causes:  
A circuit board is not seated properly in its backplane sockets.  
The electronic ID part on a circuit board has experienced a failure.  
107 Motor volt offs high  
Alarm  
The Motor volt offs high alarm occurs when the line-line voltage offset  
measurements are invalid when the drive is started. Generally the alarm  
occurs when the drive is stopped and quickly started again.  
The voltage offsets are represented by variables A-B, Voltage offset and B-C,  
Voltage offset. They are the outputs of automatic voltage offset  
measurements. They are valid for a certain length of time after the  
measurements are performed.  
The voltage offset measurements are performed when the drive is started and  
enough time has elapsed to cause the previous voltage offset measurements  
to be invalid. However, there is an exception to this statement. The offset  
measurements are not performed during the flux decay time, which begins  
when the drive is stopped and continues for 8 rotor time constants.  
When the drive is started during the flux decay time, and the previous offset  
measurements are invalid because too much time has elapsed since they  
were performed, the Motor volt offs high alarm occurs.  
Related functions:  
Line-Line Voltage Protection  
108 DC bus voltage low Alarm  
The DC bus voltage low alarm occurs when the DC link voltage feedback  
(variable DC bus voltage) is too low.  
The alarm clears when the DC link voltage feedback rises to an acceptable  
voltage, which is the under voltage threshold plus a hysteresis voltage.  
DC bus voltage low only occurs when the drive is stopped.  
Possible board failures:  
FOSA  
DSPX  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
109  
Alarm  
Task 1 exec  
overrun  
The Task 1 exec overrun alarm occurs when Task 1 exceeds its allotted CPU  
execution time. This alarm may occur during system development but should  
not occur in the field.  
Primary causes:  
Task 1 contains too much functionality to complete in the specified execution  
time.  
Possible board failures:  
DSPX  
110  
Alarm  
Task 2 exec  
overrun  
The Task 2 exec overrun alarm occurs when Task 2 exceeds its allotted CPU  
execution time. This alarm may occur during system development but should  
not occur in the field.  
Primary causes:  
Task 2 contains too much functionality to complete in the specified execution  
time.  
Task 1 contains too much functionality. Although it completes in its specified  
execution time, it does not allow Task 2 to run to completion.  
Possible board failures:  
DSPX  
111  
Alarm  
Task 3 exec  
overrun  
The Task 3 exec overrun alarm occurs when Task 3 exceeds its allotted CPU  
execution time. This alarm may occur during system development but should  
not occur in the field.  
Primary causes:  
Task 3 contains too much functionality to complete in the specified execution  
time.  
Task 1 and Task 2 contain too much functionality. Although they complete in  
their specified execution time, they do not allow Task 3 to run to completion.  
Possible board failures:  
DSPX  
112 ADL msg stack fail  
Alarm  
The ADL msg stack fail alarm occurs when an attempt by autotune or cell test  
to allocate or free message stack memory fails. The purpose of the alarm is to  
indicate failure in the use of dynamic memory with asynchronous drive  
language functionality. This alarm may occur during system development but  
should not occur in the field.  
Primary causes:  
An attempt to allocate or free memory on behalf of the ADL message stack  
failed.  
113 Invalid board set  
Trip  
The Invalid board set trip fault occurs when the electronic board ID  
interrogation which happens during initialization does not produce the  
expected set of circuit boards. Each circuit board in the rack has an electronic  
ID which contains board type and revision information. Each Innovation  
Series product has an expected set of circuit boards. If any of the expected  
boards is missing, or if incorrect boards are present, the drive cannot operate  
properly.  
The circuit boards that the drive has identified can be obtained by making the  
following GE Control System Toolbox menu selections: View, Reports, Drive  
Version and Hardware Info.  
Primary causes:  
A circuit board which is required for the drive to operate properly is not  
present.  
A circuit board which should not be used in the drive is present.  
A circuit board is not seated properly in its backplane socket.  
The electronic ID part on a circuit board has experienced a failure.  
2-22 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
114 Ain 1 signal alarm  
Alarm  
The Ain 1 signal alarm occurs when the level of analog input number 1  
(variable Analog input 1) is too low. The alarm level is specified by parameter  
Analog in 1 flt lev.  
The alarm can occur only when parameter Analog in 1 flt mode is set equal to  
Low level alarm. The alarm is disabled for any other setting for parameter  
Analog in 1 flt mode.  
The main purpose of Ain 1 signal alarm is to detect a low 4-20 mA signal. The  
low level may indicate that a signal is missing which is required for the drive to  
operate properly.  
Primary causes:  
The analog input number 1 signal source is absent or unhealthy.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The analog input 1 alarm level, represented by parameter Analog in 1 flt lev, is  
set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 1 gain, represented by parameter Analog in 1 gain,  
is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 1 offset, represented by parameter Analog in 1  
offset, is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number in 1 flt mode, represented by parameter Analog in 1  
flt mode, is set incorrectly.  
Possible wiring faults:  
The connections between the analog signal source and ATBA terminal board  
locations 38 (AI1P) and 40 (AI1N) are missing or damaged.  
115 Ain 1 signal trip  
Trip  
The Ain 1 signal trip fault occurs when the level of analog input number 1  
(variable Analog input 1) is too low. The trip fault level is specified by  
parameter Analog in 1 flt lev.  
The trip fault can occur only when parameter Analog in 1 flt mode is set equal  
to Low level trip. The trip fault is disabled for any other setting for parameter  
Analog in 1 flt mode.  
The main purpose of Ain 1 signal trip is to detect a low 4-20 mA signal. The  
low level may indicate that a signal is missing which is required for the drive to  
operate properly.  
Primary causes:  
The analog input number 1 signal source is absent or unhealthy.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The analog input 1 trip fault level, represented by parameter Analog in 1 flt lev,  
is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 1 gain, represented by parameter Analog in 1 gain,  
is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 1 offset, represented by parameter Analog in 1  
offset, is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number in 1 flt mode, represented by parameter Analog in 1  
flt mode, is set incorrectly.  
Possible wiring faults:  
The connections between the analog signal source and ATBA terminal board  
locations 38 (AI1P) and 40 (AI1N) are missing or damaged.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
116 Ain 2 signal alarm  
Alarm  
The Ain 2 signal alarm occurs when the level of analog input number 2  
(variable Analog input 2) is too low. The alarm level is specified by parameter  
Analog in 2 flt lev.  
The alarm can occur only when parameter Analog in 2 flt mode is set equal to  
Low level alarm. The fault is disabled for any other setting for parameter  
Analog in 2 flt mode.  
The main purpose of Ain 2 signal alarm is to detect a low 4-20 mA signal. The  
low level may indicate that a signal is missing which is required for the drive to  
operate properly.  
Primary causes:  
The analog input number 2 signal source is absent or unhealthy.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The analog input 2 alarm level, represented by parameter Analog in 2 flt lev, is  
set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 2 gain, represented by parameter Analog in 2 gain,  
is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 2 offset, represented by parameter Analog in 2  
offset, is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number in 2 flt mode, represented by parameter Analog in 2  
flt mode, is set incorrectly.  
Possible wiring faults:  
The connections between the analog signal source and ATBA terminal board  
locations 44 (AI2P) and 46 (AI2N) are missing or damaged.  
117 Ain 2 signal trip  
Trip  
The Ain 2 signal trip fault occurs when the level of analog input number 2  
(variable Analog input 2) is too low. The trip fault level is specified by  
parameter Analog in 2 flt lev.  
The trip fault can occur only when parameter Analog in 2 flt mode is set equal  
to Low level trip. The trip fault is disabled for any other setting for parameter  
Analog in 2 flt mode.  
The main purpose of Ain 2 signal trip is to detect a low 4-20 mA signal. The  
low level may indicate that a signal is missing which is required for the drive to  
operate properly.  
Primary causes:  
The analog input number 2 signal source is absent or unhealthy.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The analog input 2 trip fault level, represented by parameter Analog in 2 flt lev,  
is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 2 gain, represented by parameter Analog in 2 gain,  
is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number 2 offset, represented by parameter Analog in 2  
offset, is set incorrectly.  
The analog input number in 2 flt mode, represented by parameter Analog in 2  
flt mode, is set incorrectly.  
Possible wiring faults:  
The connections between the analog signal source and ATBA terminal board  
locations 44 (AI2P) and 46 (AI2N) are missing or damaged.  
118 Illegal req for sby  
Alarm  
The Illegal req for sby alarm occurs when a Standby command is issued and a  
trip fault is present in the drive. The alarm may also occur when a Standby  
command is issued at the same time a diagnostic test (cell test, pulse test,  
autotune) is active.  
Primary causes:  
The external application layer issues an inappropriate standby request.  
2-24 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Alarm  
119  
Start permissive  
bad  
The Start permissive bad alarm occurs when the start permissive circuit is  
open and the drive is stopped. The state of the start permissive circuit is  
determined by the value of the variable which parameter Start permissive sel  
selects. The alarm can be disabled by setting parameter Start permissive sel  
equal to Unused.  
Related functions:  
Sequencer Permissives  
121 DBS1 IGDM card flt Trip  
The DBS1 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
122 DBS2 IGDM card flt Trip  
The DBS2 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
123 AS1 IGDM card flt  
The AS1 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
124 AS2 IGDM card flt  
Trip  
The AS2 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
2-26 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
125 AS3 IGDM card flt  
The AS3 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
126 AS4 IGDM card flt  
Trip  
The AS4 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
127 BS1 IGDM card flt  
The BS1 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
128 BS2 IGDM card flt  
Trip  
The BS2 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
2-28 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
129 BS3 IGDM card flt  
The BS3 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
130 BS4 IGDM card flt  
Trip  
The BS4 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
131 CS1 IGDM card flt  
The CS1 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
132 CS2 IGDM card flt  
Trip  
The CS2 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
2-30 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
133 CS3 IGDM card flt  
The CS3 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
134 CS4 IGDM card flt  
Trip  
The CS4 IGDM card flt trip fault is hardware generated. The trip fault occurs  
when the bridge control has lost communication with the indicated IGDM  
module. This communication occurs via fiber optic cable between the FOSA  
and the IGDM. During normal operation the IGDM transmits continuous light  
back to FOSA. Any loss of this signal triggers this trip fault.  
Several unrelated situations can cause the light to stop transmitting. Run the  
Cell Test Wizard to identify any failed devices.  
Primary causes:  
CPFP power supply failure  
IGDM failure  
A desat fault on the indicated IGBT was detected.  
Possible board failures:  
IGDM  
CPFP  
FOSA  
BICM  
Possible wiring faults:  
Fiber optic connection between FOSA and IGDM  
Power distribution wiring from CPFP.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
135 AC line transient  
Alarm  
The AC line transient alarm occurs as a result of significant phase lock loop  
error or significant phase imbalance.  
A phase imbalance signal is calculated by subtracting a control calculated  
threshold from a filtered signal which is formed by filtering the sum of two  
signals. One of these signals is the phase lock loop error and the other is the  
error between the demodulated real component of line voltage and the  
measured magnitude of the line.  
The calculated threshold phase imbalance level which is computed by the  
control is based on the magnitude of the input line voltage. This calculated  
phase imbalance threshold represents a phase imbalance of about 18% or a  
phase lock loop error of about 6.7 degrees. The phase imbalance signal  
which is a result of the previously mentioned subtraction is equal to about  
18% imbalance when it becomes positive.  
The phase imbalance signal feeds an integrator designed to cause the AC line  
transient alarm when the threshold has been exceeded for a very short time.  
That amount of time is dependent upon the amount of the phase imbalance,  
but the alarm will occur eventually if the imbalance signal remains positive.  
Primary causes:  
AC line disturbances.  
Transient phase imbalances.  
Weak control of frequency on diesel generator sets or gas turbine generator  
sets.  
Very fast voltage magnitude changes.  
Damaged reactor or transformer  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
2-32 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
136 AC line watchdog  
The AC line watchdog trip fault will occur when the AC line transient alarm  
persists for about one second. Both the trip fault and the alarm are a result of  
significant phase lock loop error or significant phase imbalance.  
A phase imbalance signal is calculated by subtracting a control calculated  
threshold from a filtered signal which is formed by filtering the sum of two  
signals. One of these signals is the phase lock loop error and the other is the  
error between the demodulated real component of line voltage and the  
measured magnitude of the line.  
The calculated threshold phase imbalance level which is computed by the  
control is based on the magnitude of the input line voltage. This calculated  
phase imbalance threshold represents a phase imbalance of about 18% or a  
phase lock loop error of about 6.7 degrees. The phase imbalance signal  
which is a result of the previously mentioned subtraction is equal to about  
18% imbalance when it becomes positive.  
The phase imbalance signal feeds an integrator designed to cause the AC line  
transient alarm when the threshold has been exceeded for a very short time.  
That amount of time is dependent upon the amount of the phase imbalance,  
but the alarm will occur eventually if the imbalance signal remains positive. If  
the alarm persists continuously for about one second, the AC line watchdog  
trip fault will occur.  
Primary causes:  
AC line disturbances.  
Transient phase imbalances.  
Weak control of frequency on diesel generator sets or gas turbine generator  
sets.  
Very fast voltage magnitude changes.  
Damaged reactor or transformer  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
137 AC line rev phs seq Trip  
The AC line rev phs seq trip fault occurs when the control senses that the  
rotation of the AC line is opposite of what is expected. This condition is  
checked only one time after the control is powered up. When the phase lock  
loop locks for the first time, just after the charging sequence has begun, the  
sign of PLL frequency is checked against the expected sign. The expected  
sign is determined by the setting of Phase rotation req. If Forward sequence  
is selected, the sign of PLL frequency is expected to be positive, otherwise, it  
must be negative. If the expected sign is not found, the trip fault is given. AC  
line rev phs seq requires a hard reset to clear.  
Before changing Phase rotation req, review the rotation of any AC cooling  
pumps or blowers in the drive. Incorrect phase sequence can lead to  
ineffective air or water flow in the cooling system.  
Primary causes:  
Control senses wrong phase sequence.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
Possible wiring faults:  
Main AC input lines to source are not in correct phase sequence.  
Sensing wires to FOSA are in wrong sequence.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Trip  
138 AC line vfb offset  
The AC line vfb offset trip fault occurs when the voltage feedback offset being  
calculated for line voltage feedbacks is above the allowable threshold. The  
system integrates the voltages seen on the AC input terminals. The results of  
this integration should be near zero since the input waveform is a sine wave.  
If the input line-line voltages integrate to a non-zero value above a predefined  
threshold this trip fault is generated.  
Primary causes:  
Bad VCO Circuit.  
Incorrect sensor wiring.  
Large DC current component through transformer.  
Possible board failures:  
VATF-SRC  
FOSA  
BICM  
DSPX  
Possible wiring faults:  
Check wiring of VATF-SRC sensor inputs to phase leg.  
139 AC line failed  
Trip  
The AC line failed trip fault occurs when the phase lock loop fails to  
synchronize during the start up sequence.  
Primary causes:  
The AC line is missing.  
There is a large AC line imbalance.  
There is a blown fuse.  
140 Xfrmr over temp  
141 Xfrmr temp hot  
142 Motor over temp  
Trip  
The Xfrmr over temp trip occurs when the transformer over temperature circuit  
is open. The control input which points to the over temperature circuit is  
selected by parameter Xfrmr OT fault sel.  
Xfrmr over temp can be disabled by setting parameter Xfrmr OT fault sel equal  
to Unused.  
Alarm  
Trip  
The Xfrmr temp hot alarm occurs when the transformer over temperature  
circuit is open. The control input which points to the over temperature circuit is  
selected by parameter Xfrmr OT fault sel.  
Xfrmr temp hot can be disabled by setting parameter Xfrmr OT fault sel equal  
to Unused.  
The Motor over temp trip fault occurs when the motor overtemperature circuit  
is open. The state of the motor overtemperature circuit is selected by  
parameter Motor OT fault sel.  
Motor over temp can be disabled by setting parameter Motor OT fault sel  
equal to Unused.  
Related functions:  
Motor Overtemperature Detection  
143 Motor temp hot  
Alarm  
The Motor temp hot trip fault occurs when the motor overtemperature circuit is  
open. The state of the motor overtemperature circuit is selected by parameter  
Motor OT fault sel.  
Motor temp hot can be disabled by setting parameter Motor OT fault sel equal  
to Unused.  
Related functions:  
Motor Overtemperature Detection  
144 Unrecognized IPN  
Trip  
The Unrecognized IPN trip fault occurs when the specified Intelligent Part  
Number (IPN) is not a valid combination of fields for the Innovation Series  
product. The IPN should correspond to the drive nameplate.  
Unrecognized IPN requires a hard reset to clear.  
2-34 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
145  
Trip  
Customer use NC  
flt  
The Customer use NC flt trip fault occurs when the customer normally closed  
circuit is open. The state of the normally closed circuit is selected by  
parameter User NC fault sel.  
146 Customer use NC  
Alarm  
Trip  
The Customer use NC alm alarm occurs when the customer normally closed  
circuit is open. The state of the normally closed circuit is selected by  
parameter User NC fault sel.  
alm  
147  
148  
Customer use NO  
flt  
The Customer use NO flt trip fault occurs when the customer normally open  
circuit is closed. The state of the normally open circuit is selected by  
parameter User NO fault sel.  
Alarm  
Trip  
Customer use NO  
alm  
The Customer use NO alm alarm occurs when the customer normally open  
circuit is closed. The state of the normally open circuit is selected by  
parameter User NO fault sel.  
149 Sat curve data bad  
The Sat curve data bad trip fault occurs when the flux saturation curve is not  
monotonic.  
Primary causes:  
The saturation curve data entered by the operator is bad.  
The saturation curve data calculated by autotune is bad.  
Possible configuration faults:  
One or more of the saturation curve parameters is bad. The saturation curve  
parameters are Flux curve amps 1, Flux curve amps 2, Flux curve amps 3,  
Flux curve amps 4, Flux curve amps 5, Flux curve voltage 1, Flux curve  
voltage 2, Flux curve voltage 3, Flux curve voltage 4, and Flux curve voltage 5.  
150 Rated flux data bad Trip  
151 Leakage curve bad Trip  
The Rated flux data bad trip fault occurs when the motor control calculation of  
rated flux (variable 100% Flux) does not converge to a stable value.  
The Leakage curve bad trip fault occurs when the leakage flux curve is not  
monotonic (i.e. Point 1 < point 2 < point 3 < point 4 < point 5).  
Primary causes:  
The calculated leakage curve has been derived from bad motor reactance  
data.  
The leakage curve data entered by the operator is bad.  
The leakage curve data calculated by autotune is bad.  
Possible configuration faults:  
When the leakage curve is not entered specifically point-by-point (see below)  
one is calculated from Starting react Xst, Magnetizing react Xm, Stator lkg  
react X1, and Rotor lkg react X2. The relationship between these parameters  
should be: (Rotor lkg react X2 || Magnetizing react Xm) + Stator lkg react X1  
> Starting react Xst. If Motor reac parms bad fault is also present, this is the  
likely cause.  
When the leakage curve is not entered specifically point-by-point, one or more  
of the leakage curve parameters is bad. The leakage curve parameters are  
Lkg flux current 1, Lkg flux current 2, Lkg flux current 3, Lkg flux current 4, Lkg  
flux current 5, Lkg flux voltage 1, Lkg flux voltage 2, Lkg flux voltage 3, Lkg flux  
voltage 4, and Lkg flux voltage 5. If the leakage parameters are not set, the  
leakage curve is determined as above, or as the results of autotune.  
152 Invalid Time Base  
Trip  
The Invalid Time Base trip fault occurs when the execution time base is  
invalid. Parameter Exec time/Chop freq contains valid choices for the time  
base.  
Invalid Time Base requires a hard reset to clear.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
153 DSPx Watchdog  
Trip  
The DSPx Watchdog trip fault occurs when the DSPX EPLD stops seeing a  
Locke watchdog toggle bit from the processor. A hard reset occurs and the fault is  
d
declared at initialization.  
DSPx Watchdog requires a hard reset to clear.  
Possible board failures:  
DSPX  
154 Reverse rotation  
155 Failure to rotate  
156 Loss of spd control  
157 Bic Watchdog  
Trip  
Trip  
Alarm  
Trip  
The Reverse rotation trip fault occurs when the motor shaft is rotating opposite  
to the requested direction.  
Related functions:  
Speed Control Fault Check  
The Failure to rotate trip fault occurs when speed regulator error grows large  
while the speed feedback is small.  
Related functions:  
Speed Control Fault Check  
The Loss of spd control trip fault occurs when the speed regulator error is too  
large.  
Related functions:  
Speed Control Fault Check  
The Bic Watchdog trip fault occurs when the BICM stops seeing a watchdog  
toggle bit from the DSPX. When the drive is running, BICM monitors a toggle  
bit being manipulated by DSPX. If DSPX does not toggle the bit on BICM  
within a predefined time interval, the BICM declares a fault and disables the  
bridge. This indicates that the processor cannot communicate reliably with the  
bridge interface card.  
Bic Watchdog requires a hard reset to clear.  
Possible configuration faults:  
The connected drive is a simulator but Simulate mode act is equal to False.  
Set Simulate mode equal to Yes to correct the problem.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
DSPX  
CABP (backplane)  
158 Bic watchdog echo  
Trip  
The Bic watchdog echo trip fault occurs when the DSPX stops seeing the echo  
of the watchdog toggle bit that it writes to the BICM. This indicates that the  
processor cannot communicate reliably with the bridge interface card.  
Primary Causes:  
Bent backplane connector pins or poorly seated cards.  
Possible board failures:  
BICM  
DSPX  
CABP (backplane)  
160 LAN trip request  
Trip  
The LAN trip request trip fault occurs when a request for a trip fault is received  
from the LAN by assertion of the reference Boolean signal Trip request, lan.  
161 LAN alarm request  
Alarm  
The LAN alarm request alarm occurs when a request for an alarm is received  
from the LAN by assertion of the reference Boolean signal Alarm request, lan.  
2-36 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
162  
Alarm  
LAN watchdog  
alarm  
The LAN watchdog alarm occurs when the connection between DSPX and the  
Application/LAN interface becomes invalid. This includes one of the following  
conditions, depending upon the selection of Network interface:  
The Application/LAN interface Dual-Port RAM watchdog stops.  
The ISBus frames stop.  
The alarm is declared after the condition persists for several hundred  
microseconds.  
163  
Alarm  
Restrictd fcn  
enabld  
The Restrictd fcn enabld alarm occurs when the selected execution time base  
in the parameter Exec time/Chop freq restricts certain drive functionality due to  
timing limitations, or the ISBus network is selected by the Network interface  
parameter and the DSPX hardware does not support ISBus. Certain functions  
that are presently enabled will not run.  
Possible configuration faults:  
Execution time base is too low. Select alternate time base in parameter Exec  
time/Chop freq.  
LAN is enabled, but will not operate. Disable LAN by setting parameter  
Network interface to None.  
ISBus is selected, but will not operate. Deselect ISBus by setting parameter  
Network interface, or replace the DSPX HIA with a DSPX H1B.  
164 LAN heartbeat trip  
Trip  
The LAN heartbeat trip occurs when all of the following conditions are present:  
Non-zero value is entered in Parameter LAN heartbeat time.  
The signal (Heartbeat ref, lan) fails to transition within in that time.  
The trip behavior is enabled by Parameter LAN trips inhibit.  
The LAN connection ok condition was previously detected.  
165  
166  
Alarm  
LAN heartbeat  
alarm  
The LAN heartbeat alarm occurs when all of the following conditions are  
present:  
Non-zero value is entered in Parameter LAN heartbeat time.  
The signal (Heartbeat ref, lan) fails to transition within in that time.  
Either the trip behavior is inhibited by Parameter LAN trips inhibit, or the trip  
behavior is enabled but the LAN connection ok condition was not previously  
detected.  
Trip  
Requird Parm  
Missing  
The Requird Parm Missing trip fault occurs when one of the required  
parameters either is not entered, “No Value” or has a value of zero. Check the  
following values, which can be found in the commissioning wizard.  
Primary causes:  
Motor rated voltage, Not entered  
Motor rated freq, Not entered  
Motor rated current, Not entered  
Motor rated rpm, Not entered  
Motor rated power, Not entered  
Motor service factor, Not entered  
167 Version mismatch  
Trip  
The Version mismatch trip fault occurs at initialization when the drive pattern  
detects a product or version mismatch with the parameters stored in non-  
volatile RAM. Download parameters to fix.  
168 System ISBus error Alarm  
The System ISBus error alarm occurs when an ISBus fault is detected in the  
DSPX control. The variable Sys ISBus error reg contains the bit-coded value  
of the last ISBus fault detected; each bit indicates a particular ISBus fault seen  
by the control. The variable Sys ISBus error cnt increments upon fault  
detection.  
Record the value of Sys ISBus error reg to assist factory troubleshooting  
efforts. Monitor the progression of Sys ISBus error cnt to obtain an indication  
of the rate of occurrence of fault conditions.  
Transient occurrence of this alarm upon initialization of the interface is  
expected.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting • 2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No. Name  
Type Description  
Alarm  
169 Frame PLL not OK  
The Frame PLL not OK alarm occurs when phase-lock between the DSPX  
control and the System ISBus or (local ACL) is not assured. Detection of the  
fault is enabled when the parameter Network interface is configured to select  
an interface for which synchronized operation is supported. The presence of  
this alarm indicates that data coherency is compromised.  
Verify the integrity of IsBus connections and configurations. If this alarm  
persists in the absence of any other interface faults, then verify that LAN frame  
time is consistent with that of the host, and confirm the absence of overrides,  
particularly regarding the Frame phaselock loop and DSPX timebase.  
Transient occurrence of this alarm upon initialization of the interface is  
expected.  
2-38 • Chapter 2 Faults and Troubleshooting  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Introduction  
Application firmware consists of coordinated blocks of code called functions. Each  
Chapter 4 describes wizards.  
function performs a specific task in controlling the drive. Parameters are adjustable  
values within a function that allow you to configure and adjust the drive behavior.  
Parameters can be set and modified using wizards within the keypad and the optional  
toolbox.  
The following is a list of the drive parameters and functionsIt is organized as  
follows:  
Section  
Page  
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 3-1  
Diagnostic and Utility Functions ......................................................................... 3-4  
Diagnostic and Utility Overview................................................................... 3-4  
Capture Buffer ............................................................................................. 3-4  
General Purpose Constants ..........................................................................3-10  
General Purpose Filters ...............................................................................3-11  
Oscillator ....................................................................................................3-12  
Position Feedback .......................................................................................3-13  
Predefined Constants...................................................................................3-14  
Signal Level Detector (SLD) .......................................................................3-15  
Simulator ....................................................................................................3-18  
Control Diagnostic Variables.......................................................................3-19  
Line Simulator ............................................................................................3-19  
Drive Configuration Functions ...........................................................................3-20  
Intelligent Part Number (IPN)......................................................................3-20  
Primary Motor & Application Data..............................................................3-21  
General Setup Functions.....................................................................................3-24  
Keypad Overview........................................................................................3-24  
Keypad Contrast Adjustment.......................................................................3-25  
Keypad Meter Configuration .......................................................................3-25  
Keypad Security Configuration....................................................................3-27  
Language and Units Presentation.................................................................3-28  
Language Display........................................................................................3-29  
I/O Functions.....................................................................................................3-30  
Analog and Digital I/O Testing....................................................................3-30  
Analog Inputs/Outputs and Mapping............................................................3-32  
Digital Inputs/Outputs and Mapping ............................................................3-33  
LAN Functions ..................................................................................................3-34  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LAN Overview............................................................................................3-34  
Frame Phaselock Loop ................................................................................3-34  
LAN Configuration and Health....................................................................3-35  
LAN Signal Map.........................................................................................3-38  
Motor Control Functions ....................................................................................3-44  
Motor Control Overview .............................................................................3-44  
Flux Curve ..................................................................................................3-45  
Leakage Inductance Curve...........................................................................3-46  
Line Transfer ..............................................................................................3-46  
Motor Equivalent Circuit.............................................................................3-48  
Motor Temperature Estimation ....................................................................3-49  
Power Dip Protection ..................................................................................3-49  
Tach Loss Detection....................................................................................3-50  
Protective Functions...........................................................................................3-52  
Custom User Faults.....................................................................................3-52  
DC Link Protection .....................................................................................3-52  
Ground Fault Protection (Fast).....................................................................3-54  
Hardware Fault Strings................................................................................3-55  
Heatsink Thermal Protection .......................................................................3-56  
Line-Line Voltage Protection.......................................................................3-58  
Motor Overtemperature Detection ...............................................................3-59  
Phase Current Protection .............................................................................3-60  
Timed Overcurrent Detection ......................................................................3-61  
Transformer Overtemperature Detection......................................................3-65  
Motor Ground Protection.............................................................................3-66  
Phase Imbalance Monitor ............................................................................3-68  
Line Monitor...............................................................................................3-70  
Phase Lock Loop.........................................................................................3-72  
Sequencer Functions ..........................................................................................3-74  
Sequencer Overview....................................................................................3-74  
Fault Reset Logic ........................................................................................3-74  
Sequencer Permissives.................................................................................3-76  
Stopping Commands and Modes..................................................................3-78  
Sequencer Commands .................................................................................3-82  
Sequencer Status .........................................................................................3-85  
Main Contactor Configuration .....................................................................3-87  
Speed Reference Functions.................................................................................3-89  
Critical Speed Avoidance ............................................................................3-89  
Local Speed Reference ................................................................................3-90  
Minimum Speed Limit ................................................................................3-91  
Remote Speed Reference.............................................................................3-92  
Speed Reference Generation........................................................................3-93  
Speed Reference Ramp................................................................................3-94  
Speed Reference Reverse.............................................................................3-97  
Speed/Torque Control Functions ........................................................................3-99  
Droop..........................................................................................................3-99  
Motor Control Interface.............................................................................3-100  
Speed Control Fault Check........................................................................3-103  
Speed Feedback Calculation ......................................................................3-105  
Speed/Torque Overview ............................................................................3-106  
Speed/Torque Regulator ............................................................................3-107  
System Data Parameters...................................................................................3-112  
Exec time/Chop freq..................................................................................3-112  
Motor ctrl alg sel.......................................................................................3-112  
Motor efficiency........................................................................................3-113  
Motor service factor ..................................................................................3-114  
3-2 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor winding cfg.....................................................................................3-114  
Preflux Forcing .........................................................................................3-114  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic and Utility Functions  
Diagnostic and Utility Overview  
The Innovation Series products contain a number of diagnostic functions. More  
information is available for the following topics.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Capture Buffer  
General Purpose Constants  
General Purpose Filters  
Oscillator  
Position Feedback  
Predefined Constants  
Signal Level Detector (SLD)  
Simulator  
Capture Buffer  
The Innovation Series capture buffer is used to collect coherent data at a specified  
rate in the drive. The capture buffer is circular, and will collect a fixed number of  
samples of each data channel before overwriting the oldest data. The capture buffer  
can be triggered on any available variable signal in the drive by using a Boolean  
trigger mode or comparison to a value. The capture buffer will also trigger on a Trip  
fault. It is useful for capturing drive variables for troubleshooting field problems and  
capturing specific drive events. The Trend Recorder can display the capture buffer  
output.  
Function Inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters to the Capture Buffer function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Capture ch1 select  
Capture ch2 select  
Capture ch3 select  
Selects capture buffer channel #1 variable.  
Selects capture buffer channel #2 variable.  
Selects capture buffer channel #3 variable.  
Channels 3 & 4 are active when Capture buff  
config is set to either 4 channels enabled or 8  
channels enabled.  
Capture ch4 select  
Capture ch5 select  
Selects capture buffer channel #4 variable.  
Selects capture buffer channel #5 variable.  
Channels 5, 6, 7, & 8 are active when Capture  
buff config is set to 8 channels enabled.  
Capture ch6 select  
Capture ch7 select  
Capture ch8 select  
Selects capture buffer channel #6 variable.  
Selects capture buffer channel #7 variable.  
Selects capture buffer channel #8 variable.  
3-4 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following variable is also an input to the Capture Buffer function.  
Variable  
Description  
Capture buffer ready  
Enables or disables the capture buffer data  
collection.  
Function Outputs  
The following table specifies the status variables of the Capture Buffer function.  
Variable  
Description  
Capture buffer stat  
Indicates the status of the capture buffer. Possible  
values are:  
Complete - Capture buffer has completed its  
collection of data and is disabled.  
Wait for trigger - The capture buffer is waiting for the  
evaluation of the trigger condition to go True.  
Post trigger capt – Capture buffer has been triggered  
and is collecting post trigger data.  
Capture triggered  
Indicates if the capture buffer has been triggered.  
True/False  
Number of channels  
Indicates the number of channels that the capture  
buffer is configured to collect based on the setting of  
Capture buff config.  
Capture buffer depth  
Capture samp period  
Total capture time  
Indicates the depth (i.e. number of samples) of the  
capture buffer. Capture buffer depth is inversely  
proportional to the number of channels collected.  
Indicates the interval at which the capture buffer  
collects data based on the values of the parameters  
Capture period and Capture period gain. Seconds  
Indicates the total time that a full buffer would collect  
based on the values of Capture buffer depth,  
Capture period, and Capture period gain.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Configuration  
The following table specifies the parameters that configure the size and execution  
rate of the capture buffer.  
Parameter  
Description  
Capture buff config  
Specifies the number of channels to collect. The depth  
of the capture buffer is inversely proportional to the  
number of channels collected. Possible values are:  
2 channels enabled  
4 channels enabled  
8 channels enabled  
Note Whenever this parameter is modified, the  
capture buffer must be re-enabled to collect data with  
the new channel configuration.  
Capture period  
Determines the rate at which the capture buffer collects  
data. Each rate in the enumeration list is based on a  
particular execution rate in the processor. Actual  
execution rates vary between each Innovation Series  
product. Possible values are:  
Disable - Disables the capture buffer from collecting  
data.  
Task 1 rate - Collects data at the fastest execution rate  
of the processor.  
Task 2 rate - Collects data at n times slower than Task  
1 rate. (n Task 1’s are executed every 1 Task 2).  
Task 3 rate - Collects data at m times slower than Task  
2 rate. (m Task 2’s are executed every 1 Task 3).  
Note Whenever this parameter is modified, the  
capture buffer must be re-enabled to collect data at the  
new rate.  
Capture period gain  
Cap re-enable delay  
Increases the collection period of the capture buffer  
(data is collected at a slower rate). For an integer  
value, n (>1), the capture buffer would collect data  
every nth execution of the Capture period.  
Controls an auto re-enable function for the capture  
buffer. This parameter sets the delay from when the  
capture buffer has completed its collection to when the  
capture buffer is re-enabled automatically. Minutes.  
The capture buffer will only re-enable when the drive is  
not stopped (Stopped is False). If Cap re-enable delay  
expires when the drive is stopped, the capture buffer  
will not re-enable until the drive is running again.  
Note A value of –1 disables the auto re-enable  
function.  
3-6 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table specifies the parameters that configure the capture buffer trigger  
control. The capture buffer will also automatically trigger on the rising edge of Trip  
fault active.  
Parameter  
Description  
Capture pre trigger  
Specifies the portion of the capture buffer that will be  
collected before the trigger occurs. Percent.  
Capture trig select  
Selects capture buffer trigger variable. The capture  
buffer will also automatically trigger on the rising edge  
of Trip fault active.  
Capture trigger mode  
Specifies the type of comparison against the variable  
selected in Capture trig select. Possible values are:  
Boolean - Triggers when variable is a 1. Variable in  
Capture trig select must be of Boolean type.  
Inverted boolean - Triggers when variable is a 0.  
Variable in Capture trig select must be of Boolean  
type.  
Equal to level - Triggers when variable is equal to  
value in Capture trig level.  
Not equal to level - Triggers when variable is not  
equal to value in Capture trig level.  
Greater than level - Triggers when variable is greater  
than value in Capture trig level.  
Less than level - Triggers when variable is equal to  
value in Capture trig level.  
Capture trigger type  
Specifies the behavior of the configurable trigger.  
Possible values are:  
Level Trigger - Will trigger when the comparison  
specified by Capture trigger mode has been satisfied.  
If the trigger condition is satisfied when the capture  
buffer is enabled, it will trigger immediately and collect  
post-trigger data.  
Edge Trigger - Will trigger on the rising edge of the  
trigger condition specified by Capture trigger mode.  
Capture trig level  
Specifies the threshold level for level-based trigger  
comparisons.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The capture buffer can be accessed from the Trend Recorder in the Control System  
Toolbox. To enable the Trend Recorder:  
•
From the View menu, select Trend Recorder OR select the Trend Recorder  
button on the toolbar:  
.
To enable the Innovation Series capture buffer from the Trend Recorder:  
1. From the Edit menu, select Configure OR select the Configure button from the  
Trend Recorder toolbar:  
2. Select the Block Collected tab on the Trend Recorder Configuration dialog box  
and click OK.  
This enables the Upload  
and Edit Block  
buttons on the Trend  
Recorder toolbar.  
3. Select the Edit Block button from the toolbar, which brings up a block diagram  
that allows you to configure the capture buffer parameters described in the  
Function Input and Function Configuration sections. All of the parameter  
values must be sent to the drive for the capture buffer to work correctly.  
4. Go back to the Trend Recorder and select the Record  
button to enable the  
capture buffer. The toolbox status bar should change from a “Stopped”  
indicationto a waiting indication, as follows:  
This indicates that the capture buffer is collecting data and waiting for the trigger.  
To upload the capture buffer data into the Trend Recorder, select the Upload button  
from the Trend Recorder toolbar.  
3-8 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capture Buffer Compatible Behavior  
To view more than 4 channels or more than 512 samples, the Capture Buffer  
function should be used with a GE Control System Toolbox with a release of at least  
V6.1. Toolbox version prior to the V6.1 release can handle a maximum capture  
buffer size of 4 channels x 512 samples.  
The capture buffer will present the collected data in a backward compatible format if  
used in conjunction with an older Toolbox release, however, because the capture  
buffer size has increased, only a sub-set of the data will be presented when viewed  
with an older Toolbox.  
Related diagrams  
•
Capture Buffer Configuration (Capture)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Purpose Constants  
Each Innovation Series product provides three general purpose constants. The  
general purpose constants allow users to place constant values in device variables.  
The general purpose constants are particularly useful in configuring diagnostic  
functions.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the General Purpose Constants  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
GP Constant 1  
GP Constant 2  
GP Constant 3  
User defined constant 1  
User defined constant 2  
User defined constant 3  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the General Purpose Constants  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
GP Constant 1  
GP Constant 2  
GP Constant 3  
User defined constant 1  
User defined constant 2  
User defined constant 3  
Function description  
The General Purpose Constants function sets the general purpose constant output  
variables equal to the general purpose constant input parameters:  
GP Constant 1 = GP Constant 1  
GP Constant 2 = GP Constant 2  
GP Constant 3 = GP Constant 3  
The units of the general purpose constants are determined by their use. For example,  
if one of the constants is used as a comparison level in a diagnostic function such as  
an SLD, the implied units of the constant are the internal control units of the signal  
against which the comparison is made. The units of the general purpose constant are  
not necessarily the display units of the comparison signal. For more information on  
the difference between display units and internal control units, see the Language and  
Units Presentation function help.  
Related diagrams  
•
Diagnostic & Utility Functions (Diag_Util)  
3-10 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Purpose Filters  
Each Innovation Series product contains four general purpose filters. The general  
purpose filters allow users to filter signals with a specified bandwidth.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the General Purpose Filters  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
GP filter 1 sel  
GP filter 2 sel  
GP filter 3 sel  
GP filter 4 sel  
Selects input to general purpose filter 1  
Selects input to general purpose filter 2  
Selects input to general purpose filter 3  
Selects input to general purpose filter 4  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the General Purpose Filters  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
GP filter 1 output  
GP filter 2 output  
GP filter 3 output  
GP filter 4 output  
General purpose filter 1 output  
General purpose filter 2 output  
General purpose filter 3 output  
General purpose filter 4 output  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the General Purpose  
Filters function.  
Parameter  
Description  
GP filter 1 bndwth  
GP filter 2 bndwth  
GP filter 3 bndwth  
GP filter 4 bndwth  
General purpose filter 1 bandwidth  
General purpose filter 2 bandwidth  
General purpose filter 3 bandwidth  
General purpose filter 4 bandwidth  
Function description  
The operation of general purpose filter 1 is described here. Each of the four general  
purpose filters behaves in the same manner.  
The input, output, and bandwidth of general purpose filter 1 are defined as follows:  
Input = Variable selected by GP filter 1 sel  
Output = GP filter 1 output  
Bandwidth = GP filter 1 bndwth  
The transfer functions for general purpose filter 1 is defined as follows:  
Bandwidth  
Output =  
× Input  
s + Bandwidth  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The general purpose filters run at the fastest execution rate available in the product.  
This is the same rate at which bridge feedbacks are collected, the fastest regulators  
are operated, and hardware commands are issued. The filter execution rate is  
generally faster than the 1-millisecond rate at which the application functions and the  
LAN communications occur.  
Related diagrams  
•
Diagnostic & Utility Functions (Diag_Util)  
Oscillator  
Each Innovation Series product contains a diagnostic oscillator. The oscillator  
switches between a positive value and a negative value, spending the same amount  
of time at each level. The oscillator can be used as a reference signal source for test  
purposes.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Oscillator function.  
Variable  
Description  
Sqr wave osc output  
Oscillator square wave output  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Oscillator function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Oscillator neg mag  
Oscillator pos mag  
Oscillator 1/2 cycle  
Oscillator enable  
Magnitude of the negative portion of oscillator output  
Magnitude of the positive portion of oscillator output  
Time that defines half of the oscillation period, sec  
Enable oscillator  
Function description  
The Oscillator function produces a square wave output that switches between a  
positive value and a negative value. The function can be enabled or disabled via the  
parameter, Oscillator enable. The output levels and the period of the square wave are  
configurable. The following diagram shows how the configuration parameters  
generate the oscillator output.  
Sqr wave osc output  
Oscillator pos mag  
0
Time  
-Oscillator neg mag  
Oscillator 1/2 cycle  
Related diagrams  
•
Diagnostic & Utility Functions (Diag_Util)  
3-12 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Position Feedback  
The Position Feedback function provides a set of position feedback signals in 22-bit  
floating point format.  
Function inputs  
The following tachometer signals are inputs to the Position Feedback function.  
•
•
•
Tachometer position: This signal is a 16-bit integer with units of A-quad-B  
counts.  
Marker count: This signal is a 16-bit integer that increments every time a marker  
pulse is detected.  
Marked tachometer position: This signal is a 16-bit integer with units of A-quad-  
B counts. It equals the tachometer position at the instant the marker pulse is  
detected.  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Position Feedback function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Pos sample cmd sel  
Selects the signal that specifies the sampling of  
tachometer position.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Position Feedback function.  
Variable  
Description  
Tachometer position extended to 22 bits and  
converted to floating point format.  
Position counter  
Marked tachometer position extended to 22 bits and  
converted to floating point format.  
Pos cntr mark  
Sampled version of Position counter, sampled on the  
falling edge of the sample signal.  
Pos down edge smp  
Pos up edge sample  
Sampled version of Position counter, sampled on the  
rising edge of the sample signal.  
Function description  
The output signals Position counter and Pos cntr mark are the tachometer position  
and the marked tachometer position extended from 16 to 22 bits. Position counter  
and Pos cntr mark roll over to zero (0) at the maximum value that can be represented  
in 22 bits (4,194,303). The transition happens in both the forward and backward  
directions.  
Position counter is sampled when the signal selected by Pos sample cmd sel  
transitions between True and False. Pos up edge sample equals Position counter  
when the signal selected by Pos sample cmd sel changes from False to True. Pos  
down edge smp equals Position counter when the signal selected by Pos sample cmd  
sel changes from True to False.  
The Task Interval Strobe shown on the Position Feedback diagram represents  
sampling of hardware that takes place at the Task 1 rate, the fastest execution rate  
available to the control. The Task 1 rate is faster than the fastest rate at which  
Position counter can be sampled.  
Related diagrams  
•
Position Feedback Instrument (PosFbk)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Predefined Constants  
Each Innovation Series product contains a number of predefined constants. These  
constants are available for use in a variety of functions. They are generally found on  
the selection lists for parameters that select control signals.  
Floating point constants  
The following floating point constants are available.  
•
•
•
Constant float 0.0  
Constant float -1.0  
Constant float 1.0  
Integer constants  
The following integer constants are available.  
•
•
•
Constant integer0  
Constant integer -1  
Constant integer1  
Boolean constants  
The following Boolean constants are available.  
•
•
Force True  
Force False  
Unused constants  
The Unused category of constants can be used to turn off certain product behaviors.  
See individual functional helps for information on how the Unused constants affect  
those functions.  
The following Unused constants are available.  
•
•
•
Unused float  
Unused integer  
Unused boolean  
3-14 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Signal Level Detector (SLD)  
Each Innovation Series product supplies three SLD channels. Each SLD does a level  
comparison on two inputs. The Boolean output of the SLD represents the status of  
the comparison. The nature of the comparison is configurable.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Signal Level Detector  
(SLD) function.  
Parameter  
Description  
SLD1 input 1 select  
SLD1 input 2 select  
SLD2 input 1 select  
SLD2 input 2 select  
SLD3 input 1 select  
SLD3 input 2 select  
Selects SLD1 input 1 value  
Selects SLD1 input 2 value  
Selects SLD2 input 1 value  
Selects SLD2 input 2 value  
Selects SLD3 input 1 value  
Selects SLD3 input 2 value  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Signal Level Detector (SLD)  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
SLD1 status  
SLD2 status  
SLD3 status  
Status of SLD1 comparison  
Status of SLD2 comparison  
Status of SLD3 comparison  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Signal Level  
Detector (SLD) function:  
Parameter  
Description  
SLD1 compare mode  
SLD1 sensitivity  
Type of comparison that the SLD1 function performs  
SLD1 comparison level  
SLD1 hysteresis  
SLD1 turn off deadband  
SLD1 pick up delay  
SLD1 drop out delay  
SLD1 input 1 abs val  
SLD2 compare mode  
SLD2 sensitivity  
SLD1 turn on time delay, Seconds  
SLD1 turn off time delay, Seconds  
SLD1 input 1 mode (allows the absolute value to be used)  
Type of comparison that the SLD2 function performs  
SLD2 comparison level  
SLD2 hysteresis  
SLD2 turn off deadband  
SLD2 pick up delay  
SLD2 drop out delay  
SLD2 input 1 abs val  
SLD3 compare mode  
SLD3 sensitivity  
SLD2 turn on time delay, Seconds  
SLD2 turn off time delay, Seconds  
SLD2 input 1 mode (allows the absolute value to be used)  
Type of comparison that the SLD3 function performs  
SLD3 comparison level  
SLD3 hysteresis  
SLD3 turn off deadband  
SLD3 pick up delay  
SLD3 drop out delay  
SLD3 input 1 abs val  
SLD3 turn on time delay, Seconds  
SLD3 turn off time delay, Seconds  
SLD3 input 1 mode (allows the absolute value to be used)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The following description explains the operation of SLD1. It also applies to SLD2  
and SLD3.  
Parameters SLD1 input 1 select and SLD1 input 2 select select device variables. They  
define the inputs for SLD1. The following table specifies how the inputs are formed  
based on the value of parameter SLD1 input 1 abs val.  
SLD1 input 1 abs val  
SLD1 Input Values  
False  
Input 1 = SLD1 input 1 select pointer value  
Input 2 = SLD1 input 2 select pointer value  
True  
Input 1 = Absolute value of SLD1 input 1 select  
pointer value  
Input 2 = SLD1 input 2 select pointer value  
The parameter SLD1 compare mode determines the type of comparison that is  
performed on the two inputs. It determines how the configuration parameters SLD1  
sensitivity, SLD1 hysteresis, SLD1 pick up delay, and SLD1 drop out delay are  
interpreted. It determines how the output SLD1 status is formed. The following  
tables specify the behavior of SLD1 for the different enumerations of SLD1 compare  
mode.  
SLD1 compare mode = In1-In2>Sen  
Turn on condition  
Turn on delay time  
(Input 1 - Input 2) > SLD1 sensitivity  
Turn on condition must remain valid for SLD1 pick up  
delay. After the delay SLD1 status = True.  
Turn off condition  
Turn off delay time  
(Input 1 - Input 2) <= (SLD1 sensitivity - SLD1  
hysteresis)  
Turn off condition must remain valid for SLD1 drop out  
delay. After the delay SLD1 status = False.  
SLD1 compare mode = In1-In2<Sen  
Turn on condition  
Turn on delay time  
(Input 1 - Input 2) < SLD1 sensitivity  
Turn on condition must remain valid for SLD1 pick up  
delay. After the delay SLD1 status = True.  
Turn off condition  
Turn off delay time  
(Input 1 - Input 2) >= (SLD1 sensitivity + SLD1  
hysteresis)  
Turn off condition must remain valid for SLD1 drop out  
delay. After the delay SLD1 status = False.  
SLD1 compare mode = In1<>In2  
Turn on condition  
Turn on delay time  
Absolute value of (Input 1 - Input 2) > SLD1 sensitivity  
Turn on condition must remain valid for SLD1 pick up  
delay. After the delay SLD1 status = True.  
Turn off condition  
Turn off delay time  
Absolute value of (Input 1 - Input 2) <=(SLD  
sensitivity-SLD1 hysteresis)  
Turn off condition must remain valid for SLD1 drop out  
delay. After the delay SLD1 status = False.  
3-16 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SLD1 compare mode = In1=In2  
Turn on condition  
Turn on delay time  
Turn off condition  
Absolute value of (Input 1 - Input 2) <= SLD1  
sensitivity  
Turn on condition must remain valid for SLD1 pick up  
delay. After the delay SLD1 status = True.  
Absolute value of (Input 1 - Input 2) > (SLD1  
sensitivity + SLD1 hysteresis)  
Turn off delay time  
Turn off condition must remain valid for SLD1 drop  
out delay. After the delay SLD1 status = False.  
SLD1 compare mode = In1-In2>Sen one shot  
Turn on condition  
Turn on delay time  
(Input 1 - Input 2) > SLD1 sensitivity  
After the turn on condition is met a timer begins. The  
turn on condition does not need to remain valid while  
the timer runs.  
After SLD1 pick up delay expires SLD1 status = True.  
After SLD1 status goes True a timer begins.  
Turn off condition  
Reset condition  
After SLD1 drop out delay expires SLD1 status =  
False.  
The minimum time SLD1 status is True is  
approximately 1 millisecond.  
SLD 1 becomes active again when (Input 1 - Input 2)  
<= (SLD1 sensitivity - SLD1 hysteresis)  
SLD1 compare mode = In1-In2<Sen one shot  
Turn on condition  
Turn on delay time  
(Input 1 - Input 2) < SLD1 sensitivity  
After the turn on condition is met a timer begins. The  
turn on condition does not need to remain valid while  
the timer runs.  
After SLD1 pick up delay expires SLD1 status = True.  
After SLD1 status goes True a timer begins.  
Turn off condition  
After SLD1 drop out delay expires SLD1 status =  
False.  
The minimum time SLD1 status is True is  
approximately 1 millisecond.  
Reset condition  
SLD 1 becomes active again when (Input 1 - Input 2)  
>= (SLD1 sensitivity + SLD1 hysteresis)  
Related diagrams  
•
Signal Level Detection (SLD)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simulator  
The Simulator function allows the user to simulate the operation of the drive and  
motor without applying power to the motor, power bridge, and other equipment.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Simulator function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Ext sim spd enb sel  
Selects the signal that disables the calculated model  
speed and allows the speed to be specified by another  
source.  
Ext sim spd sel  
Ext sim trq sel  
Selects the variable motor speed that overrides the speed  
calculation. RPM  
Selects the variable torque produced by an external load.  
Newton-meters  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Simulator function.  
Variable  
Description  
Simulated speed  
Motor speed. Radians/second  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Simulator function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Simulate mode  
Fixed ext sim spd  
Enables drive and motor simulation.  
Constant motor speed that overrides the speed  
calculation. Radians/second.  
Simulated load  
Constant torque produced by an external load. Newton-  
meters or Pound-feet.  
Sim const friction  
Simulated inertia  
Constant friction. Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Inertia of motor and load. Kilogram-meters² or Pound-  
feet²  
Simulated stiction  
Sim visc friction  
Constant stiction. Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Viscous friction coefficient. Newton-meters/RPM or  
Pound-feet/RPM  
3-18 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Diagnostic Variables  
The Control Diagnostic Variables function outputs filtered diagnostic variables that  
are available to the user.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Control Diagnostic  
Variables function.  
Variable  
Description  
AC line voltage mag  
Filtered ac line magnitude. A true magnitude calculation  
of Vab and Vbc which is then filtered.  
AC line frequency  
Filtered ac line frequency produced by the phase lock  
loop.  
Line Simulator  
The Line Simulator function allows the user to simulate the operation of the drive  
and the ac line without applying power to the bridge.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Line Simulator function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Sim line frequency  
AC line frequency in simulator mode. It is normally set  
to, but not restricted to, 50 or 60 Hertz.  
Sim freq slew rate  
Sim A-N volt scale  
Simulator frequency slew in radians/sec/sec. Setting  
this value to a something other than zero causes the  
frequency to slew continuously from (-)0.5 of nominal to  
(+)0.25 of nominal and back. This exercises the entire  
transient frequency range covered by the specification.  
Sim A-N volt scale can be used to attenuate phase A  
line to neutral voltage in order to simulate transient line  
conditions. The line to neutral voltage for phase A will  
be attenuated according to Sim A-N volt scale every  
2.70046 Seconds. The duration of the transient is  
specified by the parameter Volt short time. The 2.70046  
Seconds period was chosen so that the transient  
condition gradually walks through the sine wave. In  
order to simulate an open on phase A, set Sim A-N volt  
scale to 1.0, Sim B-N volt scale to 1.0, and Sim C-N volt  
scale to 0.5.  
Sim B-N volt scale  
Sim C-N volt scale  
A-B volt fault scale  
Sim B-N volt scale behaves identically to Sim A-N volt  
scale except that it affects phase B instead of phase A.  
Sim C-N volt scale behaves identically to Sim A-N volt  
scale except that it affects phase C instead of phase A.  
A-B volt fault scale simulates a line to line fault  
between phases A and B. The default for A-B volt fault  
scale is 0, providing no attenuation.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Line Simulator function.  
Variable  
Description  
Simulate mode act  
Sim A-B line voltage  
Sim B-C line voltage  
Sim A-N line voltage  
Sim B-N line voltage  
Sim C-N line voltage  
Simulator mode  
Simulator line to line voltage A-B  
Simulator line to line voltage B-C  
Simulator line to neutral voltage A  
Simulator line to neutral voltage B  
Simulator line to neutral voltage C  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Line Simulator  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Simulate mode  
Enables simulation mode.  
Drive Configuration Functions  
Intelligent Part Number (IPN)  
The Intelligent Part Number (IPN) specifies the Innovation Series product and the  
basic configuration of the product. The IPN is the catalog number for the Innovation  
Series product. It can be found on the inside of the cabinet door.  
The IPN for the Innovation Series medium voltage drive with general industrial  
application pattern takes the following form:  
ACMVAC2-G-FRAM-VOLT-AMPS-xxxxxxxxx-xxx-xx  
The IPN contains eight fields separated by dashes. The fields shown in italics are  
user configurable.  
Product field  
The product field is designated by the characters ACMVAC2. The characters have  
the following meaning:  
AC  
MV  
AC  
2
AC inverter drive  
Medium voltage  
AC fed  
2300 volt  
3-20 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pattern field  
The pattern field is designated by the character G. The character has the following  
meaning:  
G
General industrial application firmware pattern  
Frame size field  
The frame size field is designated by the characters FRAM. The designation has the  
following meaning:  
FRAM  
Bridge frame size  
The following medium voltage drive frame sizes are supported:  
0700 (Eupec IGBTs)  
0701 (Powerex IGBTs)  
System voltage field  
The system voltage field is designated by the characters VOLT. The designation has  
the following meaning:  
VOLT  
Maximum lineup output AC voltage  
The medium voltage drive supports the following system voltages:  
2300  
Shunt rating field  
The shunt rating field is designated by the characters AMPS. The designation has the  
following meaning:  
AMPS  
Total shunt amp rating per phase  
The medium voltage drive supports the following shunt ratings:  
0300, 0500, 0600, 0800, 1000  
Primary Motor & Application Data  
User entered parameters  
Eight primary values define the motor load for the Innovation Series general  
industrial application (GIA) pattern drive. The primary values include motor  
nameplate data and application data. They are user-entered parameters that are  
generally specified within the Drive Commissioning wizard. The primary values are  
used to determine control and protective settings for the drive.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table lists the user-entered parameters that specify the primary motor  
and application data:  
Parameter  
Description  
Motor rated current  
Motor rated voltage  
Crossover Voltage  
Motor rated power  
Motor rated freq  
Motor rated rpm  
Motor poles  
Motor nameplate current. Amps  
Motor nameplate voltage. Volts  
Voltage at which field weakening begins. RMS volts  
Motor nameplate power. Kilowatts or Horsepower  
Motor nameplate frequency. Hertz  
Motor nameplate speed. RPM  
The number of magnetic poles in the motor. If this  
parameter is left blank, the control determines the  
number of poles from parameters Motor rated freq  
and Motor rated rpm. In the case of some lower speed  
motors (less than 900 rpm at 60 hz) with high slip, this  
determination may not be accurate and parameter  
Motor poles must have the correct value entered.  
Unitless. Must be an even whole number.  
Applied top RPM  
Top application speed. RPM  
Reflected indication variables  
The Innovation Series drive contains a variable copy of some of the primary motor  
and application parameters. The following table lists the variable reflections of the  
primary value parameters:  
Variable  
Description  
100% Motor current  
100% Motor voltage  
100% Motor power  
100% Applied RPM  
Motor nameplate current. RMS amps  
Voltage at which field weakening begins. RMS volts  
Motor nameplate power. Kilowatts or Horsepower  
Top application speed used in overspeed fault  
protection and other areas of motor control. RPM  
3-22 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calculated control variables  
The Innovation Series drive contains a set of variables that are calculated from the  
primary motor parameters but are not exact reflections of the primary parameters.  
These calculated variables are used in motor control and protective functions. The  
values of the variables are calculated at drive initialization after power up or a hard  
reset.  
The following table lists the variables calculated from the primary value parameters:  
Parameter  
Description  
100% Motor torque  
Motor torque at motor nameplate conditions. Newton-  
meters or Pound-feet  
100% Flux  
Motor flux at motor nameplate conditions. Volts/hertz  
100% Torque current  
Motor torque current at motor nameplate conditions.  
RMS amps  
100% Flux current  
100% Slip  
Motor flux current at motor nameplate conditions.  
RMS amps  
Motor slip at motor nameplate conditions.  
Radians/second  
Display meter scaling parameters  
The Innovation Series drive contains a set of parameters that specify the scaling for  
the DDI and toolbox display meters. These parameters are calculated from the  
primary motor and application parameters. They are calculated within the Drive  
Commissioning wizard or the Per Unit Setup wizard. If any of the primary data  
parameters is modified outside the Drive Commissioning wizard, the Per Unit Setup  
wizard should be performed to update the display meter scaling parameters.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Setup Functions  
Keypad Overview  
The Drive Diagnostic Interface (DDI; also known as the keypad) is mounted on the  
door of an Innovation Series drive. The DDI provides a simple, easily accessible  
means for a user to set, monitor, and maintain the drive locally.  
The DDI provides both analog and digital representations of drive functions and  
values. Its keypad is logically organized into two functional groups: navigation keys  
and drive control keys. The Run and Stop keys are set to the side for easy access.  
The operator can use the DDI to perform the following common tasks:  
•
•
•
•
•
Monitor speed / current / voltage / power  
Start/Stop the drive  
Adjust a configuration parameter  
Reset a fault condition  
Commission the drive through a wizard  
Each drive has its own DDI for local control.  
Related functions  
Following are the DDI functions that can be modified from the toolbox:  
•
•
•
•
Keypad Contrast Adjustment  
Keypad Meter Configuration  
Keypad Security Configuration  
Language Display  
3-24 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keypad Contrast Adjustment  
Normally the LCD contrast of the Drive Diagnostic Interface (DDI) should be  
adjusted at the DDI or keypad. The user can modify the Keypad contrast adj  
parameter under the General Setup -> Keypad -> Keypad Functions menu.  
A special keypad key sequence is also available to make this adjustment and is  
especially useful when the contrast is too light or too dark to navigate the menus.  
The sequence is to hold down the Menu key and press either the up (darker) or down  
(lighter) arrow keys until the contrast is acceptable.  
If your DDI firmware version is prior to V02.01.03C and the DDI contrast is too  
light or too dark to navigate through the menus you will need to use Toolbox to find  
the Keypad contrast adj parameter and make the adjustment.  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Keypad contrast adj  
Adjusts the contrast of the DDI LCD screen. Values are  
from 0 to 63 where 63 is the darkest contrast. Setting  
Keypad contrast adj to 0 will cause the DDI to adjust the  
contrast to a middle value.  
Note Once Keypad contrast adj has been modified in  
the toolbox and then saved in the drive, a hard reset  
must be performed for the user to see their modification  
to the contrast reflected in the DDI.  
Keypad Meter Configuration  
The DDI Status screen has four animated meters and associated text that display  
drive performance information.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The variables displayed by the meters and the meter ranges can be modified by  
configuring the following parameters:  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Keypad meter 1 sel  
Selects a floating-point variable that is displayed in  
Meter #1 on the DDI Status screen.  
Keypad meter 2 sel  
Keypad meter 3 sel  
Keypad meter 4 sel  
Keypad meter 1 range  
Selects a floating-point variable that is displayed in  
Meter #2 on the DDI Status screen.  
Selects a floating-point variable that is displayed in  
Meter #3 on the DDI Status screen.  
Selects a floating-point variable that is displayed in  
Meter #4 on the DDI Status screen.  
Selects the bar graph meter scaling for Meter #1.  
Possible values are as follows (note that all bar  
graphs are scaled in percent (%)):  
0 to +100  
-100 to +100  
0 to +150  
-150 to +150  
0 to +200  
-200 to +200  
0 to +300  
-300 to +300  
Keypad meter 2 range  
Keypad meter 3 range  
Keypad meter 4 range  
Keypad meter 1 ref  
Selects the bar graph meter scaling for Meter #2.  
See Keypad meter 1 range for possible values.  
Selects the bar graph meter scaling for Meter #3.  
See Keypad meter 1 range for possible values.  
Selects the bar graph meter scaling for Meter #4.  
See Keypad meter 1 range for possible values.  
Selects an optional reference display for Meter #1. If  
selected, the bar graph for this reference signal will be  
displayed just above the bar graph for the feedback  
signal. Both graphs will be displayed in the Meter #1  
area as a split screen. The reference signal will only  
be displayed if local mode is enabled. Keypad meter 1  
ref can be disabled from the pick list.  
Note When changing DDI meter configuration from the toolbox, first save the  
modified parameters to the drive. Press the Menu button and then the Status button  
on the DDI. This will cause the meters on the Status screen to update.  
3-26 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keypad Security Configuration  
The DDI contains security controls to keep unauthorized personnel from operating or  
reconfiguring the drive. These security controls can be modified from the toolbox or  
from the DDI. The controls are password protected in the DDI.  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Keypad privilege  
Selects the privilege level in the DDI. Possible levels are:  
Read only - Disables both drive controls and configuration  
functions. Allows user to view but not edit parameters.  
Operate & read only – Enables drive controls, but disables  
configuration functions. Allows user to view but not edit  
parameters.  
Configure & operate - Enables both drive controls and  
configuration functions.  
See below for full list of enabled functions for each level.  
Keypad password  
Sets the 5-digit password value for the DDI. When a user  
attempts to modify the Keypad security configuration from  
the DDI, he will be prompted to enter a password. If the  
entered password does not match the value in Keypad  
password, the user will not be permitted to modify the  
security configuration (Keypad privilege and Keypad  
password).  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The following table displays a list of all DDI functions. Available functions for each  
privilege level are marked with a check mark (ü).  
Privilege Level  
Operate &  
read only  
Cofigure &  
operate  
Keypad Function  
Read Only  
Drive control functions  
Stop  
Start  
Reset faults  
Change direction  
Remote/Local  
Jog  
Speed Increment  
Speed Decrement  
Menu functions  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Status button  
Menu button  
Navigation buttons (Arrows, Esc, Enter)  
Display Active Faults  
Display Fault History  
View Parameters  
Edit Parameters  
View Variables  
Wizards  
Adjust Screen Contrast  
Display Firmware Version  
Display Hardware Information  
Save Parameters to Backup  
Restore Parameters from Backup  
Compare Current Parameters to Backup  
View Overrides  
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Note When changing DDI security configuration from the toolbox, first save the  
modified parameters to the drive. Then switch between the Menu and Status screens  
for the password and privilege level to update.  
Language and Units Presentation  
The presentation of the Innovation Series product in the Control System Toolbox and  
DDI (keypad) can be customized. The presentation can be configured using the  
following parameters:  
•
•
Language  
Display units  
In regions in which English is not the primary language, the Innovation Series  
product provides a choice of two languages: English and the indigenous language.  
The presentation is in English if parameter Language is set to English. The  
presentation is in the indigenous language if Language is set to Native.Parameters  
and variables in the Innovation Series product can be displayed in different unit  
systems. The display units are chosen by parameter Display units.  
3-28 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Three different unit systems are available:  
•
•
•
Imperial (English)  
Metric (SI)  
Native (Platform)  
If Display units is set to Native (Platform), then values are displayed in the same  
units that the internal control uses. The following table specifies some of the unit  
system differences.  
Display units  
Length  
Power  
Torque  
Flux  
Feet  
Horsepower  
Foot-pounds  
Volts/hertz  
Imperial  
(English)  
Metric (SI)  
Meters  
Meters  
Kilowatts  
Watts  
Newton-meters  
Newton-meters  
Volts/hertz  
Webers  
Native (Platform)  
Language Display  
As long as the keypad has been configured correctly, the DDI can display its menu  
and status information in an alternate language.  
Note Presently this function is not yet operational.  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Language  
Selects the language in which to display all information in the DDI.  
Possible selections are:  
English - Displays DDI text in English.  
Native - Displays DDI text in the native language that is specified  
when DDI Menus are downloaded from the toolbox (see below).  
Function description  
To display the DDI text in a non-English language, the user must first download the  
appropriate DDI Menus. The user can perform this operation from the toolbox by  
selecting from the menu bar: Device > Download > DDI Menus.  
The user will then be prompted to select an alternate language to download to the  
DDI.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The toolbox will then build the DDI Menu file and can be downloaded to the DDI.  
Once the download is completed, the user can then modify the Language parameter  
to the desired value. The DDI will display its text in the selected language the next  
time its screen is updated  
I/O Functions  
Analog and Digital I/O Testing  
The Analog and Digital I/O Testing function is intended for factory use only.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the Analog and  
Digital I/O Testing function.  
Parameter  
Description  
I/O test mode req  
Simulate mode  
Hardware I/O test request.  
Simulator mode request.  
Both I/O test mode req and Simulate mode must be True for the Analog and Digital  
I/O Testing function to be active. I/O test mode is True when the function is active.  
Analog inputs  
The following table specifies the signals available for testing the analog inputs.  
Variable  
Description  
Analog input 1 volts  
Analog input 2 volts  
Voltage of analog input 1 source. DC volts  
Voltage of analog input 2 source. DC volts  
3-30 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital inputs  
The following table specifies the signals available for testing the digital inputs.  
Variable  
Description  
Digital input 1 test  
Digital input 2 test  
Digital input 3 test  
Digital input 4 test  
Digital input 5 test  
Digital input 6 test  
Unfiltered value of digital input 1.  
Unfiltered value of digital input 2.  
Unfiltered value of digital input 3.  
Unfiltered value of digital input 4.  
Unfiltered value of digital input 5.  
Unfiltered value of digital input 6.  
Hi-fi counters  
The following table specifies the signals available for testing the high fidelity VCO  
counters.  
Variable  
Description  
VCO 1 unfiltered  
VCO 2 unfiltered  
VCO 3 unfiltered  
VCO 1 counter value.  
VCO 1 counter value.  
VCO 1 counter value.  
Local and system fault strings  
The following table specifies the signals available for testing the local and system  
fault strings.  
Variable  
Description  
Local fault test  
System fault test  
Unfiltered value of local fault string.  
Unfiltered value of system fault string.  
Contactor status  
The following table specifies the signals available for testing the main contactor  
status input.  
Variable  
Description  
MA cont test mode  
Unfiltered value of main contactor status.  
DAC and meter outputs  
The following table specifies the parameters that configure the analog output (DAC)  
and meter output tests.  
Parameter  
Description  
Analog out 1 test  
Analog out 1 test  
Analog out 1 test  
Analog out 1 test  
Analog meter 3 test  
Analog meter 4 test  
DAC 1 output voltage. DC volts  
DAC 2 output voltage. DC volts  
DAC 3 / Meter 1 output voltage. DC volts  
DAC 4 / Meter 2 output voltage. DC volts  
Meter 3 output voltage. DC volts  
Meter 4 output voltage. DC volts  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Relay outputs  
The following table specifies the parameters that configure the relay output test.  
Parameter  
Description  
Relay 1 test  
Relay 1 output.  
Relay 2 output.  
Relay 3 output.  
Relay 4 output.  
Relay 2 test  
Relay 3 test  
SS relay driver test  
Related diagrams  
•
Analog and Digital I/O Testing (HWIO_Tst)  
Analog Inputs/Outputs and Mapping  
Analog Inputs  
Two bipolar (±10 volts) analog inputs are available at the terminal board (ATB).  
Jumpers on the BAIA board connect a burden resistor that allow these inputs to be  
used for 4-20 ma references.  
Analog in 1 offset and Analog in 2 offset provide a voltage offset adjustment. Analog  
in 1 gain and Analog in 2 gain can be used to scale the inputs from volts to  
appropriate application units. Analog in 1 filter and Analog in 2 filter provide first-  
order signal softening at Analog input 1 and Analog input 2.  
Loss of 4-20 ma signal can be configured by selecting a lower threshold Analog in 1  
flt lev and Analog in 2 flt lev and then selecting the appropriate fault type, Analog in  
1 flt mode and Analog in 2 flt mode.  
Analog Outputs  
Two bipolar (±10 volts) DAC outputs are available at the terminal board (ATB).  
The signal to be output is selected by Analog out 1 select. This signal can be offset  
by Analog out 1 offset using the same units as the signal to be output. The signal is  
scaled for output by setting Analog out 1 scale to the value that will produce +10  
volts. The second DAC is configured in a similar manner.  
Meters  
Four bipolar (±10 volts) meter drivers are available for use with the optional meter  
assembly. This assembly is connected to the drive at connector J8 on the backplane.  
The signal to be metered is selected by Analog meter 1 sel. This signal can be offset  
by Meter 1 offset using the same units as the signal to be metered. The signal is  
scaled for output by setting Analog meter 1 scale to the value which shall produce  
+10 volts. Meter 1 mode is used to accommodate both 0 - +10 volt meters and -10 -  
+10 volt meters. Analog meter 1 scale is unaffected by Meter 1 mode. The remaining  
three meters are configured similarly.  
Related diagrams  
•
Analog Inputs / Outputs & Mapping (HWIO_Ana)  
3-32 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital Inputs/Outputs and Mapping  
Digital inputs and outputs provide an interface between the outside world and the  
control. The ATB (terminal board) provides six general purpose digital inputs.  
Three dry contact relays and one solid state relay driver are provided as outputs.  
System and Local fault strings provide start and trip interlocks to the control.  
Isolated digital inputs are listed with their associated terminal board points. A filter  
debounces a noisy input signal. The filter should be set to zero in most instances,  
since the hardware provides a level of debounce conditioning. The variables Digital  
input 1 through Digital input 6 indicate the logical state of each digital input and are  
used to interface to functions in the drive that require a Boolean signal.  
Each relay output may be used by setting the parameters Relay 1 select through  
Relay 3 select to the variables whose logical states are desired to drive the  
corresponding relay. The associated terminal board points are shown for output  
terminals of each relay. The variables Relay 1 state, Relay 2 state, and Relay 3 state  
indicates whether the relay coils are energized.  
Relay four is a solid-state relay driver that should be used for driving a 24 V dc, 10  
mA relay. The relay driver output may be used by setting the parameter SS relay  
driver sel to the variable whose logical state is desired to drive the relay. Solid state  
relay indicates the status of the relay driver.  
In addition to the four programmable outputs available on ATB, the drive provides 3  
additional application outputs through the CTBC terminal board. The CTBC outputs  
are not programmable but instead are mapped to some commonly used signals in the  
drive. CTBC outputs are solid-state relay drivers that can be used for driving 24 V  
dc, 10 mA relays. Signals available on CTBC are as follows:  
CTBC Output  
Pre-programmed function  
D08 (pins 33 & 35)  
D07 (pins 29 & 31)  
D06 (pins 25 & 27)  
Closed when No trip fault is True  
Closed when Running is True  
Closed when No faults active is True  
A pilot relay controls a main contactor. Most applications do not require a contactor  
(see MA contactor absent). This contactor is normally controlled through drive  
sequencing, but it may be controlled alternately by MA close req sel. The contactor  
cannot be energized if either the Local Fault String or the System Fault String are  
open. If the contactor is closed and the Local Fault String or the System Fault String  
open, the contactor will be de-energized.  
Contactor status feedback is available (MA contactor closed). MA contactor fbk  
determines if the drive sequencer requires MA contactor closed to be active in  
response to a contactor close command.  
Related diagrams  
•
Digital Inputs / Outputs & Mapping (HWIO_Dig)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LAN Functions  
LAN Overview  
Information is available for the following LAN topics:  
•
•
•
Frame Phaselock Loop  
LAN Configuration and Health  
LAN Signal Map  
Frame Phaselock Loop  
The Frame Phaselock Loop function can synchronize the execution of the Innovation  
Series drive control firmware with the communication frame of the product  
application interface. This feature is available only for those interface which support  
synchronous communications, such as ISBus.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the published output variables of the Frame Phaselock  
Loop function.  
Variable  
Description  
Frame PLL OK status  
Boolean signal indicating the lock status of the Frame  
Phaselock Loop.  
FPLL Phase error  
FPLL Freq Output  
Phase error signal for the Frame Phaselock Loop.  
Scaling is per-unitized such that unity corresponds to the  
full frame period; signal values range from minus one-  
half to plus one-half.  
Frequency adjustment output signal for the Frame  
Phaselock Loop. Scaling is per-unitized such that unity  
corresponds to the full frame period; signal values range  
from minus output limit to plus output limit.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies configuration parameters related to the Frame  
Phaselock Loop function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Network interface  
Network interface type. Specifies one of the following  
interface types:  
No interface  
ACL dual port memory (synchronous operation  
supported)  
ISBus (synchronous operation supported)  
DRIVENET - Optional LAN modules such as Genius &  
Profibus  
LAN frame time  
Expected communication frame period. Allowed frame  
periods are 1, 2, 4, and 8 milliseconds.  
3-34 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The product completely handles configuration of the Frame Phaselock Loop  
function. Appropriate user selections of Network interface activate the function, and  
user specification of LAN frame time sets the nominal period.  
The Boolean variable Frame PLL OK status indicates the status of the Frame  
Phaselock Loop. The asserted state indicates that the function has been activated and  
that lock status has been validated. The unasserted state indicates that the function is  
not activated or that lock status is not validated.  
The FPLL Phase error signal reflects the phase error when valid phase information  
has been extracted from the interface. A signal value of zero indicates either zero  
phase error or invalid phase information. Scaling is such that one per-unit phase error  
represents a full communication frame period.  
The FPLL Freq Output signal is the frequency adjustment output of the function; the  
authority of the function to modify away from nominal frequency is strictly limited.  
When the function is not activated, the FPLL Freq Output signal is zero. When the  
function is activated but no valid phase information is detected, then FPLL Freq  
Output maintains its last valid calculated value.  
When phaselock is achieved, Frame PLL OK status is asserted, FPLL Phase error is  
at a zero-mean steady-state value, and FPLL Freq Output is at a non-zero, but very  
small, steady-state value. When the Frame Phaselock Loop has been requested by  
configuration but phaselock is not achieved, then Frame PLL not OK is shown.  
LAN Configuration and Health  
The following information describes the configuration of the primary signal interface  
between the Innovation Series device and the application layer interface. The  
application layer may consist of an embedded ACL card, a direct LAN interface  
card, or an application-level ISBus serial bus.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration parameters  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the LAN Configuration  
and Health function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Network interface  
Network interface type. Specifies one of the following  
interface types:  
No interface  
ACL dual port memory  
ISBus  
DRIVENET - Other optional LAN modules such as  
Genius and Profibus  
LAN frame time  
LAN fbk avg time  
Expected communication frame period. Allowed frame  
periods are 1, 2, 4, and 8 milliseconds.  
Period over which feedback signals are sequentially  
averaged. The LAN Signal Map help topic describes  
which feedback signals are averaged. If LAN fbk avg  
time is zero, no averaging occurs.  
LAN cmds inhibit  
LAN trips inhibit  
Disables LAN references, forcing the signal interface to  
operate in feedback-only mode. Local images of  
reference signals are set to zero (0.0) or False.  
Disables LAN heartbeat trip fault (LAN heartbeat trip),  
and enable the corresponding alarm (LAN heartbeat  
alarm).  
LAN heartbeat time  
Sys ISBus node #  
Period within which transition must be detected in the  
LAN heartbeat signal (Heartbeat ref, lan) to satisfy the  
local heartbeat timeout check.  
ISBus node for the Innovation Series Drive device. Each  
device on the ISBus bus should be assigned a unique  
node between 1 and 31.  
LAN parameter 1  
through LAN  
parameter 16  
These parameters are used only by optional LAN  
modules and are specific to those modules. Such items  
as baud rate and device number are configured via these  
parameters. Please see the documentation for the  
specific LAN module for detailed information.  
3-36 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies variables that indicate the LAN health and status for  
the LAN Configuration and Health function.  
Variable  
Description  
LAN connection ok  
Indicates that the health of the LAN connection is  
good, such that the LAN watchdog function is  
satisfied.  
LAN commands OK  
Heartbeat ref, lan  
Indicates that the health of the LAN references is  
good, based upon detection of two successive LAN  
connection ok indications.  
LAN heartbeat signal that proceeds from the  
application layer to the local device, used locally for  
LAN heartbeat trip) and LAN heartbeat alarm)  
detection, and as the source of the reflected  
Heartbeat fbk, lan signal.  
Heartbeat fbk, lan  
Sys ISBus error cnt  
Sys ISBus error reg  
Local device reflection of the Heartbeat ref, lan  
signal that is sent back to the application layer.  
Counter signal which provides an indication of the  
rate of occurrence of ISBus fault conditions.  
Bit-coded value of the last ISBus fault detected;  
each bit indicates a particular ISBus fault seen by  
the control.  
Frame PLL OK status  
FPLL Phase error  
Boolean signal indicating the lock status of the  
Frame Phaselock Loop.  
Phase error signal for the Frame Phaselock Loop.  
Scaling is per-unitized such that unity corresponds  
to the full frame period; signal values range from  
minus one-half to plus one-half.  
FPLL Freq Output  
Frequency adjustment output signal for the Frame  
Phaselock Loop. Scaling is per-unitized such that  
unity corresponds to the full frame period; signal  
values range from minus output limit to plus output  
limit.  
Function description  
Determining the integrity of the LAN interface involves several communication  
layers, and may vary depending upon the specific communication options in use.  
The Innovation Series Drive has two levels of validation available: LAN watchdog  
and LAN heartbeat. Status information is conveyed to the user and/or application by  
status signals and fault declarations.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The LAN watchdog function describes the set of mechanisms the drive uses to  
determine the status of the connection between DSPX and the module immediately  
“above” the drive in the LAN hierarchy. For Dual-Port RAM interfaces, such as that  
used for an embedded ACLA controller and for a direct LAN interface, the watchdog  
takes the form of a handshake protocol. In this handshake protocol, the drive  
determines the presence of a minimum level of intelligence on the host on the LAN  
side of the shared memory. For ISBus interfaces, such as that used by a remote or  
embedded ACLA controller, the watchdog reflects the reception of ISBus frame  
synchronization codes. The watchdog function’s immediate authority is limited to  
alarms and status variables, although the status information does play a functional  
role in the interface management. Note that the watchdog does not offer information  
about the LAN connection’s status which may be supported beyond the immediate  
interface to DSPX. In fact, many device networks offer no means of determining  
basic network health.  
The LAN heartbeat function is visible to the user. The heartbeat function uses  
published signal map channels, and is available for use by the application. It provides  
a means to “loop back” a signal between the drive and any level in the LAN  
hierarchy so a higher-level controller can validate the entire connection pathway,  
including the drive itself. Locally, the drive can be configured to trigger a trip or  
alarm if the heartbeat reference signal fails to transition within a configurable period  
of time. The heartbeat offers the most robust validation options from a system  
perspective, although it offers the least information about the detected problem’s  
location.  
The System ISBus error alarm occurs when an ISBus fault is detected in the DSPX  
control. The variable Sys ISBus error reg contains the bit-coded value of the last  
ISBus fault detected; each bit indicates a particular ISBus fault seen by the control.  
The variable Sys ISBus error cnt increments upon fault detection. When initializing  
the interface, the user should expect the alarm to signal intermittently.  
The Frame PLL not OK alarm occurs when phase-lock between the DSPX control  
and the System ISBus or (local ACL) is not assured. Detection of the fault is enabled  
when the parameter Network interface is configured to select an interface for which  
synchronized operation is supported. This alarm indicates that data coherency is  
compromised. Status of the Frame Phaselock Loop function can be observed via the  
signals Frame PLL OK status, FPLL Phase error, and FPLL Freq Output.  
LAN Signal Map  
The following information describes the primary signal interface between the  
Innovation Series Drive and the product application layer interface. The application  
layer may consist of an embedded ACL card, a direct LAN interface card, or an  
application-level ISBus serial bus.  
The LAN Signal Map is a fixed signal map that defines dedicated registered  
communication channels for specific signals. It is defined in terms of paired  
reference and feedback pages that are the same size physically. The internal data  
organization of the reference and feedback pages may differ. The standard  
Innovation Series signal map page consists of eight 32-bit elements.  
3-38 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each 32-bit element in the LAN Signal Map is assigned a data type. The following  
data types are used.  
•
Single precision floating point, IEEE 754 format (23-bit mantissa, 8-bit  
exponent, 1-bit sign).  
•
•
Two’s complement integer.  
Individual 1-bit Boolean signals.  
LAN References  
The following table specifies the LAN Signal Map reference signals.  
Page &  
Element  
Signal  
Data  
Type  
Description  
1
1
Boolea  
n bits  
Boolean requests. See table below for  
definition of request bits.  
1
2
Auto speed ref,  
lan  
Floating  
point  
Auto speed reference that can be used  
in the Speed Reference Generation  
function. RPM  
1
1
3
4
Spd ref offset,  
lan  
Floating  
point  
Speed reference offset that can be  
used prior to the Speed/Torque  
Regulator function. RPM  
Torque ref, lan  
Floating  
point  
Torque reference that can be used in  
the Speed/Torque Regulator function.  
Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
1
1
1
5
6
7
Unused  
Unused  
GP lan ref 1  
Floating  
point  
General purpose reference that can be  
used by a number of functions.  
1
2
8
1
GP lan ref 2  
Floating  
point  
General purpose reference that can be  
used by a number of functions.  
Torque fdfwd,  
lan  
Floating  
point  
Torque feed forward reference that can  
be used in the Speed/Torque  
Regulator function. Newton-meters or  
Pound-feet  
2
2
2
3
Flux reference,  
lan  
Floating  
point  
Flux scale that can be used in the  
Motor Control Interface function.  
Droop comp  
ref, lan  
Floating  
point  
Droop compensation reference that  
can be used in the Droop function. Per  
unit torque  
2
2
2
2
4
5
6
7
Unused  
Unused  
Unused  
GP lan ref 3  
Floating  
point  
General purpose reference that can be  
used by a number of functions.  
2
8
GP lan ref 4  
Floating  
point  
General purpose reference that can be  
used by a number of functions.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table specifies the LAN Signal Map request bits that appear in Page 1,  
Element 1 of the reference signal map.  
Bit  
Signal  
Description  
0
Heartbeat ref,  
lan  
Heartbeat signal to validate LAN health.  
1
2
3
Fault reset req,  
lan  
Request to reset drive faults. Functionality is always  
enabled.  
Trip request,  
lan  
Request to trip the drive. Functionality is always  
enabled.  
Alarm request,  
lan  
Request to declare an alarm in the drive. Functionality  
is always enabled.  
4-7  
8
Unused  
Run request,  
lan  
Request to run the drive. Functionality is always  
enabled.  
9
Jog request,  
lan  
Request to jog the drive. Functionality is always  
enabled.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
X stop request,  
lan  
Request to perform an X stop in the drive.  
Functionality is always enabled.  
Full flux req, lan  
Request to flux the drive. Functionality is always  
enabled.  
Rev mode req,  
lan  
Request to reverse the direction of rotation that can be  
used in the Speed Reference Generation function.  
Torque mode  
req, lan  
Request to enable torque mode that can be used in the  
Speed/Torque Regulator function.  
Droop disab  
req, lan  
Request to inhibit droop functionality that can be used  
in the Droop function.  
Trq lim 2 sel,  
lan  
Request to choose between torque limits that can be  
used in the Motor Control Interface function.  
Ramp rate 2  
sel, lan  
Request to choose between ramp rates that can be  
used in the Speed Reference Ramp function.  
17  
18  
Unused  
Auto mode req,  
lan  
Request to enable auto reference mode that can be  
used in the Speed Reference Generation function.  
19-23  
24  
Unused  
GP lan req bit 1  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
GP lan req bit 2  
GP lan req bit 3  
GP lan req bit 4  
GP lan req bit 5  
GP lan req bit 6  
GP lan req bit 7  
GP lan req bit 8  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
General purpose request that can be used by a number  
of functions.  
3-40 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LAN Feedbacks  
Several LAN feedback signals are averaged versions of internal drive signals. The  
signals that fall in this category appear in dedicated floating point feedback channels.  
The averaging is sequential (not rolling), and the averaging time is specified by  
parameter LAN fbk avg time.  
The following table specifies the LAN Signal Map feedback signals.  
Page &  
Element  
Data  
Type  
Signal  
Description  
1
1
Boolean  
bits  
Boolean feedbacks. See table  
below for definition of feedback  
bits.  
1
2
Fault number  
Integer  
Number of active fault. Priority is  
given to trip faults over alarms, and  
to the earliest detected fault.  
1
1
1
3
4
5
Averaged Speed reg fbk. RPM  
Speed feedback,  
lan  
Floating  
point  
Motor torque, lan  
Floating  
point  
Averaged Torque calced, unfil.  
Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Motor current,  
lan  
Floating  
point  
Averaged Motor current, unfil x  
2 . RMS amps  
1
1
6
7
Unused  
GP lan fbk reg 1  
Floating  
point  
General purpose feedback  
selected by GP lan fbk reg 1 sel.  
1
2
2
8
1
2
GP lan fbk reg 2  
Motor power, lan  
Floating  
point  
General purpose feedback  
selected by GP lan fbk reg 2 sel.  
Floating  
point  
Averaged motor output power.  
Kilowatts or Horsepower  
Motor voltage,  
lan  
Floating  
point  
Averaged motor voltage. RMS  
volts  
2
2
3-6  
7
Unused  
GP lan fbk reg 3  
Floating  
point  
General purpose feedback  
selected by GP lan fbk reg 3 sel.  
2
8
GP lan fbk reg 4  
Floating  
point  
General purpose feedback  
selected by GP lan fbk reg 4 sel.  
The general purpose feedback signals GP lan fbk reg 1, …, GP lan fbk reg 4 are not  
averaged. The following parameters are used to select the general purpose feedbacks.  
•
•
•
•
GP lan fbk reg 1 sel  
GP lan fbk reg 2 sel  
GP lan fbk reg 3 sel  
GP lan fbk reg 4 sel  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table specifies the LAN Signal Map feedback bits that appear in Page  
1, Element 1 of the feedback signal map.  
Bit  
Signal  
Description  
0
Heartbeat fbk, lan  
No faults active  
Trip fault active  
Local fault string  
Heartbeat signal to validate LAN health.  
No trip faults or alarms are active in the drive.  
Trip fault is active in the drive.  
1
2
3
Local hardware permissive fault is active in the drive.  
System fault  
string  
System hardware permissive fault is active in the  
drive.  
4
5
6
7
Ready to run  
Bridge is on  
Running  
Drive is ready and will respond to a run request.  
Bridge power is enabled.  
Drive is running: References and regulators are  
enabled.  
8
Run active  
Jog active  
Drive is running in response to a run request.  
Drive is running in response to a jog request.  
Result of X stop requests.  
9
10  
11  
X stop active  
Flux enable  
status  
Net commanded flux is established.  
12  
13  
14  
Reverse mode  
active  
Result of reverse mode requests.  
Torque mode  
active  
Speed/Torque Regulator function is regulating torque.  
Speed/Torque Regulator function is regulating speed.  
Inner torque regulator is in limit.  
Speed mode  
active  
15  
16  
17  
In cur or trq limit  
Unused  
MA cont enable  
stat  
Real or modeled contactor status.  
18  
19  
Auto mode active  
Zero speed active  
Speed reference source is auto reference.  
Speed feedback (Speed reg fbk) is below zero speed  
level (Zero speed level).  
20-22  
23  
Unused  
Lan diag fbk bit 1  
Drive has diagnostic information for the diagnostic  
master.  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
GP lan fbk bit 1  
GP lan fbk bit 2  
GP lan fbk bit 3  
GP lan fbk bit 4  
GP lan fbk bit 5  
GP lan fbk bit 6  
GP lan fbk bit 7  
GP lan fbk bit 8  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
1 sel.  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
2 sel.  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
3 sel.  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
4 sel.  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
5 sel.  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
6 sel.  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
7 sel.  
General purpose feedback selected by GP lan fbk bit  
8 sel.  
3-42 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following parameters are used to select the general purpose feedback bits.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
GP lan fbk bit 1 sel  
GP lan fbk bit 2 sel  
GP lan fbk bit 3 sel  
GP lan fbk bit 4 sel  
GP lan fbk bit 5 sel  
GP lan fbk bit 6 sel  
GP lan fbk bit 7 sel  
GP lan fbk bit 8 sel  
Related diagrams  
•
•
•
Drive LAN Signal Map (SigMap_LAN)  
Drive LAN Boolean Signals (bits 0-15) (SigMap_Bit1)  
Drive LAN Boolean Signals (bits 16-31) (SigMap_Bit2)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Control Functions  
Motor Control Overview  
The Innovation Induction motor control algorithm utilizes a Flux-Vector control  
strategy. The motor control features include the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Motor torque, flux and thermal models  
Online motor parameters adaptation  
Voltage and current regulators  
Voltage feedback offset correction  
Power-Dip ride through control  
Tach and Tachless mode operation  
Tach loss detection  
Current limit and Motor pull-out limit  
Automatic field-weakening control  
Torque Compensation  
Cross-over voltage control  
Motor Equivalent Circuit parameter information is required for the motor controller.  
These parameters can be obtained by running the Motor Control Tuneup wizard  
during commissioning of the drive. The motor parameters will change due to motor  
temperature variations; because of this, on-line parameter adaptation, motor thermal  
model and torque compensation schemes (shown in diagram, Motor Control  
(Ovr_MCtrl) are incorporated in the motor control to enable accurate tracking of  
torque, flux and calculated speed.  
Motor electrical models are used to form feedforward models, feedback torque, flux  
and speed calculations.  
The induction motor controller can be used with or without tachometer. It can also be  
configured to operate in tachometer control mode with automatic switch over to  
Tachless control upon detection of a Tach-loss situation (comparison between model  
calculated speed and actual speed feedback signal).  
Field flux control can be manipulated by Flux ref ratio (inputs to motor control  
shown in the diagram, Motor Control (Ovr_MCtrl). However, if the inverter output  
voltage approaches its limit (Crossover Voltage) by increasing speed, an automatic  
field-weakening control will take action to limit the output voltage (by reducing flux  
command) to the Crossover Voltage level.  
Current limits in the drive are affected by motor Pull-out torque capability, Power  
Dip Protection control, and user current limit setting (as shown in diagram Motor  
Control Interface (Core)). Motor pullout limit normally occurs when a large torque is  
demanded in deep field-weakening operating region.  
Related diagrams  
•
•
Motor Control Interface (Core)  
Motor Control (Ovr_MCtrl)  
3-44 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flux Curve  
The Flux Curve describes the relationship between the induction motor voltage and  
current. Specifically, each point of the curve specifies the voltage that is measured at  
the motor terminals for a particular excitation current, under no load conditions at the  
nameplate frequency.  
Function configuration  
The Flux Curve consists of five voltage and current points. Two parameters are  
associated with each point. The following table lists the parameters that configure the  
Flux Curve.  
Parameter  
Description  
Flux curve voltage 1  
Flux curve voltage 2  
Flux curve voltage 3  
Flux curve voltage 4  
Flux curve voltage 5  
Flux curve amps 1  
Flux curve amps 2  
Flux curve amps 3  
Flux curve amps 4  
Flux curve amps 5  
No load voltage for data point 1. RMS volts  
No load voltage for data point 2. RMS volts  
No load voltage for data point 3. RMS volts  
No load voltage for data point 4. RMS volts  
No load voltage for data point 5. RMS volts  
No load current for data point 1. RMS amps  
No load current for data point 2. RMS amps  
No load current for data point 3. RMS amps  
No load current for data point 4. RMS amps  
No load current for data point 5. RMS amps  
The parameters listed above specify the curve if they contain meaningful values. If  
all the parameters are set to <No Value>, then the control uses the curve measured  
during Motor Control Tuneup.  
Function description  
Often the motor data sheet contains four or five voltage and current measurements  
that specify the Flux Curve. The voltage points are generally labeled "VNL" and the  
current points "INL".  
If five data points are available on the motor data sheet, they can be entered directly  
into the configuration parameters. Flux curve voltage 1 and Flux curve amps 1  
represent the smallest voltage and current, and Flux curve voltage 5 and Flux curve  
amps 5 represent the largest voltage and current.  
If fewer than five data points are available on the motor data sheet, the highest data  
points should contain meaningful values and the lowest data points should be set to  
<No Value>. To reset one of the parameters to <No Value>, highlight the value and  
press the Delete key.  
If the curve data is not available, all the configuration parameters should be set to  
<No Value>, and the Flux Curve should be determined using the Motor Control  
Tuneup.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Leakage Inductance Curve  
The Leakage Inductance Curve describes the relationship between motor leakage  
flux and torque current. The motor data sheet does not provide Leakage Inductance  
Curve information. The characteristics of the curve can be obtained experimentally  
or by running the Motor Control Tuneup.  
Line Transfer  
The Line Transfer function transfers a motor from the drive to the utility line and  
captures a motor from the utility line to return control to the drive. In addition to the  
parameters and variables documented here the Line Transfer Tuneup wizard is  
provided to simplify and automate many of the tasks required to correctly  
commission this function. To use this function you must have the necessary  
contactors and operator interfaces as described in the "Innovation Series Line  
Transfer Application Guide". The following figure summarizes the power one-line of  
a basic line transfer application.  
Utility  
Customer's  
Utiltiy Feed  
Contactor  
Motor  
Drive Output  
"MA" Contactor  
Innovation Drive  
& Transformer  
Line  
Reactor  
Figure 1  
General operation  
The following table specifies the general configuration parameters for this function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Selects the source of the utility line reference. The use of the  
internal line reference (ILR) is encouraged unless conditions exist  
such that it is not possible to accurately predict the utility phase and  
magnitude at the motor from the source voltage applied to the drive.  
See the "Innovation Series Line Transfer Application Guide" for a  
complete discussion of issues related to line reference selection.  
Line reference  
The following table specifies the general status variables for this function.  
Variable  
Description  
Line xfer enabled  
Indicates that the line transfer function is enabled.  
Transfer MA  
request  
Indicates that the transfer/capture sequence has requested the  
MA contactor to close.  
3-46 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor transfer functionality  
The following table specifies parameters relating to the motor transfer function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Transfer mtr req sel  
Selects the source of motor transfer requests.  
The following table specifies variables relating to the motor transfer function.  
Variable  
Description  
Transfer motor req  
Transfer motor cmd  
Indicates that the user has requested a motor transfer.  
Indicates that the internal sequencer has acknowledged  
the user motor transfer request and commanded the  
transfer to proceed.  
Transfer MA  
request  
Indicates that the transfer/capture sequence has  
requested the MA contactor to close.  
Utility close cmd  
Indicates that the transfer sequence has requested the  
utility switchgear to close.  
Utility close status  
Indicates that the utility switchgear has been detected  
closed.  
Motor capture functionality  
The following table specifies parameters related to the motor capture function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Capture mtr req sel  
Anticipated torque  
Selects the source of motor capture requests.  
Specifies the expected motor torque at the time of motor  
capture. While not extremely critical, this value assists in  
smoothing the motor capture. Observe the motor torque at  
full speed operation and enter that number in PU here. If  
you do not know the motor torque use the default value.  
The following table specifies variables related to the motor capture function.  
Variable  
Description  
Capture trq feed  
fwd  
Torque feedforward to speed regulator at the time of motor  
capture.  
Capture motor req  
Capture motor cmd  
Indicates that the user has requested a motor capture.  
Indicates that the internal sequencer has acknowledged  
the user motor capture request and commanded the  
capture to proceed.  
Utility open  
command  
Indicates that the capture sequence has requested the  
utility switchgear to open.  
Utility open status  
Indicates that the utility switchgear has been detected  
open.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
External line reference functionality  
The use of an ELR is recommended when the phase angle and magnitude of the  
utility feed the drive is expected to transfer the motor to cannot be accurately  
predicted from the phase angle and magnitude of the ILR. Such situations can arise  
when transferring the motor to a generator, to a utility feed separate from the one  
supplying the drive or in certain plants where multiple transformers with varying  
loads are involved. See the "Innovation Series Line Transfer Application Guide" for  
a complete discussion of issues related to line reference selection.  
The following table specifies variables related to the external line reference  
functionality.  
Variable  
Description  
Ext ref phase AB  
Ext ref feedback  
External line reference analog input voltage.  
External line reference scaled to represent actual line  
voltage.  
Motor Equivalent Circuit  
The Motor Equivalent Circuit function implements the equivalent circuit of the  
motor.  
Function configuration  
The following table lists the configuration parameters for the Motor Equivalent  
Circuit.  
Parameter  
Description  
Stator hot res R1  
Stator cold res R1  
Rotor hot res R2  
Rotor cold res R2  
Magnetizing react Xm  
Stator lkg react X1  
Rotor lkg react X2  
Starting react Xst  
Rated rotor temp  
Motor ambient temp  
Stator hot resistance. Ohms  
Stator cold resistance. Ohms  
Rotor hot resistance. Ohms  
Rotor cold resistance. Ohms  
Magnetizing reactance. Ohms  
Stator leakage reactance. Ohms  
Rotor leakage reactance. Ohms  
Starting reactance. Ohms  
Rated rotor temperature. Degrees C or Degrees F  
Motor ambient temperature. Degrees C or Degrees F  
3-48 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Temperature Estimation  
The Motor Temperature Estimation function estimates the rotor and stator  
temperatures.  
Function inputs  
The Motor Temperature Estimation uses the following information to calculate the  
rotor and stator temperatures:  
•
•
•
Estimated rotor and stator resistances  
Thermal properties of the stator and rotor winding materials  
Motor ambient temperature  
The estimated rotor and stator temperatures are calculated using online parameter  
estimation. The thermal properties of the winding materials and the motor ambient  
temperature are internal drive constants.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the outputs of the Motor Temperature Estimation.  
Variable  
Description  
Rotor temp  
Stator temp  
Estimated rotor temperature. Degrees C or Degrees F  
Estimated stator temperature. Degrees C or Degrees F  
Power Dip Protection  
The Power Dip Protection function sustains DC link voltage when a low voltage  
condition is detected.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Power Dip Protection  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
DC bus feedback  
DC link voltage. DC volts  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the Power Dip  
Protection function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Power dip control  
Specifies one of three functional modes:  
Disabled  
Enabled with standard operation  
Enabled with custom operation  
Custom pwr dip time  
Length of time that the function attempts to sustain the  
DC link in custom mode. Seconds  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms that the Power Dip Protection  
function declares.  
Fault  
Description  
Power dip  
Trip fault that occurs when the DC link voltage  
remains below the power dip activation level for  
a specified period of time. Causes drive to stop  
running.  
Function description  
The Power Dip Protection function is activated when the drive determines that the  
DC link voltage is low. The power dip voltage level is defined as  
80% x 1.357 x IPN volt rating.  
IPN volt rating is specified during the drive commissioning process and should not  
be changed to alter the behavior of the Power Dip Protection function.  
When a DC link low voltage condition is detected, the Power Dip Protection  
function begins a timer. The function uses motor rotational energy to keep the DC  
link at the power dip voltage level until the timer expires. The expiration time for the  
timer depends on the parameters Power dip control and Custom pwr dip time. The  
following table specifies how the expiration time is determined:  
Value of Power dip control  
0.008 sec (Disable)  
Expiration time  
0.008 seconds  
0.500 sec (Enable)  
0.5 seconds  
Custom: Specify time  
User specified value of Custom pwr dip time  
The timer does not reset to zero if the DC link rises above the power dip voltage  
level. Instead, the timer contains the difference between the amount of time the DC  
link feedback spends below and the amount of time it spends above the power dip  
voltage level. As a result, the timer may expire even if the DC link voltage is not  
continuously below the power dip voltage level. If the timer expires, the Power dip  
trip fault is declared.  
The Power Dip Protection function does not try to regulate the DC link when the  
absolute speed of the motor (variable Speed reg fbk) is less than 5% of the rated  
motor nameplate speed (parameter Motor rated rpm).  
The maximum time the bridge can actually ride through a power loss without a fault  
is dependent on the amount of inertial energy available in the load and the ride  
through capacity of the power supplies that are feeding the control AND cooling  
systems. The control rack itself can ride through power dips up to 100ms long. An  
optional ride through device is available to extend this time up to 500ms. If the  
customer can supply power from an interruptible source then much longer times can  
be achieved and a custom power dip timeout should be specified.  
Tach Loss Detection  
The Tach Loss Detection function controls the response of the drive to the loss of the  
tachometer feedback signal.  
3-50 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Tach Loss Detection function.  
Variable  
Description  
Output freq, unfil  
Tach speed, instr.  
Motor electrical frequency. Hertz  
Tachometer speed feedback. Radians/second  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the Tach Loss  
Detection function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Tach loss fault mode  
Specifies whether the drive reports a trip fault or an  
alarm in response to the loss of tachometer feedback.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms that the Tach Loss Detection  
function gives.  
Fault  
Description  
Tach loss alarm  
Alarm that occurs when a loss of tachometer feedback is  
detected. Drive will continue run in tachless control  
mode.  
Tach loss trip  
Trip fault that occurs when a loss of tachometer  
feedback is detected. Causes the drive to coast stop.  
Function description  
The Tach Loss Detection function is not active when the parameter Motor ctrl alg sel  
is set to Tachless control (that is, the drive is configured to perform motor control  
and speed feedback acquisition without a tachometer). The Tach Loss Detection is  
active for other values of Motor ctrl alg sel.  
The Tach Loss Detection function compares the tachometer speed feedback to the  
estimated motor speed to determine whether the tachometer feedback is valid.  
If the tachometer feedback is invalid, the function takes one of two actions based on  
the value of parameter Tach loss fault mode. If Tach loss fault mode is set to Alarm,  
then Tach loss alarm is declared and the drive transitions to tachless mode. If Tach  
loss fault mode is set to Trip, then Tach loss trip is declared and the drive stops  
running.  
Tach loss alarm cannot be cleared until the drive is stopped. When the alarm is  
cleared, the drive returns to tachometer control mode.  
The tachometer feedback may be lost for the following reasons:  
•
•
•
The tachometer is malfunctioning.  
The tachometer feedback is noisy, possibly because of bad cable shielding.  
The estimated speed is incorrect because of errors in motor parameters that are  
used for estimated speed calculation. These parameters include rotor resistance  
and saturation curve parameters.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protective Functions  
Custom User Faults  
Each Innovation Series product provides the capability to configure two fault  
circuits. The trip faults Customer use NC flt and Customer use NO flt trigger on input  
signals that are the states of the fault circuits. Customer use NC flt occurs when the  
normally closed circuit is open. Customer use NO flt occurs when the normally open  
circuit is closed.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Custom User Faults  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
User NC fault sel  
User NO fault sel  
Selects the source of the normally closed circuit input.  
Selects the source of the normally open circuit input.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms declared by the Custom User  
Faults function.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Customer use NC flt  
Trip fault that occurs when the normally closed circuit  
input is False, indicating that the circuit is open  
Customer use NO flt  
Trip fault the occurs when the normally open circuit input  
is True, indicating that the circuit is closed  
Function description  
The parameters User NC fault sel and User NO fault sel generally select digital  
inputs (variables Digital input 1, …, Digital input 6) or general purpose LAN  
requests (variables GP lan req bit 1, …, GP lan req bit 8). The custom user faults  
may be disabled by selecting Unused for the input parameters.  
DC Link Protection  
The drive contains several diagnostic and protective features involving the DC Link  
Protection.  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies the DC Link Protection diagnostic variables.  
Variable  
Description  
DC bus feedback  
DC bus voltage  
DC bus charged  
Unfiltered DC link voltage. DC volts  
Filtered DC link voltage. DC volts  
Indicates whether the DC link voltage is high enough to  
allow the drive to run.  
DC bus excursion  
Departure of DC link from user specified region. DC volts  
3-52 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the DC Link Protection configuration parameters.  
Parameter  
Description  
DC bus region max  
High boundary of user specified DC link voltage region.  
DC volts  
DC bus region min  
Low boundary of user specified DC link voltage region. DC  
volts  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms associated with the DC Link  
Protection.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
DC bus over voltage  
DC bus under voltage  
DC bus voltage low  
Trip fault that occurs when the DC link voltage is too high.  
Trip fault that occurs when the DC link voltage is too low.  
Alarm that occurs when the DC link voltage is too low.  
Function description  
The signal DC bus feedback is an unfiltered representation of the DC link voltage.  
DC bus voltage is a filtered version of the DC link voltage. The default filter  
frequency is 90 rad/sec.  
The DC bus over voltage trip fault occurs when the DC link voltage exceeds a  
maximum safe operating voltage defined as  
123% x  
x 2300 Volts.  
2
The DC bus under voltage trip fault occurs when the drive is running and the DC  
link voltage falls below a minimum operating voltage. The DC bus voltage low  
alarm occurs when the drive is stopped and the DC link voltage falls below a  
minimum operating voltage. In both cases the minimum voltage is defined as  
50% x  
x 2300 Volts.  
2
The DC bus voltage low alarm clears when the DC link voltage rises again to an  
acceptable operating level.  
The user has the opportunity to specify a desired operating region for the DC link  
voltage. Parameters DC bus region max and DC bus region min define the high and  
low boundaries of the region, respectively. The diagnostic variable DC bus excursion  
indicates whether the DC link voltage lies within the region, and if not, how far  
outside the region it falls.  
If DC bus region min <= DC bus feedback <= DC bus region max,  
DC bus excursion = 0.  
If DC bus feedback < DC bus region min,  
DC bus excursion = DC bus feedback - DC bus region min.  
If DC bus feedback > DC bus region max,  
DC bus excursion = DC bus feedback - DC bus region max.  
Notice that if the DC link voltage falls below the user specified region, DC bus  
excursion is negative; if the DC link voltage falls above the region, DC bus  
excursion is positive.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ground Fault Protection (Fast)  
The Ground Fault Protection (Fast) tests the phase currents to verify that there is no  
ground current in the system.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Ground Fault Protection  
(Fast) function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Phase A current  
Phase B current  
Phase C current  
Phase A current feedback. Amps  
Phase B current feedback. Amps  
Phase C current feedback. Amps  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Ground Fault Protection  
(Fast) function.  
Variable  
Description  
Gnd current, coarse  
Ground current, filtered. Amps  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the Ground Fault  
Protection (Fast) function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Gnd flt coarse trip  
Current level at which the Gnd flt, coarse trip  
fault occurs. Amps  
Faults and alarms  
The following faults and alarms are declared by the Ground Fault Protection (Fast)  
function.  
Fault / Alarm  
Description  
Gnd flt, coarse  
Occurs when Gnd current, coarse > Gnd flt  
coarse trip.  
Function description  
Gnd current, coarse is determined by summing and filtering the three phase currents  
Phase A current, Phase B current, and Phase C current.  
The configuration parameter Gnd flt coarse trip can be set to a default value by  
running the Ground Fault Setup.  
3-54 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Fault Strings  
Each Innovation Series product provides a hardwired, fail-safe circuit to turn off  
bridge power and to shut down its control. The circuit consists of two independent  
isolated inputs designated the local and system fault strings. The loss of either input  
results in the shutdown of the power bridge and control.  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies the Hardware Fault Strings diagnostic variables.  
Variable  
Description  
Local fault string  
System fault string  
State of the local fault string circuit.  
State of the system fault string circuit.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the Hardware Fault Strings configuration parameters.  
Parameter  
Description  
Disables the hardware fault string validation in simulation  
mode only.  
Inh sim Loc/Sys flt  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms associated with the Hardware  
Fault Strings.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Local flt  
Trip fault that occurs when the local fault string circuit is open.  
System flt  
Trip fault that occurs when the system fault string circuit is open.  
Function description  
The hardware fault string circuits are capable of operating with either 24 volts DC or  
115 volts AC. The inputs are isolated so the system and local fault string circuits are  
not required to operate at the same voltage level. Both circuits must be closed for  
normal product operation.  
The local fault string circuit is closed when the following connections are made  
through appropriate circuitry:  
•
•
Terminal board (ATBA): Connector L115 or L24 to connector LCOM.  
Backplane: Jumper J2 pin 1 to pin 2.  
The system fault string circuit is closed when the following connection is made  
through appropriate circuitry:  
•
•
Terminal board (ATBA): Connector S115 or S24 to connector SCOM.  
The local and system fault strings are evaluated by the hardware. If one of the  
strings opens during product operation, then the hardware implements a  
controlled shutdown of the power bridge and dropout of the contactors.  
•
The state of the hardware fault string inputs are reported to the control and  
contained in variables Local fault string and System fault string. The variables  
contain the actual state of the hardware circuits whether or not the product is  
running. The trip faults associated with the fault strings, Local flt and System flt,  
are reported when the fault string opens only when the product is running or  
commanded to run.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heatsink Thermal Protection  
The Heatsink Thermal Protection function measures the power bridge heatsink and  
ambient temperatures and verifies that they are at a safe operating level.  
Function inputs  
The inputs to the Heatsink Thermal Protection function are hardware thermal sensor  
connections. The bridge ambient temperature thermal sensor connects to backplane  
connector J4. The control rack ambient temperature thermal sensor is located on  
BICM. The heatsink thermal sensors connect to FOSA. The following table  
summarizes the source of the input signals of the Heatsink Thermal Protection  
function.  
Input signal connection  
Backplane J4 7 & 8  
Mounted on BICM  
FOSA TF-A  
Thermal sensor  
Bridge ambient thermal sensor  
Control rack ambient thermal sensor  
Heatsink A thermal sensor  
FOSA TF-B  
Heatsink B thermal sensor  
FOSA TF-C  
Heatsink C thermal sensor  
FOSA TF-DB  
Dynamic brake heatsink thermal sensor  
Diode source heatsink thermal sensor  
FOSA TF-SRC  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Heatsink Thermal  
Protection function.  
Variable  
Description  
Heat sink A temp  
Measured temperature of heatsink A. Degrees C or  
Degrees F  
Heat sink B temp  
Heat sink C temp  
DB heat sink temp  
DS heat sink temp  
Bridge ambient temp  
BIC ambient temp  
Measured temperature of heatsink B. Degrees C or  
Degrees F  
Measured temperature of heatsink C. Degrees C or  
Degrees F  
Measured temperature of dynamic brake heatsink.  
Degrees C or Degrees F  
Measured temperature of diode source heatsink.  
Degrees C or Degrees F  
Measured bridge ambient temperature. Degrees C or  
Degrees F  
Measured control rack ambient temperature.  
Degrees C or Degrees F  
In simulator mode, the output variables are set to constant values which are the  
maximum expected operating temperatures.  
3-56 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related faults and alarms  
The following faults and alarms are declared by the Heatsink Thermal Protection  
function. Temperatures are described as "high" and "low", relative to non-adjustable  
setpoints in the control.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Ambient temp hot  
Ambient temperature (variable Bridge ambient temp) is  
high.  
Ambient over temp  
Ambient temp low  
HtSink A temp hot  
HtSink A over temp  
HtSink A rise high  
Ambient temperature (variable Bridge ambient temp) is  
too high.  
Ambient temperature (variable Bridge ambient temp) is  
too low.  
Heatsink A temperature (variable Heat sink A temp) is  
high.  
Heatsink A temperature (variable Heat sink A temp) is  
too high.  
Heatsink A temperature (variable Heat sink A temp) is  
too far above ambient temperature (variable Bridge  
ambient temp).  
HtSink A temp low  
HtSink B temp hot  
HtSink B over temp  
HtSink B rise high  
Heatsink A temperature (variable Heat sink A temp) is  
too low.  
Heatsink B temperature (variable Heat sink B temp) is  
high.  
Heatsink B temperature (variable Heat sink B temp) is  
too high.  
Heatsink B temperature (variable Heat sink B temp) is  
too far above ambient temperature (variable Bridge  
ambient temp).  
HtSink B temp low  
HtSink C temp hot  
HtSink C over temp  
HtSink C rise high  
Heatsink B temperature (variable Heat sink B temp) is  
too low.  
Heatsink C temperature (variable Heat sink C temp) is  
high.  
Heatsink C temperature (variable Heat sink C temp) is  
too high.  
Heatsink C temperature (variable Heat sink C temp) is  
too far above ambient temperature (variable Bridge  
ambient temp).  
HtSink C temp low  
HtSink DB temp hot  
HtSink DB over temp  
HtSink DB rise high  
Heatsink C temperature (variable Heat sink C temp) is  
too low.  
Dynamic brake heatsink temperature (variable DB heat  
sink temp) is high.  
Dynamic brake heatsink temperature (variable DB heat  
sink temp) is too high.  
Dynamic brake heatsink temperature (variable DB heat  
sink temp) is too far above ambient temperature  
(variable Bridge ambient temp).  
HtSink DB temp low  
Dynamic brake heatsink temperature (variable DB heat  
sink temp) is too low.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
HtSink DS temp hot  
Diode source heatsink temperature (variable DS heat  
sink temp) is high.  
HtSink DS over temp  
HtSink DS rise high  
Diode source heatsink temperature (variable DS heat  
sink temp) is too high.  
Diode source heatsink temperature (variable DS heat  
sink temp) is too far above ambient temperature  
(variable Bridge ambient temp).  
HtSink DS temp low  
HtSink temp imbalanc  
Diode source heatsink temperature (variable DS heat  
sink temp) is too low.  
Trip fault occurs when any two of the measured heatsink  
temperatures differ by an amount exceeding heatsink  
imbalance fault level.  
HtSink blower failed  
BICM card temp low  
BICM card hot  
Trip fault occurs if the drive is running and the cooling  
fans are not operating.  
Control rack temperature, measured by a sensor on  
BICM, is too low.  
Control rack temperature, measured by a sensor on  
BICM, is high.  
BICM card over temp  
Control rack temperature, measured by a sensor on  
BICM, is too high.  
Line-Line Voltage Protection  
The drive contains several diagnostic and protective features involving the Line-Line  
Voltage Protection.  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies the Line-Line Voltage Protection diagnostic variables.  
Variable  
Description  
Output volts, A-B  
Output volts, B-C  
A-B, Voltage offset  
B-C, Voltage offset  
Filtered A-B line-line voltage. Line-line volts  
Filtered B-C line-line voltage. Line-line volts  
Calculated A-B voltage offset. Line-line volts  
Calculated B-C voltage offset. Line-line volts  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms associated with the Line-Line  
Voltage Protection.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
A-B voltage offset  
Trip fault that occurs when the A-B line-line voltage offset  
is too high.  
B-C voltage offset  
Trip fault that occurs when the B-C line-line voltage offset  
is too high.  
3-58 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The variables Output volts, A-B and Output volts, B-C are filtered versions of the  
measured line-line voltage feedbacks. The default filter frequency is 1000 rad/sec.  
When the drive is stopped, it performs an automatic voltage offset calculation. If the  
drive does not have a contactor, the offset calculation happens continuously. If a  
contactor is present, the calculation occurs when the contactor closes immediately  
before the drive begins running. During the calculation the power bridge is turned off  
and the line-line voltages should be zero. Any appreciable voltage that is detected  
during the calculation indicates a potential power bridge or feedback circuitry  
problem. The A-B voltage offset and B-C voltage offset trip faults are reported when  
excessive offsets are calculated. The calculated offsets A-B, Voltage offset and B-C,  
Voltage offset are used by the control to calculate feedbacks once the drive starts  
running.  
There is a period of time when the line-line voltage offset calculations are considered  
valid and the calculation does not need to be performed if the drive is stopped and  
started again. However, if the time expires, the voltage offsets must be recalculated  
before the drive can run again. The default value for the expiration time is one hour.  
The variable Voltage offset valid indicates whether or not the voltage offset  
calculations are valid.  
Motor Overtemperature Detection  
Innovation Series drive products provide the capability to detect a motor  
overtemperature condition. The Motor over temp trip fault and the Motor temp hot  
alarm trigger on a signal that is a drive input from the motor overtemperature fault  
circuit. When the motor overtemperature circuit is open, the fault or alarm occurs.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Motor Overtemperature  
Detection function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Motor OT fault sel  
Selects the source of the motor overtemperature  
circuit.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Motor  
Overtemperature Detection function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Motor OT fault mode  
Specifies whether the overtemperature condition  
triggers a fault or an alarm.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms that the Motor Overtemperature  
Detection function declares.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Motor over temp  
Occurs when the state of the motor overtemperature  
circuit is Force False, indicating that the circuit is open,  
and parameter Motor OT fault mode is set to Trip flt  
Motor temp hot  
Occurs when the state of the motor overtemperature  
circuit is Force False, indicating that the circuit is open,  
and parameter Motor OT fault mode is set to Alarm fault  
Function description  
The parameters Motor OT fault sel generally selects digital inputs (variables Digital  
input 1, …, Digital input 6). The Motor Overtemperature Detection may be disabled  
by setting Motor OT fault sel equal to Unused.  
Phase Current Protection  
The drive contains several diagnostic and protective features involving the Phase  
Current Protection.  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies the Phase Current Protection diagnostic variables.  
Variable  
Description  
Phase A current  
Phase B current  
Phase C current  
Phs A current offset  
Phs B current offset  
Phs C current offset  
Filtered phase A current. Amps  
Filtered phase B current. Amps  
Filtered phase C current. Amps  
Calculated phase A current offset. Amps  
Calculated phase B current offset. Amps  
Calculated phase C current offset. Amps  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms associated with the Phase Current  
Protection.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Phase A cur offset  
Trip fault that occurs when the phase A current offset is  
too high.  
Phase B cur offset  
Phase C cur offset  
Trip fault that occurs when the phase B current offset is  
too high.  
Trip fault that occurs when the phase C current offset is  
too high.  
3-60 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The variables Phase A current, Phase B current, and Phase C current are filtered  
versions of the measured phase current feedbacks. The default filter frequency is  
1000 rad/sec.  
When the drive is stopped, it performs an automatic current offset calculation.  
During the calculation the power bridge is turned off, and the phase currents should  
be zero. Any appreciable phase current that is detected during the calculation  
indicates a potential power bridge or feedback circuitry problem. The Phase A cur  
offset, Phase B cur offset, and Phase C cur offset trip faults are reported when  
excessive offsets are calculated. The calculated offsets Phs A current offset, Phs B  
current offset, and Phs C current offset are used by the control to calculate feedbacks  
once the drive starts running.  
Timed Overcurrent Detection  
The Timed Overcurrent Detection function protects the motor and wiring against  
overheating caused by large currents for extended periods of time.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables to the Timed Overcurrent Detection  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Phase A current  
Phase B current  
Phase C current  
Phase A current. Amps  
Phase B current. Amps  
Phase C current. Amps  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables to the Timed Overcurrent  
Detection function.  
Variable  
Description  
Ia^2 filtered  
Squared and filtered phase A current. RMS amps²  
Squared and filtered phase B current. RMS amps²  
Squared and filtered phase C current. RMS amps²  
Ib^2 filtered  
Ic^2 filtered  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the Timed Overcurrent Detection function  
configuration parameters.  
Parameter  
Description  
Disable TOC profile  
Disables the application of the motor cooling profile to the  
squared phase currents.  
Motor protect class  
Motor protection class.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms associated with the Timed  
Overcurrent Detection function.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Timed over current  
Trip fault that occurs when one or more of the squared  
phase currents is too high for an extended period of time.  
TOC pending  
Alarm that occurs when one or more of the squared phase  
currents is too high for an extended period of time.  
Function description  
The Timed Overcurrent Detection function provides overload protection for the  
motor and wiring. It maintains an independent heating model for each motor phase.  
The heating is modeled by squaring and filtering the phase currents. The heating  
model outputs are contained in variables Ia^2 filtered, Ib^2 filtered, and Ic^2 filtered.  
The Timed Overcurrent Detection function reports the TOC pending alarm when any  
of the heating model outputs is large. It reports the Timed over current trip fault  
when any of the heating model outputs is excessively high. Continued operation  
during an alarm condition can result in degraded equipment lifetime.  
The motor and wiring heating models are independent of the power bridge rating and  
capability. This independence allows the general application of inverter drives to  
motors. It also requires that motor wiring comply with NEC standards. The wiring  
must be capable of withstanding 125% of the motor's rated current.  
Motor protect class specifies the motor protection class, which indicates the motor's  
capacity to run under overload conditions. The Timed Overcurrent Detection  
function uses the setting of Motor protect class to determine motor thermal  
characteristics. The thermal characteristics are used to determine current levels at  
which the drive reports motor overheating.  
The following values are available for Motor protect class:  
•
•
•
Class10:150%for30sec: IEC motors. Motor can withstand 150% overload for 30  
seconds.  
Class20:150%for60sec: US standard motors. Motor can withstand 150%  
overload for 60 seconds.  
Class30:150%for90sec: Specially designed motors. Motor can withstand 150%  
overload for 90 seconds.  
The overload capabilities listed above assume that the motor was running  
continuously at a rated current prior to the overload condition.  
The following graphs show the time a motor of each of the protection classes can  
operate before reaching alarm conditions. The time is a function of the load applied  
to the motor. The first graph assumes the motor was not running before the overload  
condition was applied. The second graph assumes the motor was running  
continuously at rated current.  
3-62 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following graphs show the time a motor of each of the protection classes can  
operate before reaching trip conditions. The time is a function of the load applied to  
the motor. The first graph assumes the motor was not running before the overload  
condition was applied. The second graph assumes the motor was running  
continuously at rated current.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The capability of the drive to produce the overload current depends on the capacity  
of its power circuit. Especially at higher overload levels, the drive may not be able to  
sustain the motor's overload current as defined by Motor protect class.  
The motor heating model has the capability of implementing a speed dependent  
motor cooling characteristic. The user defined cooling characteristic is activated  
when Disable TOC profile is False. At present, the cooling characteristic  
functionality is not fully supported. Disable TOC profile should not be changed from  
its default value of True without factory assistance.  
3-64 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transformer Overtemperature Detection  
Those Innovation Series products that are part of a system containing a transformer  
provide the capability to detect transformer overtemperature condition. The Xfrmr  
over temp trip fault and the Xfrmr temp hot alarm trigger on a signal that is a digital  
input from the transformer overtemperature fault circuit. Either the fault or alarm  
occurs when the transformer overtemperature circuit is open.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Transformer  
Overtemperature Detection function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Xfrmr OT fault sel  
Selects the source of the transformer overtemperature  
circuit.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Transformer  
Overtemperature Detection function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Xfrmr OT fault mode  
Specifies whether the overtemperature condition triggers  
a fault or an alarm.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms that the Transformer  
Overtemperature Detection function declares.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Xfrmr over temp  
Occurs when the state of the transformer  
overtemperature circuit is False, indicating that the circuit  
is open, and parameter Xfrmr OT fault mode is set to Trip  
flt.  
Xfrmr temp hot  
Occurs when the state of the transformer  
overtemperature circuit is False, indicating that the circuit  
is open, and parameter Xfrmr OT fault mode is set to  
Alarm fault.  
Function description  
The parameter Xfrmr OT fault sel generally selects digital inputs (Digital input 1, …,  
Digital input 6). The Transformer Overtemperature Detection may be disabled by  
setting Xfrmr OT fault sel equal to Unused.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Ground Protection  
The Motor Ground Protection function detects a ground fault condition in the motor  
phases. The function is automatically configured by the control; no user  
configuration is necessary.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Motor Ground Protection  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
DC neut volt mag  
Absolute value of the DC bus neutral voltage  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Motor Ground Protection  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Gnd cur signal  
Ground current indication (filtered). Note that this value may  
actually be scaled as the voltage sensed by the BICM, not a  
current. If Gnd signal scl is 1.0, this is the sensed voltage.  
Gnd flt warning  
Gnd flt trip  
This variable is used external to this function to indicate that the  
alarm, Ground flt alm, LP is present.  
This variable is used external to this function to indicate that the  
fault, Gnd flt trip is present.  
This signal, when True, indicates that the value LP fuse blown  
sel points to is True. When Detector mode is set to Disable, this  
variable will always be True.  
LP fuse stat  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Motor Ground  
Protection function. The control sets these parameters automatically; they should not  
be changed except in unusual circumstances.  
Parameter  
Description  
When set to Enable, the Motor Ground Protection function is  
enabled. The Ground flt alm, LP alarm and Gnd flt trip trip  
fault will be annunciated if a ground fault condition occurs.  
Detector mode  
When set to Disable, neither the alarm nor fault will occur.  
The default is Enable.  
Gnd signal sel  
Gnd signal scl  
Pointer to the ground fault signal. It points by default to  
parameter DC neut volt mag.  
Voltage to current scale factor which is applied to the input  
analog signal pointed to by Gnd signal sel. This parameter is  
set to 1.0 as default, leaving the scaled signal output as a  
voltage.  
Gnd signal alarm on  
Gnd signal alarm off  
Gnd signal trip lvl  
Gnd signal fil  
The level at which the Ground flt alm, LP alarm is present.  
The level at which the Ground flt alm, LP alarm clears.  
The level at which the Gnd flt trip trip fault occurs.  
The bandwidth of the low pass filter (Radians/second) applied  
to the analog input signal pointed to by Gnd signal sel.  
LP fuse blown sel  
Pointer default setting is MOV fuse OK status.  
3-66 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies the diagnostic variables of the Motor Ground  
Protection function.  
Variable  
Description  
Gnd flt warning  
This variable is for external use to indicate that the alarm,  
Ground flt alm, LP is present.  
Gnd flt trip  
This variable is for external use to indicate that the fault, Gnd flt  
trip is present.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms of the Motor Ground Protection  
function.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
Ground flt alm, LP  
The alarm is present when Gnd cur signal >= Gnd signal alarm  
on and is not present when when Gnd cur signal < Gnd signal  
alarm off.  
Gnd flt trip  
The trip fault occurs if Gnd cur signal >= Gnd signal trip lvl.  
Function description  
The VATF-MID voltage feedback board provides a direct measure of the DC bus  
neutral voltage to the control. This signal is filtered and conditioned to eliminate the  
effects of bridge modulation and then monitored.  
With no motor ground fault condition, the voltage will be nearly zero. With a fault  
to ground, the voltage will be at a maximum. For a partial ground fault condition,  
which could be caused by damaged motor insulation, the voltage increases almost  
linearly between zero and the maximum voltage. The ground fault voltage, variable  
Gnd cur signal is compared to thresholds to create the alarm or trip fault. Variable  
Gnd cur signal is most sensitive at higher motor voltages. When a ground fault  
condition exists, the alarm may be present at maximum motor voltage but may  
disappear under other operating conditions.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phase Imbalance Monitor  
The Phase Imbalance Monitor function monitors the condition of the phase  
imbalance on the ac line as well as the status of the phase lock loop.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Phase Imbalance Monitor  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
PLL error  
This is the error signal of the phase lock loop.  
X axis line voltage  
The demodulated, x-component of the ac line voltage. This  
variable is also used in the Phase Lock Loop function.  
AC line magnitude  
This is the magnitude of X axis line voltage and Y axis line  
voltage (square root of squared sums). It represents the  
magnitude of the ac line..  
Phase imbalance sqr  
This signal is basic in the determination of phase imbalance  
or phase lock loop goodness for the source. It is the filtered  
sum of two squared signals. The first is PLL error and the  
second is the difference between X axis line voltage and AC  
line magnitude.  
Phase imbalance ref  
Phase imbalance avg  
This signal represents the allowed amount of imbalance for  
the source. It has units of volts squared. It includes an  
allowance for noise and is compensated by the magnitude  
of the ac line.  
This signal is the amount by which Phase imbalance sqr  
exceeds the allowed threshold, Phase imbalance ref.  
Phs imbalance limit  
Phs imbalance time  
Clamp threshold that the integrator  
Seconds.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Phase Imbalance Monitor  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Phase imbalance int  
Integrator that accumulates the amount by which the line  
imbalance (variable Phase imbalance sqr) exceeds its  
allowed threshold (variable Phase imbalance ref). This  
variable drives the AC line transient alarm and the AC line  
watchdog trip fault. See Faults and alarms section.  
AC line loss  
If the ac line drops below 10% of nominal for 5msec, AC line  
loss will be set True, declaring that the ac line has been lost.  
This variable drives the AC line transient alarm.  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies the diagnostic variables of the Phase Imbalance  
Monitor function.  
Variable  
Description  
PLL proven  
This boolean indicates the status of the Phase Lock Loop function. The  
Phase Imbalance Monitor function has a direct effect on PLL proven.  
3-68 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Faults and alarms  
The following table specifies the faults and alarms of the Phase Imbalance Monitor  
function.  
Fault/Alarm  
Description  
AC line transient  
This alarm occurs as a result of significant phase lock loop  
error or significant phase imbalance.  
AC line watchdog  
This trip fault will occur when the AC line transient alarm  
persists for about one second. Both the trip fault and the alarm  
are a result of significant phase lock loop error or significant  
phase imbalance.  
Function description  
Phase imbalance sqr is fundamental to the Phase Imbalance Monitor function. It is  
the filtered sum of two squared signals. The first is PLL error and the second is the  
difference between X axis line voltage and AC line magnitude. Phase imbalance sqr  
is a measure of the imbalance of the ac line.  
The Phase Imbalance Monitor function compares Phase imbalance sqr to its allowed  
threshold (variable Phase imbalance ref) to create the delta above the threshold  
(variable Phase imbalance avg). If Phase imbalance avg is positive, it accumulates  
with dt compensation in an integrator (variable Phase imbalance int). The integrator  
is clamped by an upper threshold (variable Phs imbalance limit).  
If the Phase imbalance int integrator exceeds the clamp threshold, the AC line  
transient alarm will occur. If this condition persists for Phs imbalance time Seconds,  
the AC line watchdog trip fault will occur.  
The Phase Imbalance Monitor function has a direct effect on the Phase Lock Loop  
function. The PLL proven boolean indicates the status of the Phase Lock Loop  
function. When the control first detects the ac line, a significant, transient error is  
present until the loop locks. Phase imbalance avg will thus be significant, but will  
begin to decay as the loop locks. After Phase imbalance int is less than zero for  
about 120msec, PLL proven will be set true and the phase lock loop will be declared  
ready for use. In order for PLL proven to be set False after it is set True, AC line loss  
must be true for 1 Seconds or Phase imbalance int must be non-zero for 1 Seconds.  
If the ac line drops below 10% of nominal for 5msec, AC line loss will be set True,  
declaring that the ac line has been lost. This will immediately cause the AC line  
transient alarm. If the condition persists for 1Seconds, the drive will trip if it has not  
already done so. AC line loss will be set False again as soon as the ac line rises back  
above 15% of nominal.  
Related functions  
•
Phase Lock Loop  
Related diagrams  
•
Line Monitor Overview (Ovr_Lin_Mon)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Monitor  
The Line Monitor function monitors the AC line voltage and frequency and  
compares them to acceptable limits. Several faults may result. The Drive  
Commissioning wizard automatically configures this function. Run the Line  
Protection Setup wizard to reconfigure this function.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Line Monitor function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Line volt check fil  
Line frq check fil  
Filter value for input signal Line monitor volt, Radians/second  
Filter value for input signal Line monitor frq, Radians/second  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Line Monitor function.  
Variable  
Description  
Line monitor volt  
Line monitor frq  
AC line voltage magnitude, filtered by Line volt check fil  
AC line frequency, filtered by Line frq check fil  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Line Monitor function.  
These parameters are automatically configured by the Drive Commissioning wizard  
but can be reconfigured in the wizard.  
Parameter  
Description  
Line OV fault level  
Ac line voltage above which the AC line over voltage trip fault  
occurs  
Line OV alarm level  
Line OV alarm clear  
Line UV fault level  
Ac line voltage above which the AC line voltage high alarm  
occurs  
Ac line voltage below which the AC line voltage high alarm  
goes away  
Ac line voltage below which the AC line under volt trip fault  
occurs  
Line UV alarm level  
Line UV alarm clear  
Ac line voltage below which the AC line volts low alarm occurs  
Ac line voltage above which the AC line volts low alarm goes  
away  
Over freq flt level  
Ac line frequency above which the AC line over freq trip fault  
occurs  
Over freq alm level  
Over freq alm clear  
Under freq flt level  
Under freq alm level  
Under freq alarm clr  
Ac line frequency above which the AC line freq high alarm  
occurs  
Ac line frequency below which the AC line freq high alarm  
goes away  
Ac line frequency below which the AC line under freq trip fault  
occurs  
Ac line frequency below which the AC line freq low alarm  
occurs  
Ac line frequency above which the AC line freq low alarm goes  
away  
3-70 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter  
Description  
Utility feed  
Determines the bandwidth of the Phase Lock Loop function. If  
set to True, the bandwidth is set to obtain an amount of  
“sluggishness” appropriate for a utility feed. The pll will be  
more robust and less sensitive to unreal disturbances. It  
should be set to True only if the line is a diesel-generator or  
other spongy line source. The bandwidth ratio of True versus  
True is 4:1. The default setting is True to assume a utility feed.  
Phase rotation req  
Determines the phase sequence the Phase Lock Loop  
function expects. The Phase Lock Loop function can lock to  
either “forward-ABC” or reverse phase sequence. The fault,  
AC line rev phs seq will occur if the wrong sequence is seen  
by the control. The default setting is Forward sequence.  
Faults and alarms  
The Line Monitor function generates the 12 faults and alarms mentioned above in the  
function configuration section.  
Function description  
The Line Monitor function monitors the filtered ac line voltage (variable Line  
monitor volt) for overvoltage and undervoltage conditions. The function also  
monitors filtered ac line frequency (variable Line monitor frq) for overfrequency and  
underfrequency conditions. If Line monitor volt or Line monitor frq surpasses a  
threshold, the appropriate alarm or trip fault occurs. The thresholds are configured  
when the Drive Commissioning wizard runs and can be changed later by the Line  
Protection Setup wizard. See the above function configuration section for an  
explanation of the thresholds.  
Related functions  
•
•
Phase Imbalance Monitor  
Phase Lock Loop  
Related diagrams  
•
Line Monitor Overview (Ovr_Lin_Mon)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phase Lock Loop  
The Phase Lock Loop function outputs magnitude, frequency, and phase information  
to the rest of the control, including the Line Monitor. A few configuration parameters  
are critical. See the parameters in the function configuration section.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Phase Lock Loop function.  
Variable  
Description  
Y axis line voltage  
The feedback for the phase lock loop regulator. The  
reference is zero, since the phase lock loop is attempting to  
regulate the y-component of the line voltage to zero. This  
variable is also used with X axis line voltage to calculate the  
AC line magnitude (variable AC line voltage mag).  
X axis line voltage  
The demodulated x-axis component of the ac line voltage. It  
is not used in the actual phase lock loop regulator, but is  
used with Y axis line voltage to calculate the AC line  
magnitude, AC line voltage mag.  
PLL error  
The phase lock loop regulator error.  
PLL prop gain  
The phase lock loop proportional gain. This gain is dynamic.  
It very hot before the pll is locked and then changes to a  
more sluggish gain.  
PLL integral gain  
The phase lock loop integral gain. This gain is dynamic. It is  
very hot before the pll is locked and then changes to a more  
sluggish gain.  
PLL max frequency  
PLL min frequency  
Maximum frequency allowed by phase lock loop regulator.  
This is function of the nominal input frequency.  
Minimum frequency allowed by phase lock loop regulator.  
This is function of the nominal input frequency. It is also  
dynamic. When the pll is not locked, this variable is set to  
the negative of PLL max frequency.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Phase Lock Loop function.  
Variable  
Description  
Line monitor frq  
A low-pass filtered version of the phase lock loop frequency  
(variable PLL frequency). It is used for frequency fault  
checking.  
PLL frequency  
The main un-filtered ac line frequency, as determined by the  
phase lock loop regulator. This value is used throughout the  
control’s regulators.  
Elect angle command  
This is the angle of the ac line as determined by the phase  
lock loop regulator. It is the angle used to determine the  
phase of the up/down commands to the bridge gating  
interface.  
Electric angle fbk  
This is the angle of the ac line as determined by the phase  
lock loop regulator. It is the angle used to demodulate the  
voltage and current feedbacks at the beginning of each fast  
execution task.  
3-72 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Variable  
Description  
PLL proven  
This boolean indicates whether the pll is locked. It is used  
throughout the control as a permissive to run or check  
various protections.  
Line monitor volt  
The filtered AC line voltage magnitude which is used by the  
Line Monitor function to protect the drive from overvoltage  
and undervoltage conditions. It is calculated as the square  
root of the sum of the squares of variables Y axis line  
voltage and X axis line voltage.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Phase Lock Loop  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Utility feed  
Determines the bandwidth of the phase lock loop. If set to  
True, the bandwidth is set to obtain an amount of  
“sluggishness” appropriate for a utility feed. The pll will be  
more robust and less sensitive to unreal disturbances. It  
should be set to True only if the line is a diesel-generator or  
other spongy line source. The bandwidth ratio of True  
versus True is 4:1. The default setting is True to assume a  
utility feed.  
Phase rotation req  
AC grid frequency  
The Phase Lock Loop function can lock to either “forward-  
ABC” or reverse phase sequence. The fault, AC line rev  
phs seq will occur if the wrong sequence is seen by the  
control. The default setting is Forward sequence.  
The phase lock loop regulator clamp settings are  
determined by this input. Run the Drive Commissioning  
wizard to set this parameter.  
Related functions  
•
Phase Imbalance Monitor  
Related diagrams  
•
Phase Lock Loop Regulator (Ovr_PLL)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequencer Functions  
Sequencer Overview  
Sequencing is a key function of the Innovation Series drive. The sequencer oversees  
the starting and stopping of the drive. It keeps the drive from mis-operating during  
fault or diagnostic conditions. The sequencer also provides drive status information  
that can be used by various drive and application functions.  
The Innovation Series drive sequencer can be described by the following functions:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fault Reset Logic  
Sequencer Permissives  
Stopping Commands and Modes  
Sequencer Commands  
Sequencer Status  
Main Contactor Configuration  
Related diagrams  
•
Sequencing Overview (Ovr_Seq)  
Fault Reset Logic  
The sequencer oversees the shutdown of a drive under a fault condition. It makes  
sure the contactor (if present) is opened and that the regulators and speed references  
are disabled in a timely manner.  
Faults can be reset in several different ways. They can be reset from the Drive  
Diagnostic Interface (DDI), also called the keypad. They can be reset by a selected  
variable or through the LAN (if enabled).  
Function inputs  
Parameter  
Description  
Fault reset select  
Specifies a Boolean variable that requests a fault reset,  
when the variable transitions from a 0 to a 1 (Positive edge  
detected).  
Variable  
Description  
Fault reset req, lan  
Requests a fault reset when the LAN is active and variable  
transitions from a 0 to a 1 (positive edge detected). Refer  
to LAN Signal Map. This variable must be selected in Fault  
reset select to be active.  
Requests a fault reset when pressed.  
DDI “Reset Faults”  
Push Button  
3-74 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function outputs  
Variable  
Description  
Trip fault active  
Indicates when a Trip fault is present. Trip fault active is True  
when a Trip fault exists. It is a NC contact in the Ready to run  
permissive string. Refer to Sequencer Permissives.  
No trip fault  
Indicates when a Trip fault is NOT present. Is True when there is  
no Trip fault. (Alarm may exist).  
No faults active  
Indicates when no Trip faults or Alarms are present. Is True when  
no faults or alarms exist in the drive.  
Function description  
When the drive is running and a Trip fault is generated, the sequencer will perform  
the following actions in order:  
•
Disables the drive flux, Flux enable status and the bridge power enable, Bridge  
is on.  
•
•
Disables the drive torque, Torque reg enabled.  
Opens the contactor, if present. The contactor will remain open as long as a  
Trip fault exists. See Main Contactor Configuration.  
•
•
Disables the speed regulator, Sreg enable status.  
Disables the speed reference, Speed ref enabled.  
The sequencer also removes any type of run request to the drive because the Ready  
to run permissive string drops out due to the Trip fault. This will also keep the drive  
from trying to run while a Trip fault is present.  
Because the bridge is turned off during a Trip fault, the sequencer essentially  
performs a coast stop. A coast stop occurs when the power to the motor is removed  
and the motor coasts to a stop.  
To reset a Trip fault or Alarm, request a Fault reset using one of the Function inputs  
described above.  
Note Performing a Fault reset may not clear the fault if the fault condition still  
exists, or if the fault is Locked.  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #1 (GenSeq_1)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequencer Permissives  
Sequencer permissives are used to prevent or allow the drive to run if the permissive  
condition exists in the drive. Two types of permissives exist: internal permissives  
and application permissives.  
Internal permissives are internal drive conditions that must be satisfied before the  
drive will run (for example, DC bus charged must be True before the drive can run.)  
Application permissives allow the user to connect application specific permissive  
logic that must be satisfied before the drive will run.  
The main permissive string used by the sequencer is Ready to run. This permissive  
must be True for the drive to run, and the details of this permissive are displayed in  
the Sequencing diagrams in the drive.  
Function inputs  
Application Permissive Inputs  
Parameter  
Description  
Run permissive sel  
When used, this parameter selects a variable that  
populates Run permissive.  
When unused, Run permissive is always set to True.  
Start permissive sel  
When used, this parameter selects a variable that  
populates Start permissive when the drive is stopped.  
When unused, Start permissive is always set to True  
Variable  
Description  
Run permissive  
If False, this permissive will prevent the drive from starting  
or stop the drive if it is running. An alarm, Run permissive  
lost, is generated when the permissive is False.  
Start permissive  
X stop active  
If False, this permissive will prevent the drive from starting,  
but will not stop the drive if it is running. An alarm, Start  
permissive bad, is generated when the permissive is  
False.  
If True, this permissive will prevent the drive from starting  
or will perform an X-Stop if the drive is running. A Trip  
fault, Run req & xstop open, is generated when this  
permissive is True, the drive is stopped, and a run is  
requested.  
(For more information on X stop active, please refer to  
Stopping Commands and Modes.)  
3-76 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal Permissive Inputs  
Variable  
Description  
Local fault string  
Local hardware permissive. When Local fault string is True,  
it will prevent the drive from starting or running. If a run is  
requested while Local fault string is True, a Trip fault, Local  
flt, will be generated.  
System fault  
string  
System hardware permissive. When System fault string is  
True, it will prevent the drive from starting or running. If a run  
is requested while System fault string is True a Trip fault,  
System flt, will be generated. See also Hardware Fault  
Strings.  
Flux decay active  
Indicates that that flux has not yet decayed below 2% of  
100% Flux when the drive is in Tachless mode operation. If  
True, Flux decay active will prevent the drive from starting.  
An alarm, Run cmd w high flux, will be generated if this  
permissive is True when a run is requested.  
DC bus charged  
Indicates that the DC bus is charged. An alarm, DC bus  
voltage low, is generated when this permissive is False.  
Function outputs  
Variable  
Description  
Ready to run  
The main run permissive and primary indication that the drive  
is ready to run. If False, this permissive will cause all run  
requests and commands to drop out. The drive cannot be  
started unless Ready to run is True.  
Run ready and  
fluxed  
Indicates that the drive is fluxed and ready to run. This  
permissive can be used in coordination with Full flux request  
as a ready to run signal for applications that keep the drive  
fluxed for fast restarts. Refer to Sequencer Commands.  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Bypass Q/C stop  
This parameter removes Coast stop active and Quick stop  
active from the Ready to run permissive, when they are  
normally included. Bypass Q/C stop should be set to Yes if  
Normal stop mode is set to Quick stop or Coast stop. (Also  
see Stopping Commands and Modes.)  
Flying restart  
This parameter has the following possible values:  
Enable fly restart: Allows the drive to restart while the motor  
speed is above the Zero speed level.  
Disable fly restart: The motor speed must be below the Zero  
speed level before the drive can be restarted, otherwise a  
trip fault, Flying restrt disabl, will be generated.  
Locked shaft restart: The application assures that the shaft is  
locked (by a brake or other means) when the drive is started.  
This mode may decrease the time that it takes to pre-flux the  
drive.  
Note In this mode, failure to insure that the shaft is locked  
may cause the drive to misoperate.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related faults and alarms  
The following faults and alarms may be generated when the Ready to run permissive  
is not satisfied.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Run permissive lost  
Start permissive bad  
Run cmd w high flux  
Local flt  
System flt  
Run before MA closed  
Flying restrt disabl  
Run req & xstop open  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #2 (GenSeq_2)  
Stopping Commands and Modes  
The sequencer provides two mechanisms for issuing a controlled stop of the drive: a  
Normal stop and an X-stop.  
A Normal stop can be issued in several ways:  
•
•
•
•
Removing a run request or jog request  
Pressing the Stop pushbutton on the DDI (also called the keypad)  
Pressing an alternate Stop pushbutton (if configured in the drive)  
Removing the Run permissive from the Ready to run permissive string  
An X-Stop is issued through a dedicated configurable input to the drive.  
A third mechanism for stopping the drive is to generate a Trip fault. In a Trip fault,  
since the power to the motor is quickly removed, the drive does not stop the motor in  
a controlled manner.  
Related diagrams  
•
•
General Sequencing #1 (GenSeq_1)  
General Sequencing #2 (GenSeq_2)  
3-78 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Normal Stop  
The Normal stop is the typical way to stop the drive in a controlled manner. A  
Normal stop can be configured as Ramp stop, Coast stop, or Quick stop.  
Function inputs  
The following parameters drive the function input variables:  
Parameter  
Description  
Run request select  
See Sequencer Commands for a description of this  
parameter.  
Jog request select  
Stop PB select  
See Sequencer Commands for a description of this  
parameter.  
Selects a variable that is inverted and then used to  
drive Stop PB request. The input variable must go  
False to issue a Normal stop (that is, set Run request  
to False).  
This input is used to create a two-wire Start/Stop  
pushbutton.  
When Stop PB select is used, the sequencer looks at  
the + edge of the Run request select input to set Run  
request to True and at Stop PB request to set Run  
request to False.  
Stop PB select, lan  
Selects a LAN variable used to drive Stop PB request  
when LAN commands OK is True. The input variable  
must go True to issue a Normal stop (that is, set Run  
request to False). Please note that input has the  
OPPOSITE behavior of Stop PB select.  
This input is used to create a two-signal Start/Stop  
pushbutton over the LAN. When Stop PB select, lan is  
used, the sequencer looks at the + edge of Run  
request, lan to set Run request to True and at Stop PB  
request to set Run request to False.  
The following variables are inputs that are used to stop the drive.  
Variable  
Description  
Run request and  
Jog request  
A normal stop is generated when Run request and Jog  
request are both False. (See also Sequencer  
Commands.)  
Stop PB request  
This input is driven by Stop PB select or Stop PB  
select, lan. A normal stop is generated when Stop PB  
request is True.  
Run permissive  
A normal stop is generated when this input is False.  
(See also Sequencer Permissives.)  
DDI Stop Pushbutton  
A normal stop is generated when the Stop pushbutton  
is pressed on the DDI.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Normal stop mode  
Selects the behavior of a normal stop. Possible  
choices are:  
Ramp stop  
Quick stop  
Coast stop  
(See below.)  
Flux off delay time  
Sets a time delay for which the drive remains fluxed  
after it has stopped. Allows the drive to be quickly re-  
started after it has stopped, without the delay of pre-  
fluxing the drive.  
Function description  
A normal stop can be generated from one of several different inputs, but has 1 of 3  
stopping behaviors as configured by the parameter Normal stop mode.  
Ramp stop  
Quick stop  
Coast stop  
The drive follows a linear speed deceleration ramp  
down to zero speed as configured by the Speed  
Reference Ramp function. Once the drive detects that  
Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed level, the  
sequencer disables the regulators and stops the drive.  
The speed reference is stepped to zero so that the  
speed is brought to zero as quickly as possible (the  
drive is in current limit). Once the drive detects that  
Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed level, the  
sequencer disables the regulators and stops the drive.  
The regulators are immediately disabled and power is  
removed from the motor so that it will coast to a stop.  
The sequencer will prevent the drive from being re-  
started until Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed  
level, unless Flying restart is enabled.  
Note If Normal stop mode is set to Quick stop or to Coast stop, it is recommended  
that the parameter Bypass Q/C stop be set to Yes.  
Otherwise, if the application uses Full flux request or has set the Flux off delay time,  
the sequencer will not properly maintain flux on the drive.  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #2 (GenSeq_2)  
X-Stop  
The X-stop is an alternate way to stop the drive in a controlled manner. An X-stop  
can be configured as Ramp stop, Coast stop, Quick stop, Trip fault stop, or  
Emergency Ramp stop.  
3-80 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function inputs  
Parameter  
Description  
X stop  
request sel  
Selects the variable that is inverted and then used to drive X  
stop active. The variable selected by X stop request sel must be  
False to initiate an X-stop.  
Variable  
Description  
X stop  
request, lan  
Is used to drive X stop active from the LAN when LAN  
commands OK is True. X stop request, lan must be True to  
initiate an X-stop. Please note that this is OPPOSITE the  
behavior of X stop request sel. (See also LAN Signal Map.)  
Function output  
Variable  
Description  
X stop active  
Causes drive to perform an X-stop as configured by X stop  
mode. It also drops out the Ready to run permissive string.  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
X stop mode  
Selects the behavior of an X-stop. Possible choices are:  
Nrml (ramp) stop  
Quick stop  
Trip flt stop  
Emerg ramp stop  
(See below.)  
Coast stop  
Function description  
An X-stop can have 1 of 5 stopping behaviors as configured by the parameter X stop  
mode.  
Nrml (ramp)  
stop  
The drive follows a linear speed deceleration ramp down to zero  
speed as configured by the Speed Reference Ramp function. Once  
the drive detects that Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed  
level, the sequencer disables the regulators and stops the drive.  
Quick stop  
Coast stop  
Trip flt stop  
The speed reference is stepped to zero so that the speed is brought  
to zero as quickly as possible (the drive is in current limit). Once the  
drive detects that Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed level,  
the sequencer disables the regulators and stops the drive.  
The regulators are immediately disabled and power is removed from  
the motor so that it will coast to a stop. The sequencer will prevent  
the drive from being re-started until Speed reg fbk has reached the  
Zero speed level, unless Flying restart is enabled.  
Behavior is similar to that of a Coast stop, except that a Trip fault, X  
stop, is also generated.  
Emerg ramp  
stop  
The drive follows a linear speed deceleration ramp down to zero as  
configured by the parameter Emerg ramp rate. (See also the Speed  
Reference Ramp.) Once the drive detects that Speed reg fbk has  
reached the Zero speed level, the sequencer disables the regulators  
and stops the drive.  
Once the drive is stopped, X stop active must be set False before the drive is re-  
started. Otherwise, if any type of run is requested, the sequencer will generate an Run  
req & xstop open trip fault.  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #1 (GenSeq_1)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequencer Commands  
A sequencer request is generated from various user inputs to direct the sequencer to  
run or flux the drive. A sequencer command is the internal “go ahead” to sequencer  
once the permissive logic has been satisfied (see Sequencer Permissives).  
The variables Run request and Jog request are associated with Run Commands. They  
direct the sequencer to run the drive using the appropriate speed reference.  
The variable Full flux request is associated with Flux Commands and directs the  
sequencer to flux the drive. If the drive is already fluxed when a run is requested, the  
drive will begin running immediately without the delay caused by fluxing the drive.  
Related diagrams  
•
•
General Sequencing #2 (GenSeq_2)  
General Sequencing #3 (GenSeq_3)  
Run Commands  
A run command (initiated either by a Run request or Jog request) will:  
•
•
•
•
•
Enable bridge power  
Flux the drive (if it is not already fluxed)  
Enable drive torque  
Enable the speed regulator  
Enable the appropriate speed reference  
Function inputs  
Parameter  
Description  
Run  
request  
select  
Selects the variable that drives Run request. This input is only  
active in “Remote mode” (Local mode active is False). The  
sequencer normally treats the signal as a +/- edge-triggered input to  
set Run request. However, if Stop PB select is used, the sequencer  
looks only at the + edge of the signal to set Run request. (See  
Stopping Commands and Modes for more information on Stop PB  
select.)  
Jog request  
select  
Selects the variable that drives Jog request. This input is only  
active in “Remote mode.” It is treated as a +/- edge-triggered input.  
Variable  
Description  
Run  
request, lan  
Drives Run request from the LAN if LAN commands OK is True.  
(Also see LAN Signal Map.) This input is only active in “Remote  
mode”. The sequencer normally treats the signal as a +/- edge-  
triggered input to set Run request. However, if Stop PB select, lan  
is used, the sequencer looks only at the + edge of the signal to set  
Run request. (See Stopping Commands and Modes for more  
information on Stop PB select, lan.)  
Jog  
request, lan  
Drives Jog request from the LAN if LAN commands OK is True.  
This input is only active in “Remote mode”. It is treated as a +/-  
edge-triggered input. (Also see LAN Signal Map.)  
DDI Run  
pushbutton  
Sets Run request to True if the drive is in Local mode (Local mode  
active is True).  
DDI Jog  
pushbutton  
Sets Jog request when pressed and clears it when released. Is  
operational only when the drive is in Local mode (Local mode active  
is True).  
3-82 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function outputs  
Variable  
Description  
Run request  
The request to run the drive. The details of the logic which  
forms this signal is shown in the sequencer diagrams.  
Jog request  
The request to run the drive at the appropriate jog reference  
(see Local Speed Reference or Remote Speed Reference for  
details on speed reference). The details of the logic which  
forms this signal is shown in the sequencer diagrams.  
Run command  
Internal sequencer command formed from Run request, Jog  
request and the Ready to run permissive string.  
Run active  
Jog active  
Drive is running in response to Run request.  
Drive is running in response to Jog request.  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #2 (GenSeq_2)  
Flux Commands  
A flux command (initiated by Full flux command or Standby command) will:  
•
•
•
Enable bridge power  
Flux the drive  
Disable the torque reference (if enabled)  
Function inputs  
Parameter  
Description  
Full flux req sel  
Selects the variable that requests the drive to be pre-fluxed  
and waiting for a run command. This input is only active in  
“Remote mode”. It is treated as a +/- edge-triggered input.  
If the drive is using a Tachless mode motor control and Flying  
restart is set to Locked shaft restart, this input will request a  
Standby command.  
Variable  
Description  
Full flux req, lan  
Requests the drive to be pre-fluxed from the LAN if LAN  
commands OK is True. This input is only active in “Remote  
mode”. It is treated as a +/- edge-triggered input.  
(Also see LAN Signal Map.)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function outputs  
Variable  
Description  
Full flux request  
A request to enable the bridge and pre-flux the drive. This  
signal is the output of Full flux req sel and Full flux req, lan.  
Full flux  
command  
Internal sequencer command to enable the bridge and pre-  
flux the drive. This output requires that the Ready to run  
permissive string be satisfied. The details of the logic which  
forms this signal is shown in the sequencer diagrams.  
Standby  
command  
Internal sequencer command to enable the bridge, pre-flux  
the drive and enter an adaptive full flux standby mode. This  
output requires that the Ready to run permissive string be  
satisfied.  
This command is generated only when the drive is using a  
Tachless motor control and Enb adaptv full flx is set to Yes or  
Flying restart is set to Locked shaft restart. The standby mode  
is used to measure the value of motor parameters that are  
critical to Tachless motor control operation. The details of the  
logic which forms this signal is shown on the sequencer  
diagrams.  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
This parameter is specific to the Tachless motor control algorithm  
and is associated with Full flux request mode operation. If this  
parameter is set to Yes, the drive control will track motor  
resistance continuously during Full flux request mode. This will  
ensure optimal low speed control performance and optimal torque  
per ampere capability when the Tachless control drive resumes  
normal running condition.  
Enb adaptv  
full flx  
The Vector Tachless drive cannot keep the motor energized at  
zero speed in (Full flux request mode) for an extended period of  
time (measured in 10’s of seconds) without malfunction unless the  
parameter Enb adaptv full flx is set to Yes (see caution below).  
Otherwise, the drive must be stopped and restarted when it is  
desired to move.  
When the Tachless drive is stopped, there is a requirement to wait  
for the motor flux to decay (1 to 20 seconds, depending on motor  
rotor circuit time constant) before restarting the drive. Otherwise,  
a Run cmd w high flux alarm will occur and the drive will be  
blocked from starting until the flux has decayed to a lower level  
(2% rated).  
When parameter Enb adaptv full flx is set to Yes, any externally  
induced shaft motion (even very slight motion) will cause the  
drive to malfunction. Please do not activate this function if the  
motor shaft can be rotated by its load while in Full Flux mode.  
Please see also other cautions on applying Tachless Control  
drives as specified under the parameter, Motor ctrl alg sel.  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #3 (GenSeq_3)  
3-84 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequencer Status  
The sequencer provides drive status information that can be used by various  
application functions and is also used for internal sequencing functions. The status  
information is divided into 2 types:  
•
•
Drive status variables  
Sequencer status variables  
Drive status variables  
Drive status variables provide general information about the status of the drive (for  
example, whether it is running, stopped, and so forth). These variables are used by  
the toolbox and by the DDI/keypad to provide drive status information to the user.  
Drive status information is provided to the LAN as well. (See LAN Signal Map.)  
Variable  
Description  
Bridge is on  
Coast stop active  
Bridge power is enabled.  
A coast stop is active in the drive, initiated either by a  
normal or X-stop. (See Stopping Commands and Modes.)  
No faults active  
No faults or alarms exist in the drive.  
Quick stop active  
A quick stop is active in the drive, initiated either by a  
normal or X-stop. (See Stopping Commands and Modes.)  
Ramp ref enabled  
Ready to run  
Speed reference input to the Speed Reference Ramp is  
enabled. When a stop command is initiated, Ramp ref  
enabled goes False, stepping the ramp input to zero. The  
Speed ref, ramped follows a linear ramp from its present  
value to zero.  
Drive is ready to run and will start if a run is requested.  
(See Sequencer Permissives.)  
Run ready and  
fluxed  
Drive is fluxed and ready to run. (See Sequencer  
Permissives.)  
Running  
The drive is running (that is, the speed regulator and  
speed references are enabled).  
Stopped  
The drive is stopped (that is, bridge power is off).  
A Trip fault exists in the drive.  
Trip fault active  
Zero speed active  
The speed feedback used by the speed regulator, Speed  
reg fbk, is less than the parameter, Zero speed level. Once  
this condition is met, Zero speed active goes True after a  
delay time set by Zero speed delay.  
Parameter  
Description  
Zero speed level  
The level below which the drive is considered to be at zero  
speed as indicated by the variable, Zero speed active.  
Zero speed delay  
Once Speed reg fbk is below the Zero speed level, this  
parameter specifies the time for which Zero speed active is  
held off from going True.  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #2 (GenSeq_2)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequencer status variables  
Sequencer status variables are used to request and report status of internal regulator  
sequencing. These variables normally come in pairs of a Request and a Status. The  
Request is a command to either enable or disable the appropriate function. The  
Status is a feedback that indicates the command has been successfully executed (that  
is, enabled or disabled) and the sequencer can proceed to its next state.  
Variable  
Description  
Sequencer state  
Internal sequencer state variable that indicates what  
mode the sequencer is in. Possible values include:  
Stopped  
Enable flux  
Enable torque  
Enable speed regulator  
Running  
Zero speed (waiting for zero speed)  
Disable torque  
Standby  
MA cont enable req  
MA cont enable stat  
Flux enable request  
Flux enable status  
Request to pick up (drop out) the MA contactor. (See  
Main Contactor Configuration.)  
Indicates that the MA contactor has been picked up  
(dropped out).  
Request to enable (disable) bridge power and the inner  
regulators and to pre-flux the drive.  
Status that the bridge power and inner regulators are  
enabled (disabled) and the drive is pre-fluxed.  
Torque enable req  
Torque reg enabled  
Sreg enable request  
Request to enable (disable) the torque reference  
Status that the torque reference is enabled (disabled).  
Request to enable (disable) the speed regulator. (See  
Speed/Torque Regulator).  
Sreg enable status  
Ref enable request  
Speed ref enabled  
Standby enable req  
Status that the speed regulator is enabled (disabled).  
Request to enable (disable) the speed reference.  
Status that the speed reference is enabled (disabled).  
Request to enable (disable) standby mode (See  
Sequencer Commands.  
Standby enable stat  
Status that standby mode is enabled (disabled).  
Related diagrams  
•
•
General Sequencing #4 (GenSeq_4)  
General Sequencing #5 (GenSeq_5)  
3-86 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Contactor Configuration  
The sequencer normally controls the operation of the main (MA) contactor. The  
contactor is picked up when the drive is powered up and only drops out when a Trip  
fault exists in the drive. The contactor may also be independently controlled from an  
external input.  
Function input  
Parameter  
Description  
MA close req sel  
Selects the Boolean variable that drives MA cont enable  
req to independently control the contactor. Note: If this  
input is used, the contactor MUST be picked before a run  
request is sent to the drive, otherwise a trip fault, Run  
before MA closed, will be issued.  
If MA close req sel is set to Unused, the contactor will be  
automatically driven by the sequencer.  
Function output  
Variable  
Description  
MA cont enable req  
Request from sequencer to pick-up or drop out the main  
contactor.  
MA cont enable stat  
MA close command  
MA contactor closed  
Status to indicate to the sequencer that the main contactor  
has been picked-up (dropped-out).  
Internal command to the contactor hardware to pick-up or  
drop out the contactor.  
Actual feedback from the contactor indicating that the  
contactor has been picked-up or dropped out. If  
connected, then MA contactor fbk must be set to True. If  
the feedback is not connected, then the contactor  
sequencing uses MA pickup time to indicate the contactor  
status (MA cont enable stat).  
Function configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
MA contactor absent  
Specifies whether a contactor is absent. If this parameter  
is not set correctly, the contactor sequencing will not work  
properly.  
MA contactor fbk  
MA pickup time  
Enables the sequencing logic to look at contactor feedback  
to determine if the contactor status meets the request.  
(See MA pickup time below.)  
If MA contactor fbk is enabled, then this acts as a time-out  
delay. If the contactor feedback hasn’t met the command  
within the specified time, the drive will generate a Cont  
failed to close trip fault.  
If MA contactor fbk is disabled, then this acts as the  
contactor simulated feedback delay, and will update the  
status to match the request after the specified delay. The  
maximum delay time is 2 seconds. In simulator mode, the  
sequencer ignores the contactor feedback even if MA  
contactor fbk is enabled.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The main (MA) contactor can be either be automatically controlled by the sequencer,  
or independently controlled by using the parameter, MA close req sel. When  
controlled by the sequencer, the contactor is picked up when the drive is powered up  
and dropped out only on trip faults. When independently controlled, the contactor  
must be picked up before a run is requested. The contactor will also drop out on a  
trip fault regardless of the command.  
The contactor will also be dropped out (in hardware) when either the Local or  
System Fault strings have been opened.  
Many drive applications do not require a contactor and should therefore configure  
the parameter MA contactor absent correctly for proper operation.  
If the contactor has the feedback wired, then the parameter MA contactor fbk should  
be enabled and MA pickup time should be set to a reasonable time-out delay for the  
contactor that is used.  
Related diagrams  
•
General Sequencing #4 (GenSeq_4)  
3-88 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Reference Functions  
Critical Speed Avoidance  
The Critical Speed Avoidance function prevents the speed reference from entering  
speed avoidance zones. The user can specify three positive and three negative speed  
avoidance zones. The Critical Speed Avoidance function operates on the pre-ramp  
speed reference.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Critical Speed Avoidance  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed avd func input  
Speed reference which is the output of the Minimum  
Speed Limit function (variable Min speed output). RPM  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Critical Speed Avoidance  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reference which has been prohibited from  
entering the speed avoidance zones and which is the  
input to the Speed Reference Ramp function (variable  
Speed ref, pre ramp). RPM  
Spd avd func output  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Critical Speed  
Avoidance function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Crit speed avoidance  
Critical speed 1  
Enables the Critical Speed Avoidance function.  
Speed at center of speed avoidance zone 1. RPM  
Speed at center of speed avoidance zone 2. RPM  
Speed at center of speed avoidance zone 3. RPM  
Critical speed 2  
Critical speed 3  
Width of speed avoidance zones on either side of center  
speeds. RPM  
Critical speed hys  
Function description  
The Critical Speed Avoidance function is part of the Speed Reference Generation  
function. It operates on the speed reference after the Minimum Speed Limit function  
and before the Speed Reference Ramp function. The Critical Speed Avoidance and  
Minimum Speed Limit functions are coordinated so that the output of the Critical  
Speed Avoidance function is outside the boundary imposed by the Minimum Speed  
Limit function.  
The Critical Speed Avoidance function prevents the speed reference from entering  
speed avoidance zones. Each speed avoidance zone is defined by a center speed and  
a hysteresis level. The user can specify three positive and three negative speed  
avoidance zones.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The table below lists how the parameters define the center speeds of each of the  
speed avoidance zones.  
Speed Avoidance Zone  
Positive zone 1  
Center Speed  
Critical speed 1  
Positive zone 2  
Critical speed 2  
Positive zone 3  
Critical speed 3  
Negative zone 1  
Negative zone 2  
Negative zone 3  
-1 x Critical speed 1  
-1 x Critical speed 2  
-1 x Critical speed 3  
The hysteresis is the same for all of the speed avoidance zones. For each of the speed  
avoidance zones, the Critical Speed Avoidance function prohibits the speed reference  
from taking on values between [Center speed - Critical speed hys] and [Center speed  
+ Critical speed hys], where Center speed is defined by the table above. The total  
width of each of the speed avoidance zones is 2 times Critical speed hys.  
Related diagrams  
•
Critical Speed Avoidance (CrSpdAvd)  
Local Speed Reference  
The Local Speed Reference forms a speed reference signal from the local source (the  
DDI/keypad).  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables to the Local Speed Reference  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Local inc command  
Signal that is True when the DDI speed increment button  
is pressed.  
Local dec command  
Jog request  
Signal that is True when the DDI speed decrement button  
is pressed.  
Sequencer request to jog the drive.  
Function outputs  
The output of the Local Speed Reference function is a local speed reference. This  
becomes the speed reference used by the Speed Reference Generation function if  
Local mode active is True.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the Local Speed  
Reference function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Local speed  
Local jog speed  
Initial value of local speed reference. RPM  
Jog speed that becomes the local speed reference when Jog  
request is True. RPM  
Local Inc/Dec  
rate  
Rate of change of the local speed reference. RPM/second  
3-90 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The Local Speed Reference function is part of the Speed Reference Generation  
function. It forms a speed reference signal from the local source (the DDI).  
The Local Speed Reference function produces a local speed reference. This becomes  
the speed reference used by the Speed Reference Generation function if the drive is  
in local mode (when Local mode active is True). Local mode is enabled using the  
DDI Remote/Local button.  
The local speed reference is formed by adjusting the reference around an initial  
value. The initial value is specified by Local speed. To make the adjustment, press  
the DDI speed increment (Speed +) and decrement (Speed –) buttons. Using the  
increment and decrement buttons sets Local inc command and Local dec command  
respectively. The speed reference increases when Local inc command is True and  
decreases when Local dec command is True. The rate of change is defined by Local  
Inc/Dec rate. The local speed reference is limited to values between zero and  
Applied top RPM.  
The calculation of the local speed reference described in the preceding paragraph  
applies when Jog request is False. When Jog request is True, the local speed  
reference is set to the value of Local jog speed. More information on Jog request is  
available in the Sequencer Commands function help.  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Reference Generation (Ovr_RfSel)  
Minimum Speed Limit  
The Minimum Speed Limit function prohibits the speed reference from falling below  
a specified magnitude.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Minimum Speed Limit  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Minimum speed  
input  
Speed reference which is the possibly reversed local or  
remote speed reference (variable Speed reference). RPM  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Minimum Speed Limit  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Minimum speed  
output  
Speed reference whose magnitude has been clamped to a  
minimum value and which is the input to the Critical Speed  
Avoidance function (variable Speed avd func input). RPM  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Minimum Speed  
Limit function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Minimum speed  
Minimum speed reference magnitude. RPM  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The Minimum Speed Limit function is part of the Speed Reference Generation  
function. It operates on the speed reference after the Speed Reference Reverse and  
before the Critical Speed Avoidance function.  
The Minimum Speed Limit function prevents the speed reference from falling below  
a specified magnitude. The minimum speed magnitude is defined by parameter  
Minimum speed.  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Reference Generation (Ovr_RfSel)  
Remote Speed Reference  
The Remote Speed Reference forms a speed reference signal from the remote source,  
which is typically a system level controller or an adjustable analog input.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters to the Remote Speed Reference  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Auto analog ref sel  
Man analog ref sel  
Selects the automatic speed reference.  
Selects the manual speed reference when Manual  
speed ref sel is False.  
Auto mode select  
Selects the signal that switches the remote speed  
reference between the automatic and manual  
references.  
The following table specifies the input variables to the Remote Speed Reference  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Jog request  
Sequencer request to jog the drive.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the Remote Speed  
Reference function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Speed setpoint 0  
Constant speed that is the manual reference when  
Manual speed ref sel is True. RPM  
Manual speed ref sel  
Remote jog speed  
Switches between the selectable and constant sources  
for the manual reference.  
Jog speed that becomes the local speed reference  
when Jog request is True. RPM  
3-92 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The Remote Speed Reference function is part of the Speed Reference Generation  
function. It forms a speed reference signal from the remote source (typically a  
system level controller or an adjustable analog input).  
The Remote Speed Reference function produces a local speed reference that becomes  
the speed reference used by the Speed Reference Generation function if the drive is  
in remote mode (when Local mode active is False). Remote mode is enabled using  
the DDI Remote/Local button.  
The remote speed reference is formed by selecting an automatic or manual reference.  
The automatic reference is usually a signal from a system level controller. The  
manual reference is usually an analog input signal or a constant setpoint. The  
selection of the automatic or manual reference source is determined by Auto mode  
select. If the variable selected by Auto mode select is True, then the automatic  
reference is used. If the variable selected by Auto mode select is False, then the  
manual reference is used.  
If the automatic reference is used, then the remote speed reference is set equal to the  
signal selected by Auto analog ref sel.  
If the manual speed reference is used, then the remote speed reference is set to either  
a selectable or a constant value, depending on the value of Manual speed ref sel. If  
Manual speed ref sel is False, then the remote reference is set equal to the signal  
selected by Man analog ref sel. If Manual speed ref sel is True, then the remote  
reference is set equal to Speed setpoint 0.  
The selection of the remote speed reference described in the preceding paragraphs  
applies when Jog request is False. When Jog request is True, the remote speed  
reference is set to the value of Remote jog speed. More information on Jog request is  
available in the Sequencer Commands function help.  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Reference Generation (Ovr_RfSel)  
Speed Reference Generation  
The Speed Reference Generation function coordinates the activities involved in  
selecting and processing the speed reference signal.  
Function description  
The Speed Reference Generation function selects the speed reference signal from a  
local or remote source. The local source is the DDI/keypad (details on forming the  
local reference are available in the Local Speed Reference function help). The remote  
source is typically a system level controller or an adjustable analog input.  
Information on the formation of the remote reference is available in the Remote  
Speed Reference function help.  
The Speed Reference Generation selects the local reference if Local mode active is  
True. It selects the remote reference if Local mode active is False. Select the value  
of Local mode active with the DDI Remote/Local button.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After the speed reference has been selected from the local or remote source, the  
Speed Reference Generation function allows several subordinate functions to operate  
on the speed reference. The Speed Reference Reverse function reverses the speed  
reference if the user has requested that action. The Minimum Speed Limit function  
makes sure the speed reference magnitude is above a specified level. The Critical  
Speed Avoidance function prohibits the speed reference from entering specified  
ranges. The Speed Reference Ramp function limits the speed reference’s rate of  
change.  
The output of the Speed Reference Ramp function (Speed ref, ramped) is also the  
output of the Speed Reference Generation function. This final speed reference passes  
to the Speed/Torque Overview function for further conditioning before it becomes  
the reference to the Speed/Torque Regulator function.  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Reference Generation (Ovr_RfSel)  
Speed Reference Ramp  
The Speed Reference Ramp function forces the speed reference to change in a  
controlled fashion. It limits the rate of change of the speed reference that goes to the  
Speed/Torque Overview function.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Speed Reference Ramp  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reference that is the output of the Critical Speed  
Avoidance function (variable Spd avd func output). RPM  
Speed ref, pre ramp  
Speed feedback that in some conditions becomes the  
output of the ramp. RPM  
Speed reg fbk  
Ramp ref enabled  
Enables the speed reference input to the ramp.  
Emergency stop act  
A Stopping Commands and Modes signal that indicates  
that an emergency stop has been commanded.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Speed Reference Ramp  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reference which has been rate limited by the linear  
ramp. RPM  
Speed ref, ramped  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the general configuration parameters of the Speed  
Reference Ramp function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Ramp bypass  
Ramp rate mode  
Disables the Speed Reference Ramp function.  
Specifies whether the speed independent ramp rate mode or  
the programmed ramp rate mode is active.  
Emerg ramp rate  
Deceleration ramp rate under emergency stop conditions.  
RPM/second  
3-94 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the speed independent  
ramp rate mode, which is active when Ramp rate mode is set to Indep accel/decel.  
Parameter  
Description  
Acceleration rate 1  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is increasing and ramp rate set 1 is  
active. RPM/second  
Acceleration rate 2  
Deceleration rate 1  
Deceleration rate 2  
Ramp rate 2 select  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is increasing and ramp rate set 2 is  
active. RPM/second  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is decreasing and ramp rate set 1  
is active. RPM/second  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is decreasing and ramp rate set 2  
is active. RPM/second  
Selects between ramp rate set 1 and set 2.  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters for the programmed ramp  
rate mode, which is active when Ramp rate mode is set to Prog accel/decel.  
Parameter  
Description  
Acceleration rate 1  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is increasing and less than Accel  
break point 1. RPM/second  
Accel break point 1  
Acceleration rate 2  
Accel break point 2  
Acceleration rate 3  
Deceleration rate 1  
Decel break point 1  
Deceleration rate 2  
Decel break point 2  
Deceleration rate 3  
Speed at which the acceleration ramp rate switches  
between Acceleration rate 1 and Acceleration rate 2.  
RPM  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is increasing and between Accel  
break point 1 and Accel break point 2. RPM/second  
Speed at which the acceleration ramp rate switches  
between Acceleration rate 2 and Acceleration rate 3.  
RPM  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is increasing and greater than Accel  
break point 2. RPM/second  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is decreasing and less than Decel  
break point 1. RPM/second  
Speed at which the deceleration ramp rate switches  
between Deceleration rate 1 and Deceleration rate 2.  
RPM  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is decreasing and between Decel  
break point 1 and Decel break point 2. RPM/second  
Speed at which the deceleration ramp rate switches  
between Deceleration rate 2 and Deceleration rate 3.  
RPM  
Ramp rate that is effective when the magnitude of  
Speed ref, pre ramp is increasing and greater than  
Decel break point 2. RPM/second  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The Speed Reference Ramp function is part of the Speed Reference Generation  
function. It operates on the speed reference after the Critical Speed Avoidance  
function and before its use in the Speed/Torque Overview function.  
The Speed Reference Ramp function limits the rate of change of the speed reference.  
Its input (Speed ref, pre ramp) may experience a step change of large magnitude. Its  
output (Speed ref, ramped) has the rate limit imposed on it. The user can disable the  
Speed Reference Ramp function by setting Ramp bypass to True.  
The input to the Speed Reference Ramp is enabled and equal to Speed ref, pre ramp  
when Ramp ref enabled is True. When Ramp ref enabled is False, the input to the  
ramp is set to zero and the ramp output is allowed to decelerate to zero. More  
information on Ramp ref enabled is available in the Sequencer Status function help.  
If the drive is configured for flying restart (when Flying restart is set to Enable fly  
restart), then the ramp output (Speed ref, ramped) is set to the speed feedback (Speed  
reg fbk) when the reference input to the Speed/Torque Regulator is disabled. The  
input to the Speed/Torque Regulator is disabled when Speed ref enabled is False.  
This feature allows the speed reference to ramp from the speed feedback to the  
specified ramp input when the Speed/Torque Regulator reference input is enabled.  
More information on Flying restart is available in the Sequencer Permissives  
function help. More information on Speed ref enabled is available in the Sequencer  
Status function help.  
Two ramp modes are available for the Speed Reference Ramp function: the speed  
independent ramp rate mode and the programmed ramp rate mode. The modes differ  
in the way the ramp rates are implemented. The modes are selected by Ramp rate  
mode. The speed independent ramp rate mode is active when Ramp rate mode is set  
to Indep accel/decel. The programmed ramp rate mode is active when Ramp rate  
mode is set to Prog accel/decel.  
When the speed independent ramp rate mode is active, one acceleration rate and one  
deceleration rate are implemented for all speeds. The rate of change of the speed  
reference is limited to the acceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed  
reference is increasing. The rate of change of the speed reference is limited to the  
deceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed reference is decreasing. The  
acceleration and deceleration ramp rates belong to one of two ramp rate sets. Ramp  
rate set 1 is defined by Acceleration rate 1 and Deceleration rate 1 and is active  
when Ramp rate 2 select selects a False value. Ramp rate set 2 is defined by  
Acceleration rate 2 and Deceleration rate 2 and is active when Ramp rate 2 select  
selects a True value.  
When the programmed ramp rate mode is active, the acceleration and deceleration  
rates depend on the magnitude of the speed reference. The following table lists the  
ramp rates and the regions where they are active.  
Ramp rate  
Active region  
Acceleration rate 1  
Acceleration rate 2  
Abs(Speed ref, pre ramp) <= Accel break point 1  
Accel break point 1 < Abs(Speed ref, pre ramp) <=  
Accel break point 2  
Acceleration rate 3  
Deceleration rate 1  
Deceleration rate 2  
Accel break point 2 < Abs(Speed ref, pre ramp)  
Abs(Speed ref, pre ramp) <= Decel break point 1  
Decel break point 1 < Abs(Speed ref, pre ramp) <=  
Decel break point 2  
Deceleration rate 3  
Decel break point 2 < Abs(Speed ref, pre ramp)  
3-96 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The rate of change of the speed reference is limited to the acceleration rate when the  
magnitude of the speed reference is increasing. The rate of change of the speed  
reference is limited to the deceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed  
reference is decreasing.  
When an emergency stop is commanded, the Speed Reference Ramp decelerates the  
speed reference to zero at a rate defined by Emerg ramp rate. Emergency stop act  
indicates that an emergency stop has been commanded. More information on  
Emergency stop act is available in the Stopping Commands and Modes function help.  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Reference Ramp (Ramp)  
Speed Reference Reverse  
The Speed Reference Reverse function reverses the speed reference in response to a  
user request.  
Function inputs  
The primary input to the Speed Reference Reverse function is the speed reference  
signal from the Speed Reference Generation function (which is either the local or  
remote speed reference). This signal is not available as a drive variable.  
The following table specifies the input parameters to the Speed Reference Reverse  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Reverse select  
Selects the user reverse request when Local mode  
active is False.  
The following table specifies the input variables to the Speed Reference Reverse  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Local rev request  
User reverse request when Local mode active is True,  
changes as DDI reverse button is pressed.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Speed Reference Reverse  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reference  
Speed reference which is the local or remote speed  
reference and which has possibly been reversed. RPM  
Diagnostic variables  
The following table specifies the Speed Reference Reverse diagnostic variables.  
Variable  
Description  
Reverse mode active  
Indicates whether the drive recognizes a user reverse  
request.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The Speed Reference Reverse function is part of the Speed Reference Generation  
function. It reverses the speed reference in response to a user request.  
The speed reference input to the Speed Reference Reverse originates in the Local  
Speed Reference if Local mode active is True, or in the Remote Speed Reference if  
Local mode active is False. The value of Local mode active is selected with the DDI  
Remote/Local button.  
The user request to reverse the speed reference is reflected in Reverse mode active.  
It depends on the value of Local mode active. If Local mode active is True, then  
Reverse mode active is set equal to Local rev request, which changes between True  
and False as the DDI reverse button is pressed. If Local mode active is False, then  
Reverse mode active is set equal to the signal selected by Reverse select.  
When Reverse mode active is True, then the speed reference input is multiplied by –1  
to obtain the speed reference output (Speed reference).  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Reference Generation (Ovr_RfSel)  
3-98 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed/Torque Control Functions  
Droop  
The Droop function adjusts the speed reference to compensate for the difference  
between the desired and actual load torque.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Droop function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Droop comp ref sel  
Selects the load torque compensation. Per unit torque  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Droop function.  
Variable  
Description  
Droop feedback  
Averaged, normalized, and filtered version of the actual  
torque reference (Torque ref post lim). Per unit torque  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Droop function.  
Variable  
Description  
Droop output  
Speed reference adjustment. RPM  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Droop function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Droop feedback fil  
Droop deadband, neg  
Droop deadband, pos  
Droop gain  
Feedback filter bandwidth. Radians/second  
Negative deadband level. Per unit torque  
Positive deadband level. Per unit torque  
Scale factor that specifies speed droop for 1 pu torque.  
Per unit speed / Per unit torque  
Droop disable sel  
Selects a signal that can disable the droop function  
output.  
Related diagrams  
•
Droop (Droop)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Control Interface  
The Motor Control Interface function describes the main signals with which the  
application layer of drive functionality controls the inner motor control algorithm.  
The primary interface is represented by Torque ref pre limit, which is constrained by  
limits and transformed into a torque-producing current command Torque current ref.  
A secondary interface is represented by the Flux ref ratio signal, which provides  
limited capability for advanced applications to modify the motor flux reference.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters of the Motor Control Interface  
function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Torque lim 2 sel  
Selects the Boolean signal that switches between the two  
alternate sets of torque and current limit parameters.  
Adj mtr trq lim sel  
Adj gen trq lim sel  
Adj cur lim ref sel  
Flux ref ratio sel  
Selects a variable motoring torque limit signal, used in place  
of (but limited by) the active constant limit parameter.  
Selects a variable generating torque limit signal, used in  
place of (but limited by) the active constant limit parameter.  
Selects a variable current limit adjust signal, used in place of  
(but limited by) the active constant limit adjust parameter.  
Selects a variable flux reference adjust signal, used in place  
of the constant adjust parameter Flux ref ratio setpt.  
The following table specifies the input variables of the Motor Control Interface  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Torque ref pre  
limit  
Primary torque reference signal from the application layer of  
drive functionality prior to motor control interface torque  
limits. Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Torque enable req  
Torque reference enable Boolean command from the core  
drive sequencer necessary for the propagation of non-zero  
torque-producing current references to the motor control  
algorithm.  
Flux current, avg  
Flux producing component of current feedback utilized as a  
quadrature component in the transformation of the  
magnitude current limit to the torque-producing current limit.  
RMS amps  
3-100 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the output variables of the Motor Control Interface  
function.  
Variable  
Description  
Torque ref post  
lim  
Torque reference after application of positive & negatvie torque  
limits. Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Trq cur ref pre  
lim  
Torque-producing current reference, transformed from Torque  
ref post lim by torque compensations, and enabled by Torque  
enable req. RMS amps  
Torque current  
ref  
Torque-producing current reference after application of positive  
& negative current limits. RMS amps  
Motoring torque  
lim  
Net motoring torque limit, scaled according to 100% Motor  
torque. Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Regen torque  
limit  
Net generating torque limit, scaled according to 100% Motor  
torque, and reduced as necessary by DC Bus Regeneration  
Control. Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Torque cmd pos  
limit  
Positive torque limit, derived from motoring & generating torque  
limits according to direction-sensitive steering control. Newton-  
meters or Pound-feet  
Torque cmd neg  
limit  
Negative torque limit, derived from motoring & generating  
torque limits according to direction-sensitive steering control.  
Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Current limit  
Net current limit adjust. Per unit  
Torque current  
limit  
Torque-producing current limit adjust, scaled according to  
Motor rated current, and derived from the magnitude current  
limit according to Flux current, avg. RMS amps  
Ix command  
pos limit  
Positive current limit, derived from the torque-producing current  
limit, and reduced as necessary by Pullout Limit & Power-Dip  
Clamp Control. RMS amps  
Ix command  
neg limit  
Negative current limit, derived from the torque-producing  
current limit, and reduced as necessary by Pullout Limit &  
Power-Dip Clamp Control. RMS amps  
Flux ref ratio  
Net flux reference adjust signal.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Motor Control  
Interface function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Motoring torque lim1  
Defines the motoring torque limit (or maximum value of  
the variable limit specified by Adj mtr trq lim sel) when the  
value of the Boolean signal selected by Torque lim 2 sel  
is False. Per unit  
Motoring torque lim2  
Regen torque lim 1  
Regen torque lim 2  
Current limit 1  
Defines the motoring torque limit (or maximum value of  
the variable limit specified by Adj mtr trq lim sel) when the  
value of the Boolean signal selected by Torque lim 2 sel  
is True. Per unit  
Defines the generating torque limit (or maximum value of  
the variable limit specified by Adj gen trq lim sel) when  
the value of the Boolean signal selected by Torque lim 2  
sel is False. Per unit  
Defines the generating torque limit (or maximum value of  
the variable limit specified by Adj gen trq lim sel) when  
the value of the Boolean signal selected by Torque lim 2  
sel is True. Per unit  
Defines the current limit adjust (or maximum value of the  
variable adjust specified by Adj cur lim ref sel) when the  
value of the Boolean signal selected by Torque lim 2 sel  
is False. Per unit  
Current limit 2  
Defines the current limit adjust (or maximum value of the  
variable adjust specified by Adj cur lim ref sel) when the  
value of the Boolean signal selected by Torque lim 2 sel  
is True. Per unit  
Flux ref ratio setpt  
Defines the flux reference adjust value when the variable  
adjust selector Flux ref ratio sel is Unused.  
Function description  
The variable Torque ref pre limit represents the primary torque reference signal from  
the application layer of drive functionality, and is provided by the Speed/Torque  
Regulator. The Speed/Torque Regulator serves as an important focal point for speed  
and torque regulation systems. This signal is limited according to application torque  
limits. Next it is converted to a torque-producing current command by a torque  
compensation function, and then it is further limited according to a combination of  
application and motor control current limiting functions.  
Application limits are defined for motoring torque, generating torque, and current  
magnitude. For each type of limit a pair of fixed limit values can be configured, the  
dynamic selection of which is driven by a common user-specified Boolean signal.  
Each type of limit alternatively can be driven as a variable limit by a user-specified  
signal; this variable limit value is bounded between zero and the active fixed limit  
value. Application limits are defined as per-unit values. One per-unit torque is  
defined as Motor rated power at Motor rated rpm; one per-unit current is defined as  
Motor rated current  
3-102 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The active generating torque limit is subject to further limiting by the DC Bus  
Regeneration Control. The Regeneration Control can be configured to limit  
regenerative capability in response to DC Bus Voltage exceeding programmed  
limits. Both motoring & generating torque limits are dynamically applied as positive  
& negative torque limits according to the detected quadrant of operation.  
The magnitude current limit is affected as a limit to the torque-producing current  
component based upon a dynamic calculation that considers the active value of the  
flux-producing current component. Pullout protection limits and power-dip clamp  
controls may dynamically further decrease the current limit prior to application to the  
torque-producing current command.  
Appropriate excitation of the induction motor is provided by the motor control  
algorithm according to configured motor nameplate data and prevailing power  
supply conditions. However, in some advanced applications it may be appropriate for  
the application control layer to define further modification to the flux reference. This  
is accomplished using the Flux ref ratio signal, which may be adjusted statically by  
the fixed parameter Flux ref ratio setpt or a dynamic signal selected by the parameter  
Flux ref ratio sel. In either case the signal is defined as a per-unit offset to the  
nominal flux reference defined by the motor control; one per-unit flux is defined as  
Motor rated voltage at Motor rated freq.  
Related diagrams  
•
Motor Control Interface (Core)  
Speed Control Fault Check  
The Speed Control Fault Check checks for the following fault and alarm conditions:  
•
•
•
•
Over speed  
Failure to rotate  
Loss of spd control  
Reverse rotation  
Over speed configuration and operation  
The following parameter configures the Over speed fault.  
Parameter  
Description  
Over speed flt level  
Overspeed fault level. RPM  
The Over speed fault is declared when the following condition is met.  
ABS(Speed reg fbk) > Over speed flt level  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Failure to rotate configuration and operation  
The following parameters configure the Failure to rotate fault.  
Parameter  
Description  
Rotate fail flt lvl  
The level which the speed regulator error must exceed for  
the fault condition to exist. RPM  
Rotate fail spd lim  
Rotate fail delay  
The level which the speed regulator feedback must remain  
below for the fault condition to exist. RPM  
The time for which the fault condition must persist before  
the fault is declared. Seconds  
The Failure to rotate fault is declared when the following conditions persist for  
Rotate fail delay.  
ABS(Speed reg error) >= Rotate fail flt lvl  
ABS(Speed reg fbk) <= Rotate fail spd lim  
Loss of spd control configuration and operation  
The following parameters configure the Loss of spd control alarm.  
Parameter  
Description  
Spd ctl loss flt lvl  
The level which the speed regulator error must exceed for  
the alarm condition to exist. RPM  
Spd ctl loss delay  
The time for which the alarm condition must persist before  
the alarm is declared. Seconds  
The Loss of spd control alarm is declared when the following condition persists for  
Spd ctl loss delay.  
ABS(Speed reg error) >= Spd ctl loss flt lvl  
In a standard drive configuration the Loss of spd control alarm is cleared when the  
following condition is met.  
ABS(Speed reg error) < 90% x Spd ctl loss flt lvl  
Reverse rotation configuration and operation  
The following parameter configures the Reverse rotation fault.  
Parameter  
Description  
Rev rotation fault  
Enables the Reverse rotation fault.  
The Reverse rotation fault is declared when the detected direction of Speed reg fbk is  
opposite to the commanded direction of rotation. The magnitude of Speed reg fbk  
must be greater than Zero speed level for the fault to occur.  
3-104 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Feedback Calculation  
The Speed Feedback Calculation function provides a set of speed feedback signals  
for control and display purposes.  
Function inputs  
There are three main sources of speed feedback information: tachometer feedback,  
estimated speed, and simulated speed. The following table specifies the input  
variables of the Speed Feedback Calculation function.  
Variable  
Description  
Tach speed, instr.  
Simulated speed  
Measured tachometer speed. Radians/second  
Simulated speed from motor simulation or from external  
source. Radians/second  
Output freq, unfil  
Estimated electrical frequency. Hertz  
Function control outputs  
The following table specifies the control output variables of the Speed Feedback  
Calculation function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reg fbk  
Speed feedback for the speed regulator. Appropriate selection  
of input speed signal filtered for control purposes. RPM  
Function display outputs  
The following table specifies the display output variables of the Speed Feedback  
Calculation function.  
Variable  
Description  
Motor speed  
Display version of either tachometer speed or simulated  
speed. RPM  
Speed feedback  
Calculated speed  
Output frequency  
Display version of speed regulator feedback. RPM  
Display version of estimated speed feedback. RPM  
Display version of the estimated electrical frequency. Hertz  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Speed Feedback  
Calculation function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Motor tach PPR  
Quantize Sim Spd  
Tachometer pulses per revolution.  
Enables tachometer quantization in the simulated speed  
feedback.  
Speed feedback fil  
Tach speed filter  
Spd fbk display fil  
Calculated spd fil  
Control filter frequency for Speed reg fbk. Radians/second  
Display filter frequency for Motor speed. Radians/second  
Display filter frequency for Speed feedback. Radians/second  
Display filter frequency for Calculated speed.  
Radians/second  
Output freq fil  
Display filter frequency for Output frequency.  
Radians/second  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Feedback (Spd_Fbk)  
Speed/Torque Overview  
The Speed/Torque Overview function coordinates the speed and torque control  
functions. See the Related functions section below for information on the different  
functions included in the Speed/Torque Overview function.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies the input parameters that do not appear within any of  
the component functions of the Speed/Torque Overview function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Speed loop sum sel  
Selects speed reference signal to add to output of the  
Speed Reference Generation function. RPM  
The following table specifies the input variables that do not appear within any of the  
component functions of the Speed/Torque Overview function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Speed ref, ramped  
Output of the Speed Reference Generation function. RPM  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters that do not appear within  
any of the component functions of the Speed/Torque Overview function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Max forward speed  
Max forward speed  
Maximum forward reference to the speed regulator. RPM  
Maximum reverse reference to the speed regulator. RPM  
3-106 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related functions  
The speed and torque control functions included in the Speed/Torque Overview  
function are listed below.  
•
•
•
•
Speed Feedback Calculation  
Droop  
Speed/Torque Regulator  
Motor Control Interface  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed / Torque Overview (Ovr_SpTq)  
Speed/Torque Regulator  
The Speed/Torque Regulator function.  
Function inputs  
The following table specifies fixed input variables of the Speed/Torque Regulator  
function (input variables selected by parameters are specified in Function  
configuration).  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reg reference  
Speed regulator reference, the net result of all reference  
selections and conditioning. RPM  
Speed reg fbk  
Speed regulator feedback, filtered and selected  
between motor tachometer speed feedback and  
estimated speed feedback. RPM  
Sreg enable request  
Torque ctl pos frz  
Torque ctl neg frz  
Boolean signal from the core drive sequencer which  
requests enabling of the Speed/Torque Regulator  
function.  
Boolean signal from the motor control interface  
indicating that a postive inner limit is encountered; used  
for speed regulator anti-windup control.  
Boolean signal from the motor control interface  
indicating that a negative inner limit is encountered;  
used for speed regulator anti-windup control.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function outputs  
The following table specifies the continuous signal variables of the Speed/Torque  
Regulator function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reg output  
Core regulator output of the Speed/Torque Regulator  
function, the scaled and gated sum of proportional  
(variable Speed reg prop term) and integral (variable  
Speed reg int term) regulator components. Newton-  
meters or Pound-feet  
Torque ref pre limit  
Final output of the Speed/Torque Regulator function  
provided to the motor control interface, the sum of the  
primary output of the speed regulator (variable Speed  
reg output), torque refererence (gated signal selected by  
parameter Torque ref select) and torque feedforward  
(non-gated signal selected by parameter Torque feed  
fwd sel). Newton-meters or Pound-feet  
Speed reg error  
Primary regulator error signal equal to the difference  
between Speed reg reference and Speed reg fbk. RPM  
Spd reg integral ref  
Conditioned error signal which defines the reference to  
the regulator integrator structure; differs from Speed reg  
error only in Torque, spd override mode (see below).  
RPM  
Speed reg int term  
Speed reg prop term  
Inertia  
Regulator integral component.  
Regulator proportional component.  
Active inertia compensation signal in use by the  
regulator, derived from either the Fixed inertia  
parameter or from the variable specified by parameter  
Variable inertia sel. Kilogram-meters² or Pound-feet²  
Speed reg net gain  
Active net gain compensation in use by the regulator,  
the scaled product of Inertia and the parameter Spd reg  
net gain.  
The following table specifies the logical signal variables of the Speed/Torque  
Regulator function.  
Variable  
Description  
Speed reg mode  
Primary state variable which reflects the active  
regulation state of the drive.  
Enable spd reg out  
Boolean signal from the primary regulator control logic  
which enables active signals to the variable Speed reg  
output.  
Torque mode sel  
Boolean signal from the primary regulator control logic  
which gates the variable Torque ref input.  
Speed reg antiwindup  
Boolean signal indicating that the speed regulator  
integrator value is frozen as an anti-windup response.  
3-108 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function configuration  
The following table specifies parameters that select input variables of the  
Speed/Torque Regulator function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Torque mode sel  
Selects the Boolean variable used to enable Torque ref input  
in Speed and Torque modes, and to control entry & exit of  
Ovrd/Spd forced mode within Torque, spd override modes.  
Torque ref select  
Selects the signal used as the Torque ref input signal. Note  
that this parameter may specify normal signal sources  
(acquired at the application loop rate) or one analog high-  
bandwidth signal source (acquired at the motor control loop  
rate).  
Torque feed fwd  
sel  
Selects the signal used as a torque feedforward signal,  
summed to the Torque ref pre limit in all states.  
Spd reg init val  
sel  
Selects the signal used to define preconditioning of internal  
state variables while in the Off/Precond state. The value of  
the signal determines the target value of Speed reg output to  
appear when the Speed/Torque Regulator function is enabled.  
Variable inertia  
sel  
Selects the signal used to dynamically define the Inertia  
compensation variable instead of being defined by the  
constant Fixed inertia parameter.  
The following table specifies the configuration parameters of the Speed/Torque  
Regulator function.  
Parameter  
Description  
Regulator type  
Primary selector which configures the basic regulation mode  
of the drive (see below).  
Torque reg stop  
mode  
Boolean which enables the option to the Torque with Spillover  
Speed mode in which speed regulation mode is dynamically  
forced (Ovrd/Spd forced) during a stop sequence.  
Spd reg prop  
cmd gn  
Proportional gain affecting only the command path of the  
speed regulator compensation network.  
Spd reg prop fbk  
gn  
Proportional gain affecting only the feedback path of the  
speed regulator compensation network.  
Spd reg prop  
filter  
Bandwidth of the first-order lowpass filter applied to the net  
proportional path of the Speed regulator.  
Integral gain of the speed regulator compensation network.  
Spd reg integral  
gn  
Spd reg net gain  
Common gain (inner loop gain) of the speed regulator  
compensation network.  
Fixed inertia  
Fixed inertia compensation term of the speed regulator  
compensation network. Kilogram-meters² or Pound-feet²  
Spd reg pos err  
lim  
Limit which defines the positive speed error tolerance for  
activation of spillover speed mode (transition from Ovrd/Trq  
act to Ovrd/Spd Low).  
Spd reg neg err  
lim  
Limit which defines the negative speed error tolerance for  
activation of spillover speed mode (transition from Ovrd/Trq  
act to Ovrd/Spd High).  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function description  
The Speed/Torque Regulator function is an important focal point for both Speed and  
Torque regulation systems within the drive. The parameter Regulator type configures  
the basic regulation mode of the drive, and the variable Speed reg mode reflects the  
active regulation state of the drive. Speed reference and feedback signals converge at  
the Speed Regulator along with Torque reference and feedforward signals. The  
output of the Speed/Torque Regulator function is the primary torque reference  
presented to the motor control interface.  
The primary modes of operation that may be selected are:  
Speed regulator  
The variable Speed reg fbk is regulated to follow the  
variable Speed reg reference according to the  
characteristics specified by configuration parameters.  
Torque regulator  
Torque, spd override  
The variable specified by the parameter Torque ref  
select is gated to the output of the Speed/Torque  
Regulator function.  
Similar to Torque mode except that speed regulation will  
override the torque reference in the event that the  
Speed reg error signal exceeds the limits specified by  
Spd reg pos err lim & Spd reg neg err lim.  
In general the active state is a function of configuration parameters, commands from  
the drive sequencer and the application, and key signals within the regulator.  
The torque feedforward signal specified by the parameter Torque feed fwd sel is  
always added to Speed reg output to form Torque ref pre limit. The Torque ref input  
signal specified by the parameter Torque ref select is added conditionally, based  
upon the active Speed reg mode and the value of the Boolean signal specified by the  
parameter Torque mode sel.  
The active states of the Speed/Torque Regulator function are:  
Off/Precond  
Regulator is disabled by the sequencer:  
Speed reg output is zeroed, and Torque ref input is  
disabled. Internal states are continuously  
preconditioned based upon the signal specified by  
parameter Spd reg init val sel.  
Torque regulator  
Active Torque mode:  
Torque ref input is conditionally enabled to the output  
Torque ref pre limit, based upon the value of the  
Boolean signal specified by the parameter Torque mode  
sel. The speed regulator core is disabled, therefore  
Speed reg output is zero.  
Speed regulator  
Ovrd/Trq act  
Active Speed mode:  
Speed reg output responds "normally" to the core speed  
regulator. Based upon the value of the Boolean signal  
specified by the parameter Torque mode sel, the Torque  
ref input signal is conditionally added into the output  
Torque ref pre limit.  
Active Torque, spd override mode:  
Torque mode allowed since Speed reg error is within  
limits and the value of the signal specified by the  
parameter Torque mode sel is True; spillover speed  
action is "armed".  
3-110 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ovrd/Spd forced  
Forced Torque, spd override mode:  
Speed regulation mode dynamically forced because  
either the value of the signal specified by Torque mode  
sel is False, or the Torque reg stop mode is  
commanded by the sequencer.  
Ovrd/Spd Low  
Ovrd/Spd High  
Lcl mode/Spd reg  
Active Torque, spd override mode:  
Speed regulation mode dynamically overrides torque  
mode due to Speed reg error having exceeded limit  
specified by Spd reg pos err lim.  
Active Torque, spd override mode:  
Speed regulation mode dynamically overrides torque  
mode due to Speed reg error having exceeded limit  
specified by Spd reg neg err lim.  
Active Local speed mode:  
Drive is operating in Speed regulation mode in response  
to DDI commands. This mode is forced by local  
operation regardless of the configuration specified by  
the parameter Regulator type. The Torque ref input  
signal is disabled.  
The speed regulator compensation network is fairly classical. It has parameters to  
adjust the proportional gain of command, proportional gain of feedback, and integral  
gain of speed error. Proportional and integral contributions are summed, and a final  
gain stage applies inertia compensation cascaded with a net gain term. A unity-gain  
lowpass filter is provided to allow softening of the proportional paths.  
Anti-windup is provided to the integrator in the form of a pair of Booleans, Torque  
ctl pos frz and Torque ctl neg frz, provided from the motor control interface.  
Assertion of an anti-windup Boolean inhibits integrator changes in the associated  
positive or negative direction; the Boolean Speed reg antiwindup provides indication  
of the active status of this dynamic integrator limit.  
Inertia compensation is defined by the parameter Fixed inertia unless the parameter  
Variable inertia sel is used. Actual platform signal units for specified Inertia are (kg-  
m^2), although the product human interfaces (Tool & DDI) allow treatment in (lb-  
ft^2) if preferred. Units represent the transformation between torque and acceleration  
expressed in terms of a mass and a radius of gyration. Data expressed as Wk^2 can  
be entered directly; data expressed in GD^2 should be divided by four prior to entry  
(to reflect the ratio between radius-squared and diameter-squared).  
Related diagrams  
•
Speed Regulator (SReg)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Data Parameters  
Exec time/Chop freq  
The parameter Exec time/Chop freq defines the Task 1 execution period and the  
chopping frequency for the Innovation Series drive product.  
Task 1 is the fastest scheduled software process executed within the control.  
Primary bridge interface and high-bandwidth aspects of the motor control algorithm  
operate in Task 1. Slower tasks execute at integer multiples of the Task 1 interval.  
The Task 1 execution period determines the maximum inner regulator bandwidth and  
maximum fundamental operating frequency.  
The chopping frequency defines the rate at which the power devices may switched  
through a full modulation cycle (for example, from the on state, to the off state, and  
back to the on state again). The chopping frequency affects the spectral content of  
the output waveform, and defines a bridge power de-rating factor which must be  
considered in the application of the product.  
Chopping frequencies are synchronized to the Task 1 interval such that exactly one  
transition or two transitions can be configured to occur per Task 1 period.  
Values  
The following table describes the available selections for Exec time/Chop freq:  
Parameter  
Selection  
Exec  
Time  
(usec)  
333.3  
500.0  
Chop  
Freq  
(KHz)  
1.5  
Fund  
Freq  
(Hz)  
200  
Power  
Derate  
(%)  
Comments  
333 usec, 1.5 KHz  
500 usec, 1.0 KHz  
100  
Default  
1.0  
133  
100  
Evaluation  
only  
Motor ctrl alg sel  
Parameter Motor ctrl alg sel specifies the presence or absence of a tachometer in the  
system and the use of the tachometer in the motor control.  
The drive can run the motor using a tachometer-based control scheme, a tachless  
control scheme, or a mixture of the two. Tachometer-based control uses speed  
feedback from the tachometer to regulate the speed and torque of the motor. Tachless  
control provides motor speed and torque regulation without a tachometer. The hybrid  
control scheme uses tachometer feedback for speed regulation but not for motor  
torque regulation. Greater speed and torque accuracy can be attained when a pulse  
tachometer is used with the tachometer-based control.  
The following values are available for Motor ctrl alg sel:  
•
•
•
Tachless control: Tachless control of motor speed and torque.  
Tach control and sfb: Tachometer-based control of motor speed and torque.  
Tachles ctl/Tach sfb: Tachometer-based control of motor speed, tachless control  
of motor torque.  
3-112 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flux decay waiting: When a V/Hz or Torque regulated  
Tachless drive is stopped and the motor is de-energized there  
is a requirement to wait for the motor flux to decay before  
restarting (1 to 20 seconds, depending on motor rotor circuit  
time constant). If a restart is attempted before the flux decays  
to a low enough level (2% of rated), the drive will be blocked  
from a restart and a Run cmd w high flux alarm will occur.  
Restarting drive at zero speed: When a V/Hz or Torque  
regulated Tachless drive is restarted at zero speed any motion  
produced externally during its pre-flux sequence (motor  
electrical time constant dependent, typical 0.5 to 2 sec.) will  
lead to malfunction. If the motor was stationary when  
restarted a sufficient delay coordinating other drives or  
machinery that prevents start of any motion must be  
guaranteed until after the pre-flux sequence is complete and  
the drive is ready to produce torque.  
Operation at zero speed: If there is a need for the Tachless  
drive (Torque regulated or V/Hz with Auto-boost) to sit at  
zero speed either the Enb adaptv full flx (see Sequencer  
Commands)must be used or the drive must be stopped and  
turned off then restarted when it is desired to move.  
Prolonged zero speed operation without the aforementioned  
precaution will cause drive malfunction.  
Operation with Regenerative load: If there is a need for  
regenerative load operation (Torque regulated or V/Hz with  
Auto-Boost) near zero speed, the minimum operating speed  
must be higher than the maximum anticipated slip rpm of the  
motor. This is required to avoid zero frequency operation  
(failure mode for Vector Tachless drive).  
Functional use  
•
•
Speed Feedback Calculation  
Tach Loss Detection  
Motor efficiency  
Parameter Motor efficiency specifies the motor efficiency, the mechanical output  
power that can be obtained at nameplate conditions, expressed as a percentage of the  
electrical power input. The efficiency is normally specified on the motor nameplate.  
Typical motor efficiencies are near 93%. High-efficiency motors may have  
efficiencies in excess of 95%.  
Units  
•
•
Presentation units: Percent  
Internal control units: Per unit  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions • 3-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor service factor  
Parameter Motor service factor specifies the ratio of the actual maximum power of  
the motor to its nameplate rated power.  
Units  
Motor service factor is a unitless number.  
Motor winding cfg  
Parameter Motor winding cfg specifies the winding configuration of the motor.  
The following values are available for Motor winding cfg:  
•
•
Wye E-LN=Sqrt3*E-PH: Wye configuration.  
Delta E-LN = E-PH: Delta configuration.  
The motor data sheet often lists the motor line voltage and phase voltage in place of  
the winding configuration. If the motor data sheet specifies E-LN for the line voltage  
and E-PH for the phase voltage, then the winding configuration can be determined  
using the following relationships:  
Wye configuration: E-LN = 3 x E-PH  
Delta configuration: E-LN = E-PH  
Preflux Forcing  
Parameter Preflux Forcing specifies the amount of peak current use to pre-flux the  
motor. The dimension is in per unit of motor nameplate amps. It is recommended to  
use 1.0 per unit field-forcing; however, in cases where motor rating is higher than  
inverter rating, the field-forcing Amps may have to be reduced to avoid inverter  
thermal overload during pre-fluxing. In general, using higher field-forcing Amps can  
reduce pre-flux duration.  
3-114 • Chapter 3 Paramters/Functions  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Wizards  
Introduction  
The drive’s operator interface software includes wizards, which are automated  
Windows-based “forms” for drive configuration and tuneup. The wizards lead the  
user through critical setup parameters and calculate internal settings.  
The drive Commissioning wizard must be run on every new configuration. After the  
initial configuration, use of the drive Commissioning wizard is optional, but still  
recommended. Other wizards are available to automatically tune drive regulators and  
to speed up specific startup tasks.  
This chapter contains descriptions of the wizards, organized as follows:  
Section  
Page  
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 4-1  
Cell Test Wizard................................................................................................. 4-4  
Cell Test Options ......................................................................................... 4-4  
Running the Fiber-Optic Test........................................................................ 4-5  
Running the Bridge Cell Test........................................................................ 4-8  
DAC Setup ........................................................................................................4-10  
Drive Commissioning ........................................................................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: Overview.................................................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: Intelligent Part Number............................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: Drive Units..............................................................4-11  
Drive Commissioning: AC Source Selection................................................4-12  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Nameplate Data.............................................4-12  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Crossover Voltage.........................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Protection Class.............................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Poles.............................................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet.....................................................4-13  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet - Equivalent Circuit Data..............4-14  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet - Flux Curve.................................4-15  
Drive Commissioning: Motor and Process Speed Referencing......................4-15  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Support.................................................4-16  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Pulses Per Revolution ...........................4-16  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Loss Protection.....................................4-16  
Drive Commissioning: Stopping Configuration............................................4-17  
Drive Commissioning: Flying Restart ..........................................................4-17  
Drive Commissioning: X-Stop Configuration ..............................................4-18  
Drive Commissioning: X-Stop Ramp Time..................................................4-18  
Drive Commissioning: Run Ready Permissive String...................................4-19  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Starting and Stopping the Drive................................4-19  
Drive Commissioning: Manual Reference....................................................4-19  
Drive Commissioning: Maximum Speed References....................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Jog Speed Setpoints.................................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Bypass...........................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Mode.............................................4-20  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Speed Independent Rates...............4-21  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Speed Independent Rate Set  
Selection .....................................................................................................4-21  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Acceleration Rates ....4-22  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Acceleration Speeds..4-22  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Deceleration Rates ....4-22  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Programmed Deceleration Speeds..4-23  
Drive Commissioning: DDI Increment and Decrement Rates (Local Mode)..4-23  
Drive Commissioning: Speed/Torque Regulator Configuration ....................4-23  
Drive Commissioning: Speed/Torque Regulator Modes ...............................4-23  
Drive Commissioning: Torque Regulator Reference.....................................4-24  
and Output ..................................................................................................4-24  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override Reference and Output ..4-24  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override Speed Error .................4-24  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override Stopping Behavior.......4-25  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limits.......................................4-25  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limits Uniform.........................4-25  
Drive Commissioning: Failed Calculation....................................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limit Selection .........................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Normal Torque and Current Limits ..........................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Alternate Torque and Current Limits........................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Motoring Torque Limits...........................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Generating Torque Limits........................................4-26  
Drive Commissioning: Current Limits .........................................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Power Dip Ride-Through.........................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Parameter Calculation..............................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Simulator Mode.......................................................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Hardware Fault Strings in Simulator Mode...............4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Simulator Mechanical Configuration........................4-27  
Drive Commissioning: Exit Reminder .........................................................4-28  
Drive Commissioning: Conclusion ..............................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup.........................................................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Overview.................................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Motor Transfer Data.................................................4-28  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Motor Capture Data .................................................4-29  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Operation.................................................................4-29  
Motor Control Tuneup .......................................................................................4-31  
Motor Control Tuneup: Equivalent Circuit...................................................4-31  
Motor Control Tuneup: Measurements.........................................................4-32  
Motor Control Tuneup: Operation................................................................4-32  
Panel Meter Setup..............................................................................................4-32  
Per Unit Setup....................................................................................................4-32  
Line Protection Setup.........................................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Introduction.......................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Default Settings .................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Overvoltage.......................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Undervoltage .....................................................................4-33  
Line Protection: Overfrequency...................................................................4-34  
Line Protection: Underfrequency.................................................................4-34  
Line Protection: Conclusion ........................................................................4-34  
4-2 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pulse Test ..........................................................................................................4-34  
Pulse Test: Introduction...............................................................................4-34  
Pulse Test: Analog Output Configuration.....................................................4-35  
Pulse Test: Bridge State Configuration ........................................................4-35  
Pulse Test: Timer Configuration ..................................................................4-37  
Pulse Test: Operation ..................................................................................4-37  
Remaining Parameter Setup................................................................................4-37  
Simulator Setup .................................................................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Introduction......................................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Simulator Mode................................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Hardware Fault.................................................................4-38  
String Override............................................................................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Simulator Mechanical Configuration.................................4-38  
Simulator Setup: Conclusion .......................................................................4-38  
Speed Regulator Tuneup ....................................................................................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Model..................................................................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: System Inertia......................................................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Inertia Measurement Command ...........................4-39  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Speed Regulator Mode.........................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Manual Regulator Tuneup....................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 1st Order Response..............................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 2nd Order Response.............................................4-40  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 2nd Order Response with Stiffness Filter..............4-41  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Calculate Speed Regulator Gains Command.........4-41  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cell Test Wizard  
Cell Test Options  
The Cell Test wizard executes either the Fiber-Optic Test or the Bridge Cell Test  
depending on the value of the Type of Cell Test parameter. Selecting one of the Cell  
Tests and proceeding to the next Wizard page sets the Type of Cell Test parameter to  
the appropriate value.  
Fiber-Optic Test  
The Fiber-Optic Test verifies that the gate drive fiber-optics between the fiber-optic  
interface board (IS200FOSA) and the IGBT gate driver boards (IS200IGDM) are  
properly connected. The test does not provide any automated diagnostic information.  
Verification of the fiber-optic connections is done by visual inspection of the LED  
lighting sequence on the IGDM gate driver boards and is the responsibility of the  
user. The correct lighting sequence is described in the Fiber-Optic Test help section.  
Read all of the Fiber-Optic Test instructions in the Fiber-  
Optic Test help section before running the test. The user must  
be familiar with the correct LED lighting sequence in order to  
determine if the fiber-optics are connected properly.  
Bridge Cell Test  
The Bridge Cell Test performs the following tests:  
•
•
•
•
Short Circuit Detection Test verifies that there are no undesired conductive  
paths within the inverter power bridge and the load connected to it.  
Open Circuit Detection Test verifies that all of the expected conductive paths in  
the inverter bridge are available and that the shunt feedbacks are valid.  
Voltage Feedback Evaluation verifies that all the voltage feedbacks are being  
measured correctly.  
Dynamic Brake Cell Test performs a short circuit detection test, open circuit  
detection test, and voltage feedback evaluation for the dynamic brake assembly.  
Note The Dynamic Brake Cell Test is only performed if the drive includes the  
dynamic brake option.  
4-4 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Running the Fiber-Optic Test  
Running the Test  
Read all of the Fiber-Optic Test instructions in this section  
before running the test. The user must be familiar with the  
correct LED lighting sequence in order to determine if the  
fiber-optics are connected properly.  
Once you are familiar with the test instructions, run the test as follows.  
1. De-energize the drive following the procedures outlined in the installation and  
startup manual GEH-6381.  
(Confirm that the switchgear, control breaker CB1 and charger switch LSW1 are  
open and locked out, tagged out and checked for zero voltage. That the DC bus  
is fully discharged and checked for zero voltage. That safety grounds have been  
applied using proper grounding procedures.)  
2. With safety grounds applied and the converter cabinet doors open, close control  
breaker CB1 and run the Cell Test Wizard from the toolbox. Choose the Fiber-  
Optic Test.  
3. From the Fiber-Optic Test dialog box press Execute.  
4. From the drive cabinet, observe the LED lighting sequence. The LEDs are  
located on the IGBT gate driver boards (IGDM). If the observed LED lighting  
sequence matches the correct LED lighting sequence (See Figure 1), then the  
test passed.  
Source  
Cabinet  
Load  
Cabinet  
AS3  
AS2  
BS3  
BS2  
CS3  
CS2  
DBS1  
AS4  
AS1 BS4  
BS1 CS4  
CS1  
DBS2  
Phase Leg  
Assembly  
A
Phase Leg  
Assembly  
B
Phase Leg  
Assembly  
C
Dynamic  
Brake  
Figure 1. Physical Diagram of Correct LED Lighting Sequence  
Figure 1 shows the dynamic brake and phase assemblies inside the drive cabinets.  
The dynamic brake assembly on the left is located in the source cabinet. The phase  
leg assemblies are located in the load cabinet.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Following is the correct LED lighting sequence for a drive with the dynamic brake  
option.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
DBS1  
DBS2  
AS4  
AS3  
AS2  
AS1  
BS4  
8.  
BS3  
BS2  
BS1  
CS4  
CS3  
CS2  
CS1  
9.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
If the drive you are testing does not have the dynamic brake option, then the LED  
sequence will begin with device AS4 instead of DBS2. The sequence from AS4 to  
CS1 will remain the same.  
Once the Fiber-Optic Test wizard has been executed, the drive waits five seconds  
before beginning the LED sequence. The sequence will be repeated three times,  
unless the user or a fault aborts it.  
Troubleshooting  
The test does not provide any automated diagnostic information. Verification of the  
fiber-optic connections is done by visual inspection of the LED lighting sequence on  
the IGDM gate driver boards and is the responsibility of the user.  
The following messages display if the Fiber-Optic Test runs to completion, but do  
not necessarily indicate correct fiber-optic connections:  
Fiber-Optic Test was invoked  
Open drive door and observe LED lighting sequence.  
Fiber-Optic Test completed.  
If correct LED lighting sequence was not observed, fix  
fiber-optic connections and run Fiber-Optic Test again.  
The following table describes possible incorrect LED lighting sequences.  
Problem  
Description  
LEDs light in wrong order  
There are two or more incorrect fiber-optic  
connections on the FOSA board or on the IGDM  
boards.  
LEDs are not lighting  
There may be a bad fiber-optic connection on either  
the FOSA or IGDM boards, or a defective FOSA or  
IGDM board. Check the fiber-optic connections first.  
4-6 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following are descriptions of error messages.  
Error Message  
Description/Procedure  
Cell Test invoked in  
simulator mode.  
The simulator mode variable Simulate mode act is  
TRUE. The Fiber-Optic Test cannot be run in simulator  
mode. Change the simulator mode by setting request  
parameter Simulate mode to FALSE and run the Fiber-  
Optic Test again.  
Cell Test did not run to  
completion. Cell Test  
request was removed.  
The Cell Test command was removed during Cell Test.  
The user may have aborted the test.  
Cell Test did not run to  
completion. Internal Cell  
Test fault detected.  
A drive trip fault occurred during the Fiber-Optic Test.  
Correct and clear any existing trip faults and run the  
Fiber-Optic Test again.  
Fiber-Optic Test  
interrupted.  
The Fiber-Optic Test could not be run due to one of the  
following reasons:  
Voltage was detected on the DC bus.  
The static charger was not in an idle state.  
A drive trip fault was detected.  
Correct and clear any existing drive trip faults. Press the  
“SWITCHGEAR OPEN” button on the drive cabinet door.  
Wait for the dc bus voltage to completely discharge. Run  
the Fiber-Optic Test again.  
Fiber-Optic Test did not  
run. Fiber-Optic Test  
cannot be run with  
Press the “SWITCHGEAR OPEN” button on the drive.  
Wait for the DC bus voltage to completely discharge.  
Run the Fiber-Optic Test again.  
switchgear closed.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Running the Bridge Cell Test  
Running the Test  
Run the test as follows:  
1. Confirm that the drive switchgear is open and the drive is ready to be charged.  
To prepare the drive for charging, follow the re-energizing procedures outlined  
in the installation and startup manual GEH-6381. (Safety grounds removed,  
converter doors closed, locks and tags cleared, charger switch LSW1 and control  
breaker CB1 closed and control cabinet door closed).  
2. From the toolbox, run the Cell Test wizard and choose the Bridge Cell Test.  
3. From the Bridge Cell Test dialog box press Execute. Follow the instructions in  
the wizard dialog boxes.  
Troubleshooting  
The following messages display if the Bridge Cell Test runs to completion and  
passes:  
Cell Test was invoked  
Press ‘INITIATE CHARGE & CLOSE’ button on drive. Drive  
will be charged, but switchgear will not be closed.  
Short circuit detection test passed.  
Open circuit detection test passed.  
Voltage feedback evaluations passed.  
<<< Completed Successfully >>>  
4-8 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following are descriptions of bridge test failure messages.  
Error Message  
Description/Procedure  
Short circuit detection test  
failed. Check for one or  
more of the following.  
An undesirable conductive path was detected in the  
drive. This message will be followed by messages  
describing the nature of the test failure.  
POSSIBLE SHORTED  
DEVICES:  
All IGBTs and diodes that may be shorted will be  
listed. However, the short circuit detection may have  
been caused by a bad gate connection or IGBTs not  
switching on. This will also be listed in the following  
message. Check for shorted IGBTs and clamp  
diodes first.  
POSSIBLE DEVICES WITH All IGBTs which returned a gate drive fault during  
BAD GATE CONNECTIONS the test will be listed. The fault could have been  
OR ARE NOT SWITCHING  
ON:  
caused by a shorted device as listed in the previous  
message, or one of the following problems:  
Bad connection between the IGDM gate drive board  
and the IGBT listed  
Defective IGDM board on the IGBT listed  
Defective IGBT listed  
Open circuit detection test  
did not run.  
The open circuit detection test does not run if the  
short circuit detection test fails.  
Open circuit detection test  
failed. Check for one or  
more of the following.  
An expected conductive path was not detected or a  
current feedback was incorrect or missing. This  
message will be followed by messages describing  
the nature of the test failure.  
POSSIBLE OPEN  
DEVICES:  
All IGBTs, diodes, and load connections that may be  
opened will be listed. However, the open circuit  
detection may have been caused by a current  
feedback (shunt) error.  
POSSIBLE SHUNT  
ERRORS:  
All possible shunt errors will be listed. If shunt  
connections appear to be correct, check for correct  
current scale and offset variables in the drive.  
Voltage feedback evaluation The voltage feedback evaluation is not performed if  
was not performed.  
the short circuit detection test or the open circuit  
detection test fails.  
Voltage feedback evaluation Correct voltage feedbacks were not measured. This  
failed. Check for one or  
more of the following.  
message will be followed by messages describing  
the nature of the test failure.  
POSSIBLE VOLTAGE  
FEEDBACK ERRORS:  
All voltage feedbacks that did not match expected  
values will be listed.  
Dynamic Brake Cell Test did The Dynamic Brake Cell Test is not performed if the  
not run.  
short circuit detection test, open circuit detection  
test, or the voltage feedback evaluation fails.  
One of the following dynamic brake tests failed:  
Dynamic brake short circuit detection test  
Dynamic brake open circuit detection test  
Dynamic brake voltage feedback evaluation  
Dynamic Brake Cell Test  
failed. Check for one or  
more of the following.  
This message will be followed by messages  
describing the nature of the test failure.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dynamic brake open circuit  
detection test did not run.  
The dynamic brake open circuit detection test is not  
performed if the short circuit detection test fails.  
Dynamic brake voltage  
The dynamic brake voltage feedback evaluation is  
feedback evaluation was not not performed if the short circuit detection test or the  
performed. open circuit detection test fails.  
The following are descriptions of error messages:  
Error Message  
Description/Procedure  
Cell Test invoked in  
simulator mode.  
The simulator mode variable Simulate mode act is  
TRUE. The Bridge Cell Test cannot be run in  
simulator mode. Change the simulator mode by  
setting request parameter Simulate mode to FALSE  
and run the Bridge Cell Test again.  
Cell Test did not run to  
completion. Cell Test  
request was removed.  
The Cell Test command was removed during Cell  
Test. The user may have aborted the test.  
Cell Test did not run to  
completion. Internal Cell  
Test fault detected.  
A drive trip fault occurred during the Bridge Cell  
Test. Correct and clear any existing trip faults and  
run the Bridge Cell Test again.  
Cell Test did not run. Cell  
Test cannot be run with  
switchgear closed.  
Press the "SWITCHGEAR OPEN" button on the  
drive. Wait for the DC bus voltage to completely  
discharge. Run the Bridge Cell Test again.  
Cell Test did not run to  
The Bridge Cell Test cannot be run if the motor is  
completion. Motor was not at not at zero speed. Wait for the motor to stop and run  
zero speed.  
the Bridge Cell Test again.  
Cell Test did not run to  
completion. DC bus could  
not be charged.  
The Bridge Cell Test was unable to charge the DC  
bus. Following are some of the possible problems  
which may exist in the drive:  
Defective static charger  
Shorted DC bus (POS to NEG)  
Incorrect DC voltage feedbacks  
Cell Test did not run to  
completion. DC bus could  
not be balanced.  
The Bridge Cell Test was unable to balance the DC  
bus. Following are some of the possible problems  
which may exist in the drive:  
Shorted DC bus (POS to NEU or NEG to NEU)  
Incorrect DC voltage feedbacks  
Shorted DBS1 or DBS2 IGBTs (if the drive includes  
the dynamic brake option).  
Cell Test did not run to  
completion. Motor current  
did not decay.  
The Bridge Cell Test detected motor current 1  
second after the last pulse was completed.  
DAC Setup  
The DAC Setup wizard directs configuration of the analog outputs (DACs). For more  
information on the DACs, see the Analog Inputs/Outputs and Mapping function help.  
4-10 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning  
Drive Commissioning: Overview  
The Drive Commissioning wizard guides the user through the process of configuring  
the drive for a particular application. It asks a series of questions that allow the user  
to specify important control parameters. It also directs the drive to perform  
calculations that determine the values of other parameters. At the conclusion of the  
wizard, the drive has most of the information that it needs to run successfully.  
The Drive Commissioning wizard may be run more than once, with the following  
note of caution. Some of the parameters that are changed by the rule calculations  
may be modified by the user after the wizard has finished. If any parameter  
modifications have been made, they may be lost when the Drive Commissioning  
wizard runs. Parameter changes should be reviewed each time the wizard runs. In  
addition, a parameter backup prior to running the wizard is recommended.  
Drive Commissioning: Intelligent Part Number  
The Intelligent Part Number (IPN) specifies the Innovation Series product and the  
basic configuration of the product. The IPN is the catalog number for the Innovation  
Series product. It can be found on the inside of the cabinet door.  
Verify that the following parameters correctly match the drive's IPN information:  
•
•
•
IPN frame size  
IPN shunt size  
IPN volt rating  
Related functions  
•
Intelligent Part Number (IPN)  
Drive Commissioning: Drive Units  
Three different unit systems are available for displaying parameters and variables:  
•
•
•
Imperial (English)  
Metric (SI)  
Native (Platform)  
The Native (Platform) unit system displays parameters and variables in the same  
units that the internal control uses.  
Select one of the three unit systems.  
Related functions  
•
Language and Units Presentation  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: AC Source Selection  
The frequency selection is used to calibrate the input line monitor. Use the frequency  
of the AC line input to this Innovation Series Drive. The choices are usually either  
50 or 60 Hertz.  
Dynamic braking (DB) is an option in some drives. If your drive has been provided  
with this equipment configure it for operation. DB absorbs energy from the load in  
applications where fast deceleration is required.  
Related elementaries  
•
Innovation Series MV Type G drive data sheet (1AC)  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Nameplate Data  
The motor nameplate contains the basic information for the motor. The drive is  
capable of operating the motor efficiently based on the nameplate data.  
Two consecutive Drive Commissioning wizard pages ask for motor nameplate data.  
Enter values for the following parameters based on the nameplate information:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Motor rated voltage  
Motor rated freq  
Motor rated current  
Motor rated rpm  
Motor rated power  
Motor efficiency  
Motor service factor  
Related functions  
•
•
•
Primary Motor & Application Data  
Motor efficiency  
Motor service factor  
4-12 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Crossover Voltage  
Crossover Voltage specifies the voltage above which field weakening occurs. Field  
weakening allows the drive to achieve greater motor speeds without increasing  
voltage by decreasing the volts per hertz ratio.  
Set Crossover Voltage to the appropriate voltage level. If Crossover Voltage is set to  
<No Value>, the drive begins field weakening at the voltage specified by Motor  
rated voltage, which was defined previously.  
Related functions  
•
Primary Motor & Application Data  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Protection Class  
The motor protection class indicates the motor's capacity to run under overload  
conditions. The following values are available for the motor protection class:  
•
•
•
Class10:150%for30sec: IEC motors. Motor can withstand 150% overload for 30  
seconds.  
Class20:150%for60sec: US standard motors. Motor can withstand 150%  
overload for 60 seconds.  
Class30:150%for90sec: Specially designed motors. Motor can withstand 150%  
overload for 90 seconds.  
The drive uses the protection class information to determine motor thermal  
characteristics which are used in protective functions.  
Select the motor protection class that corresponds to the motor connected to the  
drive.  
Related functions  
•
Timed Overcurrent Detection  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Poles  
Parameter Motor poles specifies the number of magnetic poles in the motor. If the  
correct value is known, enter it. Otherwise leave blank or set to <No Value>, in  
which case the drive will calculate the number from motor nameplate data. It is  
recommended that the correct value be obtained and entered if parameter Motor  
rated rpm is less than 900.  
Related functions  
•
Primary Motor & Application Data  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet  
The motor data sheet provides additional motor parameters beyond what is available  
on the motor nameplate. This includes equivalent circuit data, winding resistances  
and winding inductances. Flux curve data is also often included. If the motor data  
sheet is not available for the applied motor, the control will determine the motor  
parameters during the tune-up phase.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Nameplate  
and Equivalent  
Circuit Data  
Flux Curve  
Data  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet -  
Equivalent Circuit Data  
The motor data sheet is available from the motor supplier. It is a useful source of  
motor operating parameters that may not be listed on the motor nameplate. The  
motor data sheet is also a good way to verify motor nameplate data.  
The Motor Data Sheet should contain hot resistance values for Stator(R1), Rotor  
(R2), and the 'Hot' temperature at which they were measured.  
The Motor Data Sheet may contain cold resistance values for Stator (R1) and Rotor  
(R2).  
The Motor Data Sheet should contain values for Stator(X1) and Rotor(X2) Leakage  
Reactance and Magnetizing (Xm) and Starting Reactance (Xst).  
Leave unknown entries blank (not zero). Entries can be returned to blank (<No  
Value>) by highlighting the entered value and pressing delete.  
Below is an example of a motor data sheet:  
Motor Nameplate  
and Equivalent  
Circuit Data  
Flux Curve  
Data  
On this motor data sheet, the synchronous speed of the motor is listed as RPM. The  
rated full load speed of the motor is listed as FLS and is the speed that should be  
entered for Motor rated rpm.  
Motor winding cfg: On some motor data sheets, the winding will simply be listed as  
wye or delta. In the example above, the line-neutral voltage (E-LN) is the same as  
the line-line voltage (E-PH). Hence the motor has a delta winding configuration. For  
a wye winding configuration the line-line voltage will be less than the line-neutral  
voltage by E-PH = E-LN ÷ √3.  
4-14 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor winding resistances: Stator hot res R1and Rotor hot res R2 values are listed  
above as R1 and R2. The “hot” temperature is listed here as RQWDG, is in units of  
degrees Celsius. It is the temperature at which the hot resistances were calculated. It  
should be entered in Rated rotor temp. Stator cold res R1 and Rotor cold res R2 are  
not listed in the sample motor data sheet. As such, their entries should be left blank.  
When Stator cold res R1 and Rotor cold res R2 are listed, they should have values  
less than their hot counterparts.  
Motor winding reactance: Stator lkg react X1and Rotor lkg react X2 values are  
listed above as X1R and X2R respectively. Magnetizing react Xm is listed as XM.  
Starting react Xstis listed as XST.  
Drive Commissioning: Motor Data Sheet - Flux  
Curve  
Often the Motor Data Sheet will contain four or five pairs of coordinates (volts,  
amps) that describe the motor flux curve. The example below includes four points or  
pairs of flux curve coordinates.  
VNL  
460  
403  
345  
288  
INL  
LOAD * 1.00  
Eff.:  
98.90  
77.84  
64.06  
52.21  
0.9632  
0.8670  
280.07  
0.0048  
P.F.:  
IL:  
SLIP:  
Flux Curve Data from Motor Data Sheet  
Point 5 is the highest voltage point; Point 1 is the lowest voltage point. For curves  
that list fewer than five flux curve points, start with Point 5 and work down (voltage  
values should be monotonically decreasing). This example would leave data point  
one blank.  
If the flux curve is not known, flux curve information will be determined during the  
motor control tune-up. Leave unused points blank, not zero. Entries can be returned  
to blank (<No Value>) by highlighting the entered value and pressing delete.  
Drive Commissioning: Motor and Process Speed  
Referencing  
Applied top RPM specifies the maximum speed the motor is expected to run in the  
application. It is used to calculate the overspeed fault level and other motor control  
settings.  
Set Applied top RPM to the maximum motor speed for the application.  
Related functions  
•
•
Primary Motor & Application Data  
Local Speed Reference  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Support  
The Innovation Series drive can operate with or without a tachometer. Three  
different tachometer modes are available in the drive:  
•
•
•
Tachless control: The tachless motor control algorithm provides motor speed  
and torque control without tachometer feedback.  
Tach control and sfb: The tachometer-based motor control algorithm uses  
tachometer feedback to provide motor speed and torque control.  
Tachles ctl/Tach sfb: The motor control uses tachometer feedback to provide  
motor speed control, but does not use tachometer feedback to provide torque  
control.  
Select one of the three tachometer modes.  
Related functions  
•
Motor ctrl alg sel  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Pulses Per  
Revolution  
Motor tach PPR specifies the number of pulses per one revolution of the digital A-  
Quad-B tachometer. The drive performs an internal conversion between basic counts  
and quadrature counts, so the quadrature nature of the tachometer does not need to be  
considered when setting Motor tach PPR.  
Set Motor tach PPR to the number of tachometer pulses per revolution.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Feedback Calculation  
Drive Commissioning: Tachometer Loss Protection  
If the drive detects the loss of tachometer feedback, it can take one of two actions:  
•
•
Trip: The Tach loss trip fault is reported and the drive stops running.  
Alarm: The Tach loss alarm is reported and the drive continues to run using the  
tachless motor control algorithm..  
Select the action the drive should take in response to the loss of tachometer feedback.  
Related functions  
•
Tach Loss Detection  
4-16 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Stopping Configuration  
When the drive is running normally and the run request becomes false, the drive will  
be brought to a stop. A normal stop can be generated from one of several different  
inputs, but has 1 of 3 stopping behaviors as configured by the parameter Normal stop  
mode.  
Value of Normal stop  
mode  
Behavior  
Ramp stop  
Quick stop  
Coast stop  
The drive follows a linear speed deceleration  
ramp down to zero speed as configured by the  
Speed Reference Ramp function. Once the drive  
detects that Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero  
speed level, the sequencer disables the  
regulators and stops the drive.  
The speed reference is stepped to zero so that  
the speed is brought is brought to zero as  
quickly as possible (the drive is in current limit).  
Once the drive detects that Speed reg fbk has  
reached the Zero speed level, the sequencer  
disables the regulators and stops the drive.  
The regulators are immediately disabled and  
power is removed from the motor so that it will  
coast to a stop. The sequencer will prevent the  
drive from being re-started until Speed reg fbk  
has reached the Zero speed level, unless Flying  
restart is enabled.  
Note It is possible for the motor to continue to  
be turned by other members of the process.  
Note If Normal stop mode is set to Quick stop or Coast stop, it is recommended that  
the parameter Bypass Q/C stop be set to Yes. Otherwise, if the application uses Full  
flux request or has a post flux delay set in the parameter, Flux off delay time, the  
sequencer will not properly maintain flux on the drive.  
Drive Commissioning: Flying Restart  
Flying Restart is a feature that allows the drive to acquire control of a motor that is  
already turning. Possible selections are as follows:  
•
Enable fly restart: Allows the drive to restart while the motor speed is above the  
Zero speed level.  
•
Disable fly restart: The motor speed must be below the Zero speed level before  
the drive can be restarted, otherwise a trip fault, Flying restrt disabl, will be  
generated.  
Locked shaft restart: The application must assure that the shaft is locked (by a brake  
or other means) when the drive is started. This mode may decrease the time that it  
takes to pre-flux the drive.  
Note In this mode, failure to insure that the shaft is locked may cause the drive to  
misoperate.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: X-Stop Configuration  
The Run req & xstop open trip fault occurs when the X stop circuit is open, the drive  
is stopped, and one of the following requests is issued: Run request, Jog request, or  
Full flux request.  
The state of the X stop circuit is determined by the value of the variable to which  
parameter X stop request sel points. The trip fault can be disabled, along with all  
other X stop behavior, by setting parameter X stop request sel equal to Unused.  
An X-stop can have 1 of 5 stopping behaviors as configured by the parameter X stop  
mode.  
Value of X stop mode  
Behavior  
Nrml (ramp) stop  
The drive follows a linear speed deceleration ramp  
down to zero speed as configured by the Speed  
Reference Ramp function. Once the drive detects that  
Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed level, the  
sequencer disables the regulators and stops the drive.  
Quick stop  
Coast stop  
The speed reference is stepped to zero so that the  
speed is brought is brought to zero as quickly as  
possible (the drive is in current limit). Once the drive  
detects that Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed  
level, the sequencer disables the regulators and stops  
the drive.  
The regulators are immediately disabled and power is  
removed from the motor so that it will coast to a stop.  
The sequencer will prevent the drive from being re-  
started until Speed reg fbk has reached the Zero speed  
level, unless Flying restart is enabled.  
Trip flt stop  
Behavior is similar to that of a Coast stop, except that a  
Trip fault, X stop, is also generated.  
Emerg ramp stop  
The drive follows a linear speed deceleration ramp  
down to zero as configured by the parameter Emerg  
ramp rate. (See also the Speed Reference Ramp.)  
Once the drive detects that Speed reg fbk has reached  
the Zero speed level, the sequencer disables the  
regulators and stops the drive.  
Once the drive is stopped, X stop active must be set False before the drive is re-  
started. Otherwise, if any type of run is requested, the sequencer will generate an Run  
req & xstop open Trip fault.  
Drive Commissioning: X-Stop Ramp Time  
X stop request sel points to the variable whose transition to False causes the drive to  
stop in X-stop mode. Emerg ramp rate is used as the Ramp deceleration rate when  
X-stop is active.  
4-18 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Run Ready Permissive  
String  
Bypass Q/C stop  
This parameter removes Coast stop active and Quick stop active from the Ready to  
run permissive, when they are normally included. Bypass Q/C stop should be set to  
Yes if Normal stop mode is set to Quick stop or Coast stop.  
(Also see Stopping Commands and Modes.)  
Drive Commissioning: Starting and Stopping the  
Drive  
Select the signals used to drive the following functions:  
Parameter  
Description  
Run permissive sel  
When used, this parameter selects a variable that  
populates Run permissive.  
When unused, Run permissive is always set to True.  
Run request select  
Selects the variable that drives Run request. This  
input is only active in “Remote mode” (Local mode  
active is False). The sequencer normally treats the  
signal as a +/- edge-triggered input to set Run  
request. However, if Stop PB select is used, the  
sequencer looks only at the + edge of the signal to set  
Run request.  
Jog request select  
Reverse select  
Selects the variable that drives Jog request. This  
input is only active in “Remote mode.” It is treated as  
a +/- edge-triggered input.  
Selects the source of the boolean which can be used  
to reverse the remote speed reference.  
Drive Commissioning: Manual Reference  
When Manual Reference is selected, the running speed reference is determined by  
the setting of Manual speed ref sel. A fixed manual reference, Speed setpoint 0, is  
used when Manual speed ref sel is set to Spd_Setpt. When Manual speed ref sel is  
set to Man_Ref_Adr, the running speed reference is supplied by the variable  
selected by Man analog ref sel.  
Manual Reference  
Auto mode select  
Manual speed ref sel  
@P.Man_Ref_Adr  
F
Speed Setpoint 1  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Maximum Speed  
References  
Parameter  
Description  
Max forward speed  
Maximum forward reference to the speed regulator. This  
maximum is enforced immediately prior to the speed  
regulator and after all other speed offsets have been  
summed into the reference path.  
Max reverse speed  
Maximum reverse reference to the speed regulator. This  
minimum is enforced immediately prior to the speed  
regulator and after all other speed offsets have been  
summed into the reference path.  
Drive Commissioning: Jog Speed Setpoints  
Enter the Jog speed setpoints:  
When the drive is being jogged in remote mode, Remote jog speed supplants the  
running reference during the time that the jog is commanded.  
When the drive is being jogged in local mode, Local jog speed supplants the running  
reference during the time that the jog button is held.  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Bypass  
The speed reference ramp function, which limits the rate of change of the speed  
reference, may be disabled.  
Select Yes to bypass the speed reference ramp. Select No to enable the ramp.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Mode  
Two ramp modes are available for the speed reference ramp function, which differ in  
the way the ramp rates are implemented:  
•
•
Indep accel/decel: Speed independent ramp rate mode.  
Prog accel/decel: Programmed ramp rate mode.  
When the speed independent ramp rate mode is active, one acceleration rate and one  
deceleration rate are implemented for all speeds. The rate of change of the speed  
reference is limited to the acceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed  
reference is increasing. The rate of change of the speed reference is limited to the  
deceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed reference is decreasing.  
4-20 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the programmed ramp rate mode is active, the acceleration and deceleration  
rates depend on the magnitude of the speed reference. Three separate acceleration  
rates and three separate deceleration rates may be defined for the ramp. The rate of  
change of the speed reference is limited to the active acceleration rate when the  
magnitude of the speed reference is increasing. The rate of change of the speed  
reference is limited to the active deceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed  
reference is decreasing.  
Select Indep accel/decel to activate the speed independent ramp rate mode. Select  
Prog accel/decel to select the programmed ramp rate mode.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Speed  
Independent Rates  
The speed independent ramp rate mode implements one acceleration rate and one  
deceleration rate for all speeds. The rate of change of the speed reference is limited  
to the acceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed reference is increasing. The  
rate of change of the speed reference is limited to the deceleration rate when the  
magnitude of the speed reference is decreasing.  
The acceleration and deceleration ramp rates belong to one of two ramp rate sets.  
Ramp rate set 1 is defined by Acceleration rate 1 and Deceleration rate 1. Ramp rate  
set 2 is defined by Acceleration rate 2 and Deceleration rate 2.  
Enter values for the four parameters to define the ramp rates.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp Speed  
Independent Rate Set Selection  
The speed independent ramp rate mode implements one acceleration rate and one  
deceleration rate for all speeds. The rate of change of the speed reference is limited  
to the acceleration rate when the magnitude of the speed reference is increasing. The  
rate of change of the speed reference is limited to the deceleration rate when the  
magnitude of the speed reference is decreasing.  
The acceleration and deceleration ramp rates belong to one of two ramp rate sets.  
Ramp rate 2 select specifies which set is active. When Ramp rate 2 select is False,  
ramp rate set 1 is active. When it is True, ramp rate set 2 is active.  
Specify the signal which Ramp rate 2 select selects.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp  
Programmed Acceleration Rates  
The programmed ramp rate implements a speed dependent ramp rate profile. The  
acceleration rate depends on the magnitude of the speed reference. The rate of  
change of the speed reference is limited to the acceleration rate when the magnitude  
of the speed reference is increasing.  
Each of the three acceleration ramp rates is active in a particular speed region.  
Acceleration rate 1 is active in region 1, Acceleration rate 2 is active in region 2, and  
Acceleration rate 3 is active in region 3. The speed magnitude increases as the  
reference progresses from region 1 to region 2 to region 3.  
Enter values for the three parameters to define the acceleration ramp rates.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp  
Programmed Acceleration Speeds  
The programmed ramp rate implements a speed dependent ramp rate profile. The  
acceleration rate depends on the magnitude of the speed reference. The rate of  
change of the speed reference is limited to the acceleration rate when the magnitude  
of the speed reference is increasing.  
There are three speed regions which are characterized by unique acceleration ramp  
rates. Region 1 is defined for speed magnitudes less than Accel break point 1. Region  
2 is defined for speed magnitudes between Accel break point 1 and Accel break point  
2. Region 3 is defined for speed magnitudes greater than Accel break point 2.  
Enter values for the two parameters which set the boundaries of the speed regions.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp  
Programmed Deceleration Rates  
The programmed ramp rate implements a speed dependent ramp rate profile. The  
deceleration rate depends on the magnitude of the speed reference. The rate of  
change of the speed reference is limited to the deceleration rate when the magnitude  
of the speed reference is decreasing.  
Each of the three deceleration ramp rates is active in a particular speed region.  
Deceleration rate 1 is active in region 1, Deceleration rate 2 is active in region 2,  
and Deceleration rate 3 is active in region 3. The speed magnitude increases as the  
reference progresses from region 1 to region 2 to region 3.  
Enter values for the three parameters to define the deceleration ramp rates.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
4-22 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Reference Ramp  
Programmed Deceleration Speeds  
The programmed ramp rate implements a speed dependent ramp rate profile. The  
deceleration rate depends on the magnitude of the speed reference. The rate of  
change of the speed reference is limited to the deceleration rate when the magnitude  
of the speed reference is decreasing.  
There are three speed regions which are characterized by unique acceleration ramp  
rates. Region 1 is defined for speed magnitudes less than Accel break point 1.  
Region 2 is defined for speed magnitudes between Accel break point 1 and Accel  
break point 2. Region 3 is defined for speed magnitudes greater than Accel break  
point 2.  
Enter values for the two parameters which set the boundaries of the speed regions.  
Related functions  
•
Speed Reference Ramp  
Drive Commissioning: DDI Increment and  
Decrement Rates (Local Mode)  
Local Inc/Dec rate is the rate of change in the local speed reference offset (in local  
mode) when the increment (+) and decrement (-) buttons on the DDI are pressed.  
Drive Commissioning: Speed/Torque Regulator  
Configuration  
The questions that follow select and configure the desired regulator mode. Note that  
the regulator is not fully configured until the Speed Regulator Tuneup has run.  
Related functions  
•
Speed/Torque Regulator  
Drive Commissioning: Speed/Torque Regulator  
Modes  
Three regulator modes are available:  
•
•
•
Speed regulator: Speed regulator.  
Torque regulator: Torque regulator.  
Torque, spd override: Torque regulator with speed override.  
When the speed regulator mode is active, the drive controls the motor speed so that it  
follows the speed command. When the torque regulator mode is active, the drive sets  
the output of the regulator to a selected torque reference signal. The torque with  
speed override mode is similar to the torque regulator mode, except that the drive  
begins to control the speed when the difference between the speed command and the  
speed feedback is too large.  
Select Speed regulator to activate the speed regulator mode. Select Torque regulator  
to activate the torque regulator mode. Select Torque, spd override to activate the  
torque regulator with speed override mode.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related functions  
•
Speed/Torque Regulator  
Drive Commissioning: Torque Regulator Reference  
and Output  
When the torque regulator mode is selected, the drive sets the output of the regulator  
to a selected torque reference signal.  
The torque reference signal is selected by Torque ref select. Torque ref select may  
specify normal signal sources acquired at the application loop rate or one analog high  
bandwidth signal source acquired at the motor control loop rate.  
The drive sets the regulator output to the torque reference when the torque regulator  
output is enabled. Torque mode sel selects the signal that enables the regulator  
output.  
Enter values for the two parameters that configure the torque regulator mode.  
Related functions  
•
Speed/Torque Regulator  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override  
Reference and Output  
When the torque regulator with speed override mode is selected, the drive sets the  
output of the regulator to a selected torque reference signal, except when the  
difference between the speed command and the speed feedback is too large. When  
the error between those two speed signals is too large, the drive begins to control the  
motor speed so that it follows the speed command.  
The torque reference signal is selected by Torque ref select. Torque ref select may  
specify normal signal sources acquired at the application loop rate or one analog high  
bandwidth signal source acquired at the motor control loop rate.  
When speed override is not active, the drive sets the regulator output to the torque  
reference when the torque regulator output is enabled. Torque mode sel selects the  
signal that enables the regulator output.  
Enter values for the two parameters that specify the torque reference and regulator  
output enable for the torque regulator with speed override mode.  
Related functions  
•
Speed/Torque Regulator  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override  
Speed Error  
When the torque regulator with speed override mode is selected, the drive sets the  
output of the regulator to a selected torque reference signal, except when the  
difference between the speed command and the speed feedback is too large. When  
the error between those two speed signals is too large, the drive begins to control the  
motor speed so that it follows the speed command.  
4-24 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spd reg pos err lim specifies the allowable difference between the speed command  
and the speed feedback when the motor is running too slow. If the feedback is less  
than the command and the difference between the two is greater than Spd reg pos err  
lim, then the drive switches from torque regulation to speed regulation.  
Spd reg neg err lim specifies the allowable difference between the speed command  
and the speed feedback when the motor is running too slow. If the feedback is  
greater than the command and the difference between the two is greater than Spd reg  
neg err lim, then the drive switches from torque regulation to speed regulation.  
Enter values for the two parameters that specify the maximum allowable speed error.  
Related functions  
•
Speed/Torque Regulator  
Drive Commissioning: Torque with Speed Override  
Stopping Behavior  
When the torque regulator with speed override mode is selected, the drive sets the  
output of the regulator to a selected torque reference signal, except when the  
difference between the speed command and the speed feedback is too large. When  
the error between those two speed signals is too large, the drive begins to control the  
motor speed so that it follows the speed command.  
When the drive stops, it can stop either as a speed regulator or as a torque regulator.  
Select Torque W/Spd Overide to stop the drive in torque regulator mode. Select  
Speed Regulator to stop the drive in speed regulator mode.  
Related functions  
•
Speed/Torque Regulator  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limits  
Selecting Torque limit res to use Identical Limits will use a single per-unit value to  
set the motoring and generating torque limits based on 100% Motor torque and the  
current limit based on 100% Motor current.  
Selecting Torque limit res for Separate Limits allows the process owner to  
selectively limit the drive statically or dynamically.  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limits  
Uniform  
Torque overload is the overload limit value that will be used for all torque and  
current limits based on motor per-unit. A rule populates all torque and current limits  
based upon this entry and motor nameplate date.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Failed Calculation  
The calculation FAILED because of improperly entered motor data.  
Check:  
•
•
•
Motor nameplate data  
Motor data sheet data  
Flux curve points are monotonic  
Check the FAULTS that were generated to help determine the source of this error.  
Drive Commissioning: Torque and Current Limit  
Selection  
Normal and alternate torque and current limits are available. They can be  
dynamically selected by the state of the boolean variable at Torque lim 2 sel.  
Torque lim 2 sel contains the address of a boolean which may dynamically switched  
between the normal and alternate torque limits and current limits. When Torque lim  
2 sel is false the normal limits are used, when Torque lim 2 sel is true the alternate  
limits are used. A selection of True or False forces the limits to remain at the  
selected setting.  
Drive Commissioning: Normal Torque and Current  
Limits  
Enter Motoring torque lim1, Regen torque lim 1 and Current limit 1. These values  
will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is false.  
Drive Commissioning: Alternate Torque and  
Current Limits  
Enter Motoring torque lim2, Regen torque lim 2 and Current limit 2. These values  
will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is true.  
Drive Commissioning: Motoring Torque Limits  
Enter the normal(1) and alternate (2) motoring torque limits:  
Motoring torque lim1will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is false.  
Motoring torque lim2will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is true.  
Drive Commissioning: Generating Torque Limits  
Enter the normal(1) and alternate (2) generating torque limits:  
Regen torque lim 1 will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is false.  
Regen torque lim 2 will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is true.  
4-26 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Current Limits  
Enter the normal (1) and alternate (2) per-unit current limits:  
Current limit 1 will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is false.  
Current limit 2 will be used when Torque lim 2 sel is true.  
Drive Commissioning: Power Dip Ride-Through  
Power dip ride-through can allow the drive to recover from a momentary loss of line.  
The Power Dip Protection attempts to sustain DC link voltage for a selectable time  
interval when a low voltage condition is detected. If the line does not recover before  
the time expires, the Power dip trip fault will occur.  
Related functions  
•
Power Dip Protection  
Drive Commissioning: Parameter Calculation  
A calculation is performed in the drive that sets many additional operating  
parameters based on the parameters just entered. At the end of the wizard the  
parameters will be uploaded to the tool with the opportunity for review.  
Drive Commissioning: Simulator Mode  
A Simulator mode is available in the drive. The simulator mode allows the drive to  
be “run” while not necessarily attached to a motor or to a process. This can be useful  
for system evaluation, troubleshooting, or training. In simulator mode the drive will  
behave as if it was turning a motor providing speed, current and voltage feedbacks.  
Simulated loads and inertias may be set in the menu under drive simulation  
parameters.  
Drive Commissioning: Hardware Fault Strings in  
Simulator Mode  
Two protective hardware circuits must be satisfied to allow cell firing and therefore  
allow the drive to run. They are Local fault string and System fault string. These  
protective strings can be ignored for the purpose of running the drive in simulator  
mode. If they are not ignored, they must be satisfied to make the drive run as a  
simulator.  
Drive Commissioning: Simulator Mechanical  
Configuration  
Enter the desired values for the parameters, Simulated inertia and Sim const friction.  
These parameters are the minimum required to configure the drive's mechanical  
simulator. Other simulator configuration parameters are described in the Simulator  
function.  
Related functions  
•
Simulator.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive Commissioning: Exit Reminder  
After the Drive Commissioning wizard completes, the drive should have a hard  
reset performed. This should clear any faults that have occurred because of  
intermediate parameter values during the setup process.  
The following wizards should be run to complete the start-up process:  
•
•
•
Cell Test  
Motor Control Tuneup  
Speed Regulator Tuneup  
Drive Commissioning: Conclusion  
The Drive Commissioning Wizard has concluded.  
Once this wizard is exited, the drive should have a hard reset performed. This  
should clear any faults that have occurred because of intermediate parameter values  
during the setup process.  
The following wizards should be run to complete the start-up process:  
•
•
•
Cell Test  
Motor Control Tuneup  
Speed Regulator Tuneup  
Line Transfer Tuneup  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Overview  
The Line Transfer Tuneup wizard is provided to facilitate quick and reliable setup of  
line transfer functions. This wizard allows the user to enable transfer functions and  
direct I/O. If you are using the XferMtr command it will check phase rotation, and  
measure the phase angle and voltage magnitude relationships needed to correctly  
carryout the command. Because the wizard uses drive output instrumentation to do  
these measurements it will generally be necessary for the user to manually close the  
utility contactor to connect the drive output to the line. Depending on the application  
it may be necessary to disconnect the motor in order to complete the wizard. Until  
this wizard has be successfully completed the drive will not accept line transfer  
commands.  
There are many issues beyond drive software that must be considered before  
attempting transfers and captures. For detailed information all applications issues see  
the "Innovation Series Line Transfer Application Guide".  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Motor Transfer Data  
This wizard can configure the drive to perform motor transfer and capture  
operations. The motor transfer data parameters configure the drive to transfer a  
motor to the utility line. Enter the motor transfer data parameters.  
Transfer mtr req sel selects the signal that initiates the motor transfer. Set as  
required by your application.  
4-28 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line reference specifies the source of the utility line reference. Set to Internal to use  
the internally generated line reference signal. If required by your application an  
external line reference may be needed in which case set Line reference to match the  
type of external line reference signal you have.  
Utility swgr close specifies the I/O point that drives the utility switchgear close  
command during the motor transfer sequence. Set Utility swgr close to the desired  
I/O point.  
MA pickup time specifies the time allowed for the MA contactor to close once it has  
been commanded to close during the motor transfer sequence. Set MA pickup time to  
the desired MA contactor close delay time.  
For more information on the Line Transfer Tuneup wizard and issues related to the  
setting of these parameters see the "Innovation Series Line Transfer Application  
Guide".  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Motor Capture Data  
This wizard can configure the drive to perform motor transfer and capture  
operations. The motor capture data parameters configure the drive to transfer a motor  
to the utility line. Enter the motor capture data parameters.  
Capture mtr req sel selects the signal that initiates the motor capture. Set Capture  
mtr req sel to the desired signal.  
Anticipated torque specifies the expected motor torque at the time of motor capture.  
This parameter has an effect on the smoothness of the capture. By correctly  
anticipating the amount of torque the control can more smoothly capture the motor.  
This value is in PU of motor rated torque and should be determined by observing the  
load torque on the motor when running at synchronous speed. If you are unsure of  
the value to use then use the default value.  
Utility swgr open specifies the I/O point that drives the utility switchgear open  
command during the motor capture sequence. Set Utility swgr open to the desired  
I/O point.  
For more information on the Line Transfer Tuneup wizard see the "Innovation Series  
Line Transfer Application Guide".  
Line Transfer Tuneup: Operation  
This wizard configures the drive to perform motor transfer and capture operations.  
This is the section of the wizard that will verify operation of the MA contactor,  
check for correct phase rotation at the drive output and measure the phase angle and  
voltage magnitude relationships needed to carryout transfer commands in the future.  
Utility characteristics can be measured while the motor is running off the utility. If  
the motor is not running off the utility and cannot be started across the line,  
disconnect the motor leads BEFORE running this command.  
Verify that the utility switchgear permissives are correct before executing this  
command so that you will be able to manually close the switchgear when asked. This  
wizard will not send commands to the utility switchgear.  
To proceed, click the Execute button.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Drive response window for internal line reference  
Display  
Description  
Phase angle no load  
The phase angle difference measured between the  
drive source voltage and the utility voltage. The utility  
voltage was measured at the drive output. A positive  
phase angle indicates the utility lags the drive source.  
For a negative phase angle, the utility leads the drive  
source.  
Utility phase offset  
Offsets consisting of the phase angle no load plus  
phase compensation due to transformer loading.  
Utility AC line  
The utility line voltage measured at the drive output.  
The drive source voltage.  
Drive AC source  
Utility volt scale  
Volt scale = Utility AC line voltage / Drive AC source  
voltage  
Drive response window for external line reference  
Display  
Description  
Phase angle no load  
The phase angle difference measured between the  
external reference and the utility voltage. The utility  
voltage was measured at the drive output. A positive  
phase angle indicates that the utility lags the external  
reference. For a negative phase angle, the utility leads  
the external reference.  
Utility phase offset  
Offset consisting of the phase angle no load plus  
phase compensation due to transformer loading.  
Utility AC line  
The utility line voltage measured at the drive output.  
The external voltage measured at the analog input.  
Set equal to 1.0 when using an external reference.  
External reference  
Utility volt scale  
Ext ref Vpt scale  
Volt scale = Utility AC line voltage / External line  
reference voltage  
For more information on the Line Transfer Tuneup wizard see the "Innovation Series  
Line Transfer Application Guide".  
4-30 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Control Tuneup  
Motor Control Tuneup: Equivalent Circuit  
The equivalent circuit for the induction motor used in the motor control tune-up is:  
Lsigma  
Bridge Flux  
R1  
Lsigma outer  
I
V
R2inner  
R2 outer  
Flux Saturation  
Curve  
The motor elementals and flux saturation curve will be measured for the phase  
combinations of AB and BC. After both sets of measurements are completed the  
balance of each phase pair will be compared for each motor elemental and saturation  
curve data point. The deviation of R1, R2, saturation curve should be less than 10%  
and for Lsigma less than 25%. The averages of the motor elementals and saturation  
curve are saved in the engineering parameters (At_xxx) and used in the recalculation  
of the motor control tune-up values.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Control Tuneup: Measurements  
When selecting all the measurements the VCO’s will be calibrated and for both  
phase combinations, AB and BC, the measurements of Tau, R1, R2 inner, R2 outer,  
Lsigma starting, Lsigma outer, Lsigma curve, Bridge flux and the Flux saturation  
curve will be performed. These measurements will be checked for balance between  
phase combinations and monotonically increasing curves. If these checks are passed  
the results will be averaged and the motor control rules will calculate new tune-up  
values.  
Each measurement can be selected separately along with which phase combinations  
to use and whether new tune-up values are calculated.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use phase A-B in measurements  
Use phase B-C in measurements  
Calibrate VCO offsets before making measurements  
Measure R1, stator resistance  
Measure R2, outer rotor resistance  
Measure Lsigma, leakage inductance (starting, outer & curve)  
along with inner rotor resistance and bridge flux  
•
•
•
Measure flux saturation curve  
Calculate new motor control tune-up values  
Skip phase balance check  
Clearing measured elementals will calculate new tune-up values based on the  
original motor data.  
Motor Control Tuneup: Operation  
This will perform the requested measurements of the previous screen and a dialog  
box will appear to show the progress.  
Use of the Abort function will cancel the measurements and throw present results  
away.  
Panel Meter Setup  
The Panel Meter Setup wizard directs configuration of the panel meters. For more  
information on the panel meters, see the Analog Inputs/Outputs and Mapping  
function help.  
Per Unit Setup  
The Per Unit Setup wizard directs configuration of the per unit parameters that  
determine scaling for the DDI. It is recommended that the control be allowed to  
calculate the default per unit settings.  
4-32 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Protection Setup  
Line Protection: Introduction  
The Line Protection Setup wizard sets parameters which affect line protection  
functions concerning overfrequency, underfrequency, overvoltage, and undervoltage.  
If the Drive Commissioning wizard has been performed, these parameters were setup  
automatically. Perform the Line Protection Setup wizard only if you need to restore  
these parameters to their original settings or if you need to override the default  
parameter settings.  
Line Protection: Default Settings  
The Line Protection Setup wizard defaults are highly recommended. Making the  
default selection will result in voltage and frequency protection settings that are in  
line with the specifications of the drive and that are proven settings.  
Line Protection: Overvoltage  
These parameters set the level of protection of the ac line overvoltage protection. It  
is highly recommended to use the control default values as calculated in the previous  
steps (you can go backward).  
•
•
•
Line OV fault level is the ac line voltage above which the AC line over voltage  
trip fault occurs.  
Line OV alarm level is the ac line voltage above which the AC line voltage high  
alarm occurs.  
Line OV alarm clear is the ac line voltage below which the AC line voltage high  
alarm goes away.  
Related functions  
•
Line Monitor  
Line Protection: Undervoltage  
These parameters set the level of protection of the ac line undervoltage protection. It  
is highly recommended to use the control default values as calculated in the previous  
steps (you can go backward).  
•
•
•
Line UV fault level is the ac line voltage below which the AC line under volt trip  
fault occurs.  
Line UV alarm level is the ac line voltage below which the AC line volts low  
alarm occurs.  
Line UV alarm clear is the ac line voltage above which the AC line volts low  
alarm goes away.  
Related functions  
•
Line Monitor  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Protection: Overfrequency  
These parameters set the level of protection of the ac line overfrequency protection.  
It is highly recommended to use the control default values as calculated in the  
previous steps (you can go backward).  
•
•
•
Over freq flt level is the ac line frequency above which the AC line over freq trip  
fault occurs.  
Over freq alm level is the ac line frequency above which the AC line freq high  
alarm occurs.  
Over freq alm clear is the ac line frequency below which the AC line freq high  
alarm goes away.  
Related functions  
•
Line Monitor  
Line Protection: Underfrequency  
These parameters set the level of protection of the ac line underfrequency protection.  
It is highly recommended to use the control default values as calculated in the  
previous steps (you can go backward).  
•
•
•
Under freq flt level is the ac line frequency below which the AC line under freq  
trip fault occurs.  
Under freq alm level is the ac line frequency below which the AC line freq low  
alarm occurs.  
Under freq alarm clr is the ac line frequency above which the AC line freq low  
alarm goes away.  
Related functions  
•
Line Monitor  
Line Protection: Conclusion  
You have completed the Line Protection Setup wizard. The control is now ready to  
run with the new values after the parameter upload.  
Pulse Test  
Pulse Test: Introduction  
The Pulse Test wizard is a diagnostic tool which allows the user to produce voltage  
pulses using the power bridge. Such pulses and the resulting currents which are  
induced are useful in performing detailed analysis of the load or power bridge. The  
bridge is capable of performing a number of different types of voltage pulses and so  
the wizard is more complicated than might be expected.  
In general the Pulse Test user specifies the power bridge devices used to make the  
voltage pulses and the duration of the pulses.  
4-34 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pulse Test: Analog Output Configuration  
The Pulse Test user may configure two analog output channels from within the Pulse  
Test Wizard.  
During the course of the Pulse Test it is often useful to observe certain drive  
variables, such as phase currents (variables Phase A current, Phase B current, and  
Phase C current) and line-line voltages (variables Output volts, A-B and Output  
volts, B-C).  
Pulse Test: Bridge State Configuration  
During the course of the Pulse Test the power bridge is sequenced between different  
states. The sequence is OFF, PARK, PULSE, PARK, PULSE, PARK, OFF. The user  
specifies the meaning of the PARK and PULSE states and the duration the sequencer  
remains in each of these states.  
The diagram below shows in a general manner how the Pulse Test switches the  
power bridge between the different states. It also shows how current in the bridge  
might appear, without indicating a specific bridge phase, current direction, or current  
magnitude.  
Pulse  
Park  
Off  
Current  
Time  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Detailed descriptions of the Park and Pulse states are as follows:  
Bridge State  
Description  
Off state  
All the power devices in the bridge are turned off. Due to the  
nature of the power devices and the topology of the power  
circuit any currents which exist in off phases are quickly driven  
to zero. Phases not included in the pulse or park state remain in  
the off state.  
Park state  
The devices in the bridge are turned on in such a way as to  
impress no voltage between the selected drive terminals.  
Devices are turned on such that the selected drive terminals are  
all connected to the same DC voltage potential within the bridge  
(MINUS, ZERO or PLUS). Phases not selected for the park  
state are left OFF for the duration of the park state. Phases  
listed in the park state and NOT listed in the pulse state will  
remain in the park state for the duration of the pulse state. Any  
current existing in the power bridge will circulate between the  
drive and the load and decay to zero at a rate that depends on  
the load electrical time constant.  
Pulse state  
The devices in the bridge are turned on in such a way as to  
impress a voltage between the selected drive terminals and the  
terminals left in the park state. Voltage is created using the  
devices to connect the pulsed terminals to another internal DC  
voltage potential. This condition can lead to rising currents if a  
load is connected to the bridge. The total phase-phase voltage  
developed is the difference between the internal DC bus  
voltages selected for the park and pulse states (MINUS, ZERO,  
PLUS).  
The Pulse Test user specifies the phases to park and the park state potential by  
setting parameters Park phase and Park level to desired values.  
The Pulse Test user specifies the phases to pulse and the pulse state potential by  
setting parameters Pulse phase and Pulse level to desired values.  
Consider the following example response for parameters set as follows:  
Park phase  
Park level  
=
=
=
=
A, B, C  
MINUS  
A
Pulse phase  
Pulse level  
PLUS  
Plus  
Zero  
A
Minus  
Plus  
Post  
pulse off  
time  
Pulse 1  
on time  
Mid pulse  
off time  
Pulse 2  
on time  
Zero  
B
Minus  
Plus  
Zero  
C
Minus  
Task 1  
load  
Task 1  
load  
pulse  
pulse  
4-36 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pulse Test: Timer Configuration  
The Pulse Test allows up to two voltage pulses to be commanded and produced by  
the power bridge. The duration of the voltage pulses, and the duration of the current  
decay time between the pulses and after the pulses, is specified by the pulse test  
timer parameters Pulse 1 on time, Pulse 2 on time, Mid pulse off time, and Post pulse  
off time.  
The diagram below shows a Pulse Test profile and indicates how the timer  
parameters are defined.  
Pulse  
Park  
Off  
Pulse 1  
on time  
Mid pulse Pulse 2  
off time on time  
Post pulse  
off time  
Time  
All the timer parameters have units of seconds. If any of the parameters equals zero,  
the corresponding pulse on or off time is skipped during the Pulse Test.  
The user should keep several issues in mind when specifying these times. First it is  
possible for large currents to develop in the bridge as result of these pulses. The  
power bridge will protect itself against excessively large currents by declaring an  
IOC fault. Any fault will abort the pulse test sequence and require you to perform a  
fault reset before another pulse can be commanded. The second issue is that there are  
several constraints which the pulse test wizard must deal with when issuing pulses.  
Among these are minimum pulse widths, lockout times and transition constraints.  
The wizard must always observe these constraints. As a result you may not get the  
exact pulse you command or in some cases you may get no pulse at all. For instance,  
if you declare a pulse that is smaller than the required minimum pulse then you will  
get no pulse. Finally you should be aware that the pulse test wizard always schedules  
the end of the mid pulse off time to occur on a task 1 boundary. This is the pivot  
point of the sequence and all other timings are computed from this point.  
Pulse Test: Operation  
The Pulse Test is a diagnostic test that produces a current pulse in the power bridge  
and load.  
After specifying the Pulse Test configuration parameters, click on the Execute button  
to invoke the Pulse Test.  
Remaining Parameter Setup  
The Remaining Parameter Setup wizard directs configuration of parameters that  
cannot be assigned default values during the commissioning process. It is  
recommended that the control be allowed to calculate the default parameter settings.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simulator Setup  
Simulator Setup: Introduction  
The Simulator Setup configures the drive to run in simulator mode.  
Simulator Setup: Simulator Mode  
If you would like to run the drive in simulator mode, select Yes.  
If you do not want to run the drive in simulator mode, select No.  
Related functions  
•
Simulator  
Simulator Setup: Hardware Fault String Override  
If you would like to disable the Local flt and System flt trip faults in simulator mode,  
select Yes.  
If you would like to continue to check for the Local flt and System flt trip faults in  
simulator mode, select No.  
Related functions  
•
Hardware Fault Strings  
Simulator Setup: Simulator Mechanical  
Configuration  
Enter the desired values for the parameters, Simulated inertia and Sim const friction.  
These parameters are the minimum required to configure the drive's mechanical  
simulator. Other simulator configuration parameters are described in the Simulator  
function.  
Related functions  
•
Simulator  
Simulator Setup: Conclusion  
The Simulator Setup has reconfigured the drive with your selections.  
4-38 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Regulator Tuneup  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Model  
The simplified model of the speed regulator is:  
proportional  
command gain  
proportional  
feedback gain  
proportional  
filter  
+
Σ
-
Filter  
net  
gain  
system  
inertia  
integral  
gain  
2
60  
π
Speed  
Command  
Integrator  
Torque  
Command  
+
+
Σ
Σ
+
Speed  
-
Feedback  
The system inertia can be either measured or entered and the gains can be entered  
separately or calculated from bandwidth, damping and stiffness for a 1st and 2nd order  
closed loop response.  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: System Inertia  
System inertia can be either measured by rotating the motor and watching the  
acceleration produced by a constant torque or entered by the user.  
Note The last measured/entered value is the default for entering a new value.  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Inertia Measurement  
Command  
This will perform the system inertia measurement by rotating the motor and  
watching the acceleration produced by a constant torque. A dialog box will appear to  
show the progress of the measurements.  
Use of the Abort function will cancel the measurements and throw present results  
away.  
Advanced Help: (privilege level 4 required)  
•
If error “Problem With Torque for Rampup Test” occurs set At_MeasJ_Spd to  
90% of the speed, in RPM, reached during test.  
•
If error “CoastDown Test Finished Prematurely” occurs set At_MeasJ_Spd to a  
value, in RPM, that would require the motor 1 sec to coast down.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Speed Regulator Mode  
•
•
•
•
Manually tune-up individual gains  
1st order closed loop response  
2nd order closed loop response  
2nd order closed loop response with stiffness filter for load disturbances  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Manual Regulator  
Tuneup  
Enter the requested gains based on the diagram below:  
proportional  
command gain  
proportional  
feedback gain  
proportional  
filter  
+
Σ
-
Filter  
net  
gain  
system  
inertia  
integral  
gain  
2
60  
π
Speed  
Command  
Integrator  
Torque  
Command  
+
+
Σ
Σ
+
Speed  
-
Feedback  
System Inertia was previously measured or entered.  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 1st Order Response  
Calculate speed regulator gains based on 1st order closed loop response and set the  
speed feedback filter to 10 times the bandwidth.  
•
Speed Regulator Bandwidth in radians/sec  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 2nd Order Response  
Calculate speed regulator gains based on 2nd order closed loop response and set the  
speed feedback filter to 10 times the bandwidth.  
•
•
Speed Regulator Bandwidth in radians/sec  
Speed Regulator Damping Ratio  
(value of 1 is critically damped)  
•
Speed Regulator Tracking Bandwidth in radians/sec  
(bandwidth for coordinated section so reference errors are identical, practical  
limits are ω/2d to 2ω, where 0 is unused)  
Note If Tracking Bandwidth is equal to Regulator Bandwidth the speed regulator  
will give a 1st order response to a step input and a 2nd order response is given for a  
Tracking Bandwidth of 0.  
4-40 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: 2nd Order Response  
with Stiffness Filter  
Calculate speed regulator gains based on 2nd order closed loop response and set the  
speed feedback filter to 10 times the bandwidth.  
•
•
Speed Regulator Bandwidth in radians/sec  
Speed Regulator Damping Ratio  
(value of 1 is critically damped)  
•
•
Speed Regulator Stiffness Filter  
(stiffer value is larger and 1 produces a 2nd order response)  
Speed Regulator Tracking Bandwidth in radians/sec  
(bandwidth for coordinated section so reference errors are identical, practical  
limits are ω/2d to 2ω, where 0 is unused)  
Note If Tracking Bandwidth is equal to Regulator Bandwidth the speed regulator  
will give a 1st order response to a step input and a 2nd order response is given for a  
Tracking Bandwidth of 0.  
Speed Regulator Tuneup: Calculate Speed  
Regulator Gains Command  
This will perform the speed regulator gain calculations based on the previous  
information of inertia, regulator mode, bandwidth, damping and stiffness.  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 4 Wizards • 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
4-42 • Chapter 4 Wizards  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Signal Mapping  
Introduction  
The drive software’s Motor Control Layer (MCL) performs motor control functions,  
The IS200DSPX Digital  
Signal Processor board  
(DSPX) contains and  
implements the drive’s  
control software. The DSPX  
is located in the drive’s  
control rack.  
such as current regulation. MCL interfacing is through a signal map. An operator can  
configure the signal map using either the Drive Diagnostic Interface (keypad) or the  
GE Control System Toolbox (see Figure 5-1).  
Signals are either LAN or I/O-based variables that control the drive and provide  
drive status feedback. For example, an analog input signal provides speed reference.  
This chapter describes the signal mapping, as follows:  
Section  
Page  
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 5-1  
LAN Interfaces ................................................................................................... 5-2  
Parameter Configuration for Signal Mapping....................................................... 5-3  
Variable Mapping ............................................................................................... 5-4  
Applying the LAN Heartbeat Echo Feature.......................................................... 5-5  
Application of Feedback Signals ......................................................................... 5-6  
Variable Maps..................................................................................................... 5-6  
Real Variable Map ....................................................................................... 5-7  
Boolean Variable Map.................................................................................. 5-8  
GE Control System Toolbox  
loaded on PC  
Keypad on drive  
cabinet door  
Drive Control Rack  
in drive cabinet  
RS-232C  
Figure 5-1. Operator Interfaces  
to Drive Software  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 5 Signal Mapping • 5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LAN Interfaces  
The LAN interfacing for the MCL requires the addition of a communications module  
to the control rack, as follows (refer to Figure 5-2):  
Interface  
Module  
Communications Supported  
Freeze and synchronous mode  
9.6 kb to 12 Mb  
Profibus™-DP  
Slave  
IS215PBIA  
Genius®  
IS215GBIA  
IS215DSPX  
IS215ACLI  
LAN heartbeat  
ISBus Slave  
From MCL, no additional modules required  
From the ACL, other LANs supported:  
Modbus™ RTU  
Application  
Control Layer  
(ACL)  
Allen Bradley DH+  
Modbus Ethernet  
Ethernet SRTP  
Ethernet Global Data  
Requires configuration in the ACL  
Power Supply  
RAPA  
Standard Function  
Optional Function  
Motor Control Layer  
(MCL)  
ISBus (Note)  
+
-
+
-
AC  
AC  
BAIA  
DSPX  
Communication  
Option Module  
Application Control  
Layer (ACL_  
Note:  
Two ISBus ports are standard,  
use of the ports is optional.  
Modbus RTU  
Allen Bradley DH+  
Modbus  
PBIA  
ACL  
GBIA  
Ethernet SRTP  
Ethernet Global Data  
ISBus A  
ISBus B  
Profibus  
Genius Bus  
Figure 5-2. LAN Interface  
Options  
5-2 • Chapter 5 Signal Mapping  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parameter Configuration for Signal Mapping  
Parameters are used in the drive for configuration of functions. For example, six  
parameters are used to configure the ramp rate function generator in the general  
industries pattern.  
The 64-byte, bi-directional signal map is configured with either the keypad or the  
toolbox. Refer to the data sheets associated with these interface modules for a  
detailed description of the configuration.  
LAN  
Configuration Data Sheets (Documents)  
Interface  
Genius Bus  
GEI-100269, Auxiliary Genius Bus Interface Module  
IS215GBIAH_A__  
Profibus-DP  
GEI-100419, Auxiliary Profibus-DP Interface Module  
IS215PBIAH_A__  
ISBus  
GEH-6417  
ACL- based  
GEI-100434  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 5 Signal Mapping • 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Variable Mapping  
The drive software uses variables either of two ways:  
As dynamic references for controlling the drive  
To contain feedback on the drive status  
Also refer to “Variable  
Maps” in this chapter.  
•
For example, the variables Speed Feedback and Speed Reference are associated with  
the speed regulator function.  
The variable map is defined in terms of paired pages, as follows:  
Page Type Direction of Data  
Reference  
Feedback  
From the controller to the drive (for example, Speed Reference)  
From the drive to the controller (for example, Speed Feedback)  
Each element in the map is assigned a data type, used by standard assignments as  
follows:  
Data Type Format  
Real  
32 bits per IEEE 754 (23-bit mantissa, 8-bit exponent, 1-bit sign)  
1 bit per signal  
Boolean  
The following table specifies variables that indicate the LAN health and status for  
the LAN Configuration and Health function.  
Variable  
Description  
LAN connection OK  
Indicates that the health of the LAN connection is good,  
such that the LAN watchdog function is satisfied.  
LAN commands OK  
Heartbeat ref, LAN  
Indicates that the health of the LAN references are good,  
based upon the detection of two successive LAN  
connection OK indications.  
LAN heartbeat signal that is generated by the controller.  
The drive can be configured to alarm or trip upon the  
failure of this heartbeat. The drive also echoes this signal  
back out the Heartbeat Fbk LAN variable.  
Heartbeat Fbk, LAN  
Drive echoes the Heartbeat ref variable out on Heartbeat  
Fbk.  
Sys ISBus error Cnt  
Sys ISBus error Reg  
Not applicable  
Not applicable  
Frame PLL OK status Not applicable  
FPLL Freq Output Not applicable  
5-4 • Chapter 5 Signal Mapping  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Applying the LAN Heartbeat Echo Feature  
When controlling a drive over a LAN, both the controller and the drive need to  
monitor and react to changes in the status of LAN health. The heartbeat echo feature  
in the drive provides a mechanism for this function.  
The following illustrations indicate how the drive and controller obtain status on the  
LAN integrity and possible configuration options.  
Heartbeat Echo Function with a PLC  
+
-
AC  
Drive reads the heartbeat signal  
generated in the controller on  
Lan_Htbt_Ref and echos it back  
on Lan_Htbt_Fbk  
Drive can be configured to  
monitor heartbeat on  
Lan_Htbt_Ref and alarm or trip if  
the heartbeat fails to transition  
Innovation  
Series  
MCL  
Controller generates the  
heartbeat and monitors the echo  
of it from the drive  
Lan_Htbt_Fbk  
Lan_Htbt_Ref  
Bit  
Reference  
Feedback  
Series 90-30  
Heartbear ref, lan Heartbear fbk, lan  
(Lan_Htbt_Ref) (Lan_Htbt_Fbk)  
1
Lan_Htbt_Ref  
Lan_Htbt_Fbk  
Heartbeat Echo Function with an Innovation Series  
Controller  
+
-
AC  
Drive reads the heartbeat signal  
generated in the controller on  
Lan_Htbt_Ref and echos it back  
on Lan_Htbt_Fbk  
Drive can be configured to  
monitor heartbeat on  
Lan_Htbt_Ref and alarm or trip if  
the heartbeat fails to transition  
Innovation  
Series  
MCL  
Innovation Series Controller auto  
generates the heartbeat and  
monitors the echo of it from the  
drive in the # version of the  
feedback signals  
Bit  
Reference  
Feedback  
Heartbear ref, lan Heartbear fbk, lan  
(Lan_Htbt_Ref) (Lan_Htbt_Fbk)  
1
Lan_Htbt_Ref  
Lan_Htbt_Fbk  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 5 Signal Mapping • 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application of Feedback Signals  
In most control systems the LAN (Genius, Profibus-DP, and such) operates  
asynchronous with the execution of control logic. Two situations can occur:  
•
•
Under Sampling - If the control logic sweep rate is slower than the LAN sweep  
rate, certain samples of feedback signals from the drive are not seen by the  
control logic.  
Over Sampling - If the control logic sweep rate is faster than the LAN sweep  
rate, certain feedback signal samples from the drive are seen multiple times by  
the control logic.  
To address the under sampling problem, signal conditioning is provided for  
dedicated analog feedback channels in the form of sequential averaging. Feedback  
signals are comprised of a series of short-term averages of the source signal. The  
parameter LAN fbk avg time configures the averaging period; updates to the feedback  
signal map are performed coherently.  
Note that when an integer relationship exists between LAN frame time and LAN fbk  
avg time, then the frame and feedback averaging periods are synchronized to the  
extent possible. This synchronization is optimal for synchronous LAN interfaces,  
such as those provided by the ISBus.  
Variable Maps  
This section defines the signal maps for the ACMVAC4-G (General Industries)  
pattern. The following tables provide:  
•
•
•
Standard 32-bit SPFP maps  
20-character user names and 12-character symbolic names  
Units or scale groups (as appropriate)  
5-6 • Chapter 5 Signal Mapping  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Real Variable Map  
Reference  
Functionality  
multiple bits,  
Feedback  
Functionality  
Variable  
Variable  
Byte  
1-4  
Request bits 1, lan  
(Lan_Req1_Wrd)  
Auto speed ref, lan  
(Lan_Spd_Ref)  
Feedback bits 1, lan  
(Lan_Fbk1_Wrd)  
Fault number  
multiple bits,  
see table below  
Auto analog ref sel  
(Auto_Ref_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
see table below  
5-8  
number of the active fault with  
(Lan_Flt_Code)  
<integer>  
(1) highest severity (trip/alarm) (2)  
earliest time-stamp  
SpeedRpm_Scl  
Spd ref offset, lan  
(Lan_Spd_Offs)  
SpeedRpm_Scl  
9-12  
Speed loop sum sel  
(Spd_Outr_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
Speed feedback, lan =Avg[Spd_Fbk]  
(Lan_Spd_Fbk)  
SpeedRpm_Scl  
Motor torque, lan  
(Lan_Trq_Fbk)  
Torque_Scl  
sequential averages  
13-16 Torque ref, lan  
(Lan_Trq_Ref)  
Torque ref select  
(Trq_Ref_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
=Avg[Trq_Cal_T2]  
sequential averages  
Torque_Scl  
17-20 Not Used  
Motor current, lan  
(Lan_I_Mag)  
“A rms”  
=Avg[I_Mag_T2 x Sqrt(1/2)]  
sequential averages  
21-24 Not Used  
25-28 GP lan ref 1  
(Lan_R01_Ref)  
Not Used  
general purpose real var GP lan fbk reg 1  
(Lan_R01_Fbk)  
GP lan fb reg 1 sel  
(Lan_R01_Adr)  
29-32 GP lan ref 2  
(Lan_R02_Ref)  
general purpose real var GP lan fbk reg 2  
(Lan_R02_Fbk)  
GP lan fb reg 2 sel  
(Lan_R02_Adr)  
33-36 Torque fdfwd, lan  
(Lan_Trq_Ffd)  
Torque feed fwd sel  
(Trq_Ffd_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
Motor power, lan  
(Lan_Mtr_Pwr)  
Power_Scl  
=Avg[Mtr_Pwr_T2]  
sequential averages  
Torque_Scl  
37-40 Flux reference, lan  
(Lan_Flx_Adj)  
Flux adjust select  
(Flx_Adj_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
Motor voltage, lan  
(Lan_V_Mag)  
“V rms”  
=Avg[V_Mag_T2 x Sqrt(3/2)]  
sequential averages  
<no units>  
41-44 Droop comp ref, lan Droop comp ref sel  
Not Used  
(Lan_Drp_Comp)  
<no units>  
(Drp_Comp_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
45-56 Not Used  
Not Used  
57-60 GP lan ref 3  
(Lan_R03_Ref)  
general purpose real var GP lan fbk reg 3  
(Lan_R03_Fbk)  
GP lan fb reg 3 sel  
(Lan_R03_Adr)  
61-64 GP lan ref 4  
(Lan_R04_Ref)  
general purpose real var GP lan fbk reg 4  
(Lan_R04_Fbk)  
GP lan fb reg 4 sel  
(Lan_R04_Adr)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 5 Signal Mapping • 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Boolean Variable Map  
Reference  
Feedback  
Functionality  
Variable  
Functionality  
Variable  
Byte  
1
Heartbeat ref, lan  
(Lan_Htbt_Ref)  
Heartbeat function:  
transitions expected  
Heartbeat fbk, lan  
(Lan_Htbt_Fbk)  
Heartbeat function:  
loopback Heartbeat ref, lan  
2
3
4
Fault reset req, lan  
(Lan_Flt_Rst)  
Fault reset select  
(Flt_Rst_Adr)  
No faults or alarms  
(No_Flt)  
no active (uncleared) faults,  
"not (trip OR alarm)"  
Behavior 1, edge  
Fault.Lan trip request  
(Lan_Trp)  
Trip request, lan  
(Lan_Trp_Req)  
Trip fault active  
(Trip_Flt)  
active trip fault,  
"trip"  
Behavior 0  
Alarm request, lan  
(Lan_Alm_Req)  
Fault.Lan alarmrequest  
(Lan_Alm)  
Local fault string  
(Loc_Flt)  
local hardware permissive; bridge  
inhibited  
Behavior 0  
system hardware permissive; bridge  
inhibited  
5
6
7
8
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
Not Used  
System fault string  
(Sys_Flt)  
Ready to Run  
(Run_Rdy)  
device is ready & will respond to run  
request  
Bridge is on  
(Brg_Pwr_Enb)  
Running  
bridge power enabled;  
sequencer command  
Set, Clear:  
(Running)  
Ref_Enb_Stat & Sreg_Stat ,  
/Ref_Enb_Stat & /Sreg_Stat  
Running &  
9
Run request, lan  
(Lan_Run_Req)  
Run request select  
(Run_Req_Adr)  
Behavior 1, edge  
Jog request select  
(Jog_Req_Adr)  
Behavior 1, edge  
X stop request sel  
(X_Stp_Adr)  
Run active  
(Run_Act)  
( Run_Req & /Jog_Req )  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Jog request, lan  
(Lan_Jog_Req)  
Jog active  
(Jog_Act)  
Running &  
( Jog_Req )  
X stop request, lan  
(Lan_Xstp_Req)  
X stop active  
(X_Stp_Cmd)  
result of Xstop requests  
flux model indicates that  
Behavior 1, level  
Full flux req sel  
(Fflx_Req_Adr)  
Behavior 1, edge  
Reverse select  
(Rev_Req_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
Full flux req, lan  
(Lan_FFlx_Req)  
Full flux active  
(Seq_Stat.Flx_Enb_S net commanded flux  
tat)  
is established  
Rev mode req, lan  
(Lan_Rev_Req)  
Reverse mode active result of Rev mode requests  
(Reverse)  
Torque mode req,  
lan  
Torque mode sel  
(Tref_Enb_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
Torque mode active  
(Trq_Mode_Act)  
speed regulator function is  
regulating torque  
(Lan_Tref_Enb)  
5-8 • Chapter 5 Signal Mapping  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reference  
Functionality  
Droop disab req, lan Droop disable select  
Feedback  
Functionality  
Variable  
Variable  
Byte  
15  
Speed mode active  
(Spd_Mode_Act)  
speed regulator function is  
regulating speed  
(Lan_Drp_Inh)  
(Drp_Inh_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
16  
17  
Trq lim 2 req, lan  
(Lan_Tlim_Sel)  
Torque lim 2 sel  
(Tlim_Sel_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
In cur or trq lim  
(Trq_Lim_Act)  
Inner torque regulator in  
limit=(Sreg_Frz_Pos||_Neg)  
Ramp rate 2 req, lan Ramp rate 2 select  
Not Used  
(Lan_Rmp_Sel)  
(Rmp_Sel_Adr)  
Behavior 2  
18  
19  
Ramp bypass req,  
lan  
Bypass ramp  
(Rmp_Bypass)  
MA contactor closed sequencer task status;  
(Seq_Stat.MA_Enb_ real or modeled contactor status  
Stat)  
(Lan_Rmp_Byp)  
Auto mode req, lan  
(Lan_Auto_Req)  
Auto mode select  
(Auto_Adr)  
Auto mode active  
(Auto_Mode)  
result of Auto mode requests  
Behavior 2  
speed feedback is below zero speed  
(after delay)  
20  
Not Used  
Zero speed active  
(Zero_Spd)  
21-24 Not Used  
Not Used  
25  
GP lan req bit 01  
general purpose bool var GP lan fbk bit 01  
(Lan_B01_Fbk)  
GP lan fb bit 01 sel  
(Lan_B01_Adr)  
(Lan_B01_Req)  
.
.
.
32  
GP lan req bit 08  
(Lan_B08_Req)  
general purpose bool var GP lan fbk bit 08  
(Lan_B08_Fbk)  
GP lan fb bit 08 sel  
(Lan_B08_Adr)  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Chapter 5 Signal Mapping • 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
5-10 • Chapter 5 Signal Mapping  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A Function Block Diagrams  
Introduction  
Application firmware consists of coordinated blocks of code called functions (refer  
to Chapter 3). The drawings in this section are function block diagrams for the  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage – GP Type G drive.  
To prevent personal injury or equipment damage caused by  
equipment malfunction, only adequately trained personnel  
should modify any programmable machine.  
Note These diagrams are available as navigable, online drawings in the optional  
Windows®-based drive configuration software, the GE Control System Toolbox.  
Diagram Title  
Page Name  
ACMVAC-G Overview..............................................................................Overview  
ACMVAC-G Inverter Index........................................................................Contents  
Digital Inputs/Outputs & Mapping...........................................................HWIO_Dig  
Analog Inputs/Outputs & Mapping.........................................................HWIO_Ana  
Drive Lan Signal Map.........................................................................SigMap_LAN  
Drive Lan Boolean Signals (bits 0 – 15)................................................SigMap_Bit1  
Drive Lan Boolean Signals (bits 16 – 31)..............................................SigMap_Bit2  
Sequencing Overview.................................................................................. Ovr_Seq  
General Sequencing #1..............................................................................Gen_Seq1  
General Sequencing #2..............................................................................Gen_Seq2  
General Sequencing #3..............................................................................Gen_Seq3  
General Sequencing #4..............................................................................Gen_Seq4  
General Sequencing #5..............................................................................Gen_Seq5  
Speed Reference Generation..................................................................... Ovr_RfSel  
Critical Speed Avoidance ......................................................................... CrSpdAvd  
Speed Reference Ramp ................................................................................... Ramp  
Speed / Torque Overview......................................................................... Ovr_SpTq  
Speed Feedback ..........................................................................................Spd_Fbk  
Speed Regulator............................................................................................... SReg  
Droop .............................................................................................................Droop  
GEH-6385 Reference and Trouleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Appendix A Function Block Diagrams • A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagram Title  
Page Name  
Motor Control Interface..................................................................................... Core  
Motor Control......................................................................................... Ovr_MCtrl  
Diagnostic & Utility Functions.................................................................. Diag_Util  
Signal Level Detection ...................................................................................... SLD  
Capture Buffer Configuration....................................................................... Capture  
Positive Feedback Instrument........................................................................ PosFbk  
A-2 • Appendix A Function Block Diagrams  
Innovation Series Medium Voltage GP Type - G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F o r m a t C o n v e r t  
R a n g e E x t e n d  
L a t c h  
C o u n t e r  
U p / D o w n  
A - q u a d - B D e c o d e L o g i c  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
Enter, 4-12, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-24, 4-25, 4-26, 4-  
27, 4-28, 4-29, 4-38, 4-40  
Ethernet, 5-2  
Index  
F
Faults, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 2-13, 2-19, 2-36, 5-7, 5-8  
A-B voltage offset, 2-21, 3-58, 3-59  
AC filter fuse blown, 2-10  
AC line failed, 2-34  
AC line freq high, 2-18, 3-70, 4-34  
AC line freq low, 2-19, 3-70, 4-34  
AC line over freq, 2-17, 3-70, 4-34  
AC line over voltage, 2-16, 3-70, 4-33  
AC line rev phs seq, 2-33, 3-71, 3-73  
AC line transient, 2-32, 2-33, 3-68, 3-69  
AC line under freq, 2-18, 3-70, 4-34  
AC line under volt, 2-17, 3-70, 4-33  
AC line voltage high, 2-16, 3-70, 4-33  
AC line volts low, 2-17, 3-70, 4-33  
AC line watchdog, 2-33, 3-68, 3-69  
ADL msg stack fail, 2-22  
1
115VAC, 3-55  
2
24 VDC, 3-33  
Ain 1 signal alarm, 2-23  
Ain 1 signal trip, 2-23  
Ain 2 signal alarm, 2-24  
Ain 2 signal trip, 2-24  
B
bar graph, 3-26  
baud rate, 3-36  
Ambient over temp, 2-20, 3-57  
Ambient temp hot, 2-20, 3-57  
Ambient temp low, 2-12, 3-57  
B-C voltage offset, 2-21, 3-58, 3-59  
Bic Watchdog, 2-36  
Bic watchdog echo, 2-36  
BICM card hot, 3-58  
BICM card over temp, 3-58  
BICM card temp low, 3-58  
C
CB1, 4-5, 4-8  
Control Cards  
IS200ACL_ Application Control, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 3-  
38, 5-2, 5-3  
IS200ATBA Application I/O TB, 3-55  
IS200BAIA Basic I/O, 3-32  
IS200BICM Bridge Interface, 3-56, 3-58, 3-66  
IS200CTBC Drive I/O TB, 3-33  
IS200DSPX Motor Control, 3-38, 5-1  
IS200FOSA Fiber Optic Hub, 3-56, 4-6  
IS200IGDM Gate Driver, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 4-9  
Control System Toolbox, 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 2-22, 3-8,  
3-9, 3-25, 3-28, 5-1  
Ckt board list fail, 2-21  
Cont failed to close, 3-87  
Customer use NC alm, 2-35  
Customer use NC flt, 2-35, 3-52  
Customer use NO alm, 2-35  
Customer use NO flt, 2-35, 3-52  
DC bus over voltage, 2-9, 3-53  
DC bus under voltage, 2-10, 3-53  
DC bus voltage low, 3-53, 3-77  
DSPx Watchdog, 2-36  
D
DC Bus  
Charging, 4-5, 4-7, 4-8, 4-10  
Overvoltage, 3-71, 3-73, 4-33  
Undervoltage, 3-71, 3-73, 4-33  
DDI, 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26, 3-27, 3-28, 3-29, 3-30, 3-  
74, 3-78, 3-79, 3-82, 3-85, 3-90, 3-91, 3-93, 3-97,  
3-98, 3-111, 4-23, 4-32  
DSPX Board, 2-2, 2-4, 2-5, 2-9, 2-10, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18,  
2-19, 2-21, 2-22, 2-32, 2-33, 2-34, 2-36, 2-37, 2-  
38, 5-1  
EE erase failed, 2-5  
EE flash corrupted, 2-4  
Failure to rotate, 3-103, 3-104  
Fault LED, 2-2  
Fault reset, 3-40, 3-74, 3-75, 5-8  
Flying restrt disabl, 3-77, 3-78, 4-17  
Frame PLL not OK, 2-38, 3-35, 3-38  
Gnd flt, coarse, 2-5, 3-54  
Ground flt alm, LP, 2-10, 3-66, 3-67  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Index • 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ground flt, LP, 2-10  
TOC pending, 2-6, 3-62  
HtSink A over temp, 2-13, 3-57  
HtSink A rise high, 2-15, 3-57  
HtSink A temp hot, 2-14, 3-57  
HtSink A temp low, 2-12, 3-57  
HtSink B over temp, 2-13, 3-57  
HtSink B rise high, 2-15, 3-57  
HtSink B temp hot, 2-14, 3-57  
HtSink B temp low, 2-12, 3-57  
HtSink blower failed, 3-58  
HtSink C over temp, 2-14, 3-57  
HtSink C rise high, 2-15, 3-57  
HtSink C temp hot, 2-14, 3-57  
HtSink C temp low, 2-12, 3-57  
HtSink DB over temp, 3-57  
HtSink DB rise high, 3-57  
Tool requested trip, 2-4  
Unrecognized IPN, 2-34  
Version mismatch, 2-37  
X stop, 3-40, 3-42, 3-76, 3-81, 4-18, 5-8  
Xfrmr over temp, 2-34, 3-65  
Xfrmr temp hot, 2-34, 3-65  
firmware, 3-1, 3-21, 3-25, 3-34, A-1  
Functions  
Analog and Digital I/O Testing, 3-30, 3-32  
Analog Inputs/Outputs and Mapping, 3-32, 4-10, 4-32  
Capture Buffer, 3-4, 3-5, 3-9, A-2  
Control Diagnostic Variables, 3-19  
Critical Speed Avoidance, 3-89, 3-90, 3-91, 3-92, 3-  
94, 3-96, A-1  
Custom User Faults, 3-52  
HtSink DB temp hot, 3-57  
DC Link Protection, 3-52, 3-53  
HtSink DB temp low, 3-57  
HtSink DS over temp, 3-58  
HtSink DS rise high, 3-58  
Diagnostic and Utility Overview, 3-4  
Digital Inputs/Outputs and Mapping, 3-33  
Droop, 3-39, 3-40, 3-99, 3-107, 5-7, 5-9, A-1  
Fault Reset Logic, 3-74  
HtSink DS temp hot, 3-58  
HtSink DS temp low, 3-58  
Flux Curve, 3-45, 4-15  
HtSink temp imbalanc, 2-15, 3-58  
Illegal seq state, 2-3  
Invalid board set, 2-22  
Invalid Time Base, 2-35  
LAN alarm request, 2-36  
LAN heartbeat alarm, 2-37, 3-36, 3-37  
LAN heartbeat trip, 2-37, 3-36, 3-37  
LAN trip request, 2-36  
LAN watchdog alarm, 2-37  
Local flt, 2-4, 3-55, 3-77, 3-78, 4-38  
Loss of spd control, 3-103, 3-104  
Motor over temp, 3-59, 3-60  
Motor temp hot, 3-59, 3-60  
Over speed, 3-103  
Frame Phaselock Loop, 3-34, 3-35, 3-37, 3-38  
General Purpose Constants, 3-4, 3-10  
General Purpose Filters, 3-4, 3-11  
Ground Fault Protection (Fast), 3-54  
Hardware Fault Strings, 3-55, 3-77, 4-38  
Heatsink Thermal Protection, 2-11, 2-12, 2-13, 2-14,  
2-15, 3-56, 3-57  
Intelligent Part Number (IPN), 2-34, 3-20, 4-11  
Keypad Contrast Adjustment, 3-24, 3-25  
Keypad Meter Configuration, 3-24, 3-25  
Keypad Overview, 3-24  
Keypad Security Configuration, 3-24, 3-27  
LAN Configuration and Health, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 3-  
37, 5-4  
Phase A cur offset, 2-20, 3-60, 3-61  
Phase B cur offset, 2-20, 3-60, 3-61  
Phase C cur offset, 2-20, 3-60, 3-61  
Power dip, 3-49, 3-50, 4-27  
Restrictd fcn enabld, 2-37  
LAN Overview, 3-34  
LAN Signal Map, 3-34, 3-36, 3-38, 3-39, 3-40, 3-41,  
3-42, 3-43, 3-74, 3-81, 3-82, 3-83, 3-85  
Language and Units Presentation, 3-10, 3-28, 4-11  
Language Display, 3-24, 3-29  
Reverse rotation, 3-103, 3-104  
Run before MA closed, 3-78, 3-87  
Run cmd during init, 2-4  
Leakage Inductance Curve, 3-46  
Line Monitor, 3-69, 3-70, 3-71, 3-72, 3-73, 4-33, 4-34  
Line Simulator, 3-19, 3-20  
Run cmd w high flux, 3-77, 3-78, 3-84, 3-113  
Run permissive lost, 3-76, 3-78  
Run req & xstop open, 3-76, 3-78, 3-81, 4-18  
Start permissive bad, 3-76, 3-78  
System flt, 2-6, 3-55, 3-77, 3-78, 4-38  
System ISBus error, 2-37, 3-38  
Tach loss alarm, 3-51, 4-16  
Tach loss trip, 3-51, 4-16  
Line Transfer, 3-46, 3-48, 4-28, 4-29, 4-30  
Line-Line Voltage Protection, 2-21, 3-58  
Local Speed Reference, 3-83, 3-90, 3-91, 3-93, 3-98,  
4-15  
Main Contactor Configuration, 3-74, 3-75, 3-86, 3-87  
Minimum Speed Limit, 3-89, 3-91, 3-92, 3-94  
Motor Control Interface, 3-39, 3-40, 3-44, 3-100, 3-  
101, 3-102, 3-103, 3-107, A-2  
Task 1 exec overrun, 2-22  
Motor Control Overview, 3-44  
Task 2 exec overrun, 2-22  
Task 3 exec overrun, 2-22  
Timed over current, 2-4, 3-62  
Motor Equivalent Circuit, 3-44, 3-48  
Motor Ground Protection, 2-10, 3-66, 3-67  
Motor Overtemperature Detection, 2-34, 3-59, 3-60  
2 • Index  
Innovation Series Meduim Voltage GP – Type G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor Temperature Estimation, 3-49  
Oscillator, 3-4, 3-12  
Phase Current Protection, 3-60  
Phase Imbalance Monitor, 3-68, 3-69, 3-71, 3-73  
Phase Lock Loop, 3-68, 3-69, 3-71, 3-72, 3-73  
Position Feedback, 3-4, 3-13  
K
keypad, 3-1, 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26, 3-27, 3-28, 3-29, 3-  
30, 3-74, 3-78, 3-79, 3-82, 3-85, 3-90, 3-91, 3-93,  
3-97, 3-98, 3-111, 4-23, 4-32, 5-1, 5-3  
Keypad, 2-2, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26, 3-27  
Power Dip Protection, 3-44, 3-49, 3-50, 4-27  
Predefined Constants, 3-4, 3-14  
Primary Motor & Application Data, 3-21, 4-12, 4-13,  
4-15  
L
LSW1, 4-5, 4-8  
Remote Speed Reference, 3-83, 3-92, 3-93, 3-98  
Sequencer Commands, 3-74, 3-77, 3-79, 3-82, 3-86,  
3-91, 3-93, 3-113  
M
menu, 3-8, 3-25, 3-29, 4-27  
Menu, 3-25, 3-26, 3-28, 3-30  
Meter, 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26, 3-31, 3-32  
Sequencer Overview, 3-74  
Sequencer Permissives, 2-5, 2-6, 2-11, 2-15, 2-25, 3-  
74, 3-75, 3-76, 3-79, 3-82, 3-85, 3-96  
Sequencer Status, 3-74, 3-85, 3-96  
Signal Level Detector (SLD), 3-4, 3-15  
Simulator, 3-4, 3-18, 3-19, 3-20, 3-30, 4-27, 4-38  
Speed Control Fault Check, 3-103  
N
Navigation, 3-24  
Speed Feedback Calculation, 3-105, 3-106, 3-107, 3-  
113, 4-16  
O
Speed Reference Generation, 3-39, 3-40, 3-89, 3-90,  
3-91, 3-92, 3-93, 3-94, 3-96, 3-97, 3-98, 3-106, A-  
1
Speed Reference Ramp, 3-40, 3-80, 3-81, 3-85, 3-89,  
3-94, 3-96, 3-97, 4-17, 4-18, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-  
23, A-1  
Outputs  
Analog, 3-31, 4-10, 4-35  
Digital, 3-32, 3-33  
P
Speed Reference Reverse, 3-92, 3-94, 3-97, 3-98  
Speed/Torque Overview, 3-94, 3-96, 3-106, 3-107  
Speed/Torque Regulator, 3-39, 3-40, 3-42, 3-86, 3-94,  
3-96, 3-102, 3-107, 3-108, 3-109, 3-110, 4-23, 4-  
24, 4-25  
Stopping Commands, 2-11  
Stopping Commands and Modes, 3-74, 3-76, 3-77, 3-  
78, 3-82, 3-85, 3-94, 3-97, 4-19  
Parameter Configuration for Signal Mapping, 1-1, 5-3  
Parameters  
A-B volt fault scale, 3-19  
AC grid frequency, 3-73  
Accel break point 1, 3-95, 3-96, 4-22, 4-23  
Accel break point 2, 3-95, 3-96, 4-22, 4-23  
Acceleration rate 1, 3-95, 3-96, 4-21, 4-22  
Acceleration rate 2, 3-95, 3-96, 4-21, 4-22  
Acceleration rate 3, 3-95, 3-96, 4-22  
Adj cur lim ref sel, 3-100, 3-102  
Adj gen trq lim sel, 3-100, 3-102  
Adj mtr trq lim sel, 3-100, 3-102  
Analog in 1 filter, 3-32  
Tach Loss Detection, 3-50, 3-51, 3-113, 4-16  
Timed Overcurrent Detection, 3-61, 3-62, 4-13  
Transformer Overtemperature Detection, 3-65  
H
Analog in 1 flt lev, 2-23, 3-32  
Analog in 1 flt mode, 2-23, 3-32  
Analog in 1 gain, 2-23, 3-32  
Analog in 1 offset, 2-23, 3-32  
Analog in 2 filter, 3-32  
Analog in 2 flt lev, 2-24, 3-32  
Analog in 2 flt mode, 2-24, 3-32  
Analog in 2 gain, 2-24, 3-32  
Analog in 2 offset, 2-24, 3-32  
Analog meter 1 scale, 3-32  
Heartbeat, 3-36, 3-37, 3-40, 3-42, 5-4, 5-5, 5-8  
I
Inputs  
Analog, 3-30, 3-32, 3-48, 3-66, 3-92, 3-93, 4-30, 5-1  
Digital, 3-31, 3-33, 3-52, 3-60, 3-65  
ISBus, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 3-37, 3-38, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-6  
J
Analog meter 1 sel, 3-32  
Analog meter 3 test, 3-31  
Analog meter 4 test, 3-31  
Analog out 1 offset, 3-32  
Jog, 3-40, 3-42, 3-78, 3-79, 3-82, 3-83, 3-90, 3-91, 3-  
92, 3-93, 4-18, 4-19, 4-20, 5-8  
Analog out 1 scale, 3-32  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Index • 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Analog out 1 select, 3-32  
Ext sim spd sel, 3-18  
Analog out 1 test, 3-31  
Ext sim trq sel, 3-18  
Anticipated torque, 3-47, 4-29  
Applied top RPM, 3-22, 3-91, 4-15  
Auto analog ref sel, 3-92, 3-93, 5-7  
Auto mode select, 3-92, 3-93, 5-9  
Bypass Q/C stop, 3-77, 3-80, 4-17, 4-19  
Calculated spd fil, 3-106  
Calibrate VCO offset, 4-32  
Cap re-enable delay, 3-6  
Capture buff config, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6  
Capture ch1 select, 3-4  
Capture ch2 select, 3-4  
Capture ch3 select, 3-4  
Capture ch4 select, 3-4  
Capture ch5 select, 3-4  
Capture ch6 select, 3-4  
Capture ch7 select, 3-4  
Capture ch8 select, 3-4  
Capture mtr req sel, 3-47, 4-29  
Capture period, 3-5, 3-6  
Fault reset select, 3-74, 5-8  
Fixed ext sim spd, 3-18  
Fixed inertia, 3-108, 3-109, 3-111  
Flux curve amps 1, 3-45  
Flux curve amps 2, 3-45  
Flux curve amps 3, 3-45  
Flux curve amps 4, 3-45  
Flux curve amps 5, 3-45  
Flux curve voltage 1, 3-45  
Flux curve voltage 2, 3-45  
Flux curve voltage 3, 3-45  
Flux curve voltage 4, 3-45  
Flux curve voltage 5, 3-45  
Flux off delay time, 3-80, 4-17  
Flux ref ratio sel, 3-100, 3-102, 3-103  
Flux ref ratio setpt, 3-100, 3-102, 3-103  
Flying restart, 3-77, 3-80, 3-81, 3-83, 3-84, 3-96, 4-  
17, 4-18  
Full flux req sel, 3-83, 3-84, 5-8  
Gnd flt coarse trip, 3-54  
Gnd signal alarm off, 3-66, 3-67  
Gnd signal alarm on, 3-66, 3-67  
Gnd signal fil, 3-66  
Capture period gain, 3-5, 3-6  
Capture pre trigger, 3-7  
Capture trig level, 3-7  
Capture trig select, 3-7  
Capture trigger mode, 3-7  
Capture trigger type, 3-7  
Gnd signal scl, 3-66  
Gnd signal sel, 3-66  
Crit speed avoidance, 3-89  
Critical speed 1, 3-89, 3-90  
Critical speed 2, 3-89, 3-90  
Critical speed 3, 3-89, 3-90  
Critical speed hys, 3-89, 3-90  
Crossover Voltage, 3-22, 3-44, 4-13  
Current limit 1, 3-102, 4-26, 4-27  
Current limit 2, 3-102, 4-26, 4-27  
Custom pwr dip time, 3-49, 3-50  
DC bus region max, 3-53  
Gnd signal trip lvl, 3-66, 3-67  
GP Constant 1, 3-10  
GP Constant 2, 3-10  
GP Constant 3, 3-10  
GP filter 1 bndwth, 3-11  
GP filter 1 sel, 3-11  
GP filter 2 bndwth, 3-11  
GP filter 2 sel, 3-11  
GP filter 3 bndwth, 3-11  
GP filter 3 sel, 3-11  
DC bus region min, 3-53  
GP filter 4 bndwth, 3-11  
GP filter 4 sel, 3-11  
Decel break point 1, 3-95, 3-96  
Decel break point 2, 3-95, 3-96  
Deceleration rate 1, 3-95, 3-96, 4-21, 4-22  
Deceleration rate 2, 3-95, 3-96, 4-21, 4-22  
Deceleration rate 3, 3-95, 3-96, 4-22  
Detector mode, 3-66  
GP lan fbk bit 1 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 2 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 3 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 4 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 5 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 6 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 7 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 8 sel, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk reg 1 sel, 3-41  
GP lan fbk reg 2 sel, 3-41  
GP lan fbk reg 3 sel, 3-41  
GP lan fbk reg 4 sel, 3-41  
I/O test mode req, 3-30  
Disable TOC profile, 3-61, 3-64  
Display units, 3-28, 3-29  
Droop comp ref sel, 3-99, 5-7  
Droop deadband, neg, 3-99  
Droop deadband, pos, 3-99  
Droop disable sel, 3-99, 5-9  
Droop feedback fil, 3-99  
Droop gain, 3-99  
Emerg ramp rate, 3-81, 3-94, 3-97, 4-18  
Enb adaptv full flx, 3-84, 3-113  
Exec time/Chop freq, 3-112  
Ext sim spd enb sel, 3-18  
Inh sim Loc/Sys flt, 3-55  
IPN frame size, 4-11  
IPN shunt size, 4-11  
IPN volt rating, 3-50, 4-11  
4 • Index  
Innovation Series Meduim Voltage GP – Type G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jog request select, 3-79, 3-82, 4-19, 5-8  
Keypad contrast adj, 3-25  
Keypad meter 1 range, 3-26  
Keypad meter 1 ref, 3-26  
Keypad meter 1 sel, 3-26  
Keypad meter 2 range, 3-26  
Keypad meter 2 sel, 3-26  
Keypad meter 3 range, 3-26  
Keypad meter 3 sel, 3-26  
Keypad meter 4 range, 3-26  
Keypad meter 4 sel, 3-26  
Keypad password, 3-27  
Motor protect class, 3-61, 3-62, 3-64  
Motor rated current, 3-22, 3-101, 3-102, 4-12  
Motor rated freq, 3-22, 3-103, 4-12  
Motor rated power, 3-22, 3-102, 4-12  
Motor rated rpm, 3-22, 3-50, 3-102, 4-12, 4-13, 4-14  
Motor rated voltage, 3-22, 3-103, 4-12, 4-13  
Motor service factor, 3-114, 4-12  
Motor tach PPR, 3-106, 4-16  
Motor winding cfg, 3-114, 4-14  
Motoring torque lim1, 3-102, 4-26  
Motoring torque lim2, 3-102, 4-26  
Network interface, 2-37, 2-38, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 3-38  
Normal stop mode, 3-77, 3-80, 4-17, 4-19  
Oscillator 1/2 cycle, 3-12  
Keypad privilege, 3-27  
LAN cmds inhibit, 3-36  
LAN fbk avg time, 3-36, 3-41, 5-6  
LAN frame time, 2-38, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 5-6  
LAN heartbeat time, 2-37, 3-36  
LAN parameter 1, 3-36  
Oscillator enable, 3-12  
Oscillator neg mag, 3-12  
Oscillator pos mag, 3-12  
Output freq fil, 3-106  
LAN parameter 16, 3-36  
Over freq alm clear, 3-70, 4-34  
Over freq alm level, 3-70, 4-34  
Over freq flt level, 3-70, 4-34  
Over speed flt level, 3-103  
Park level, 4-36  
Park phase, 4-36  
Phase rotation, 2-33  
Phase rotation req, 3-71, 3-73  
Pos sample cmd sel, 3-13  
Post pulse off time, 4-37  
LAN trips inhibit, 2-37, 3-36  
Language, 3-10, 3-24, 3-28, 3-29, 3-30, 4-11  
Line frq check fil, 3-70  
Line OV alarm clear, 3-70, 4-33  
Line OV alarm level, 3-70, 4-33  
Line OV fault level, 3-70, 4-33  
Line reference, 3-46, 4-29  
Line UV alarm clear, 3-70, 4-33  
Line UV alarm level, 3-70, 4-33  
Line UV fault level, 3-70, 4-33  
Line volt check fil, 3-70  
Power dip control, 3-49, 3-50  
Preflux Forcing, 3-114  
Local Inc/Dec rate, 3-90, 3-91, 4-23  
Local jog speed, 3-90, 3-91, 4-20  
Local speed, 3-90, 3-91, 3-111  
LP fuse blown sel, 3-66  
Pulse 1 on time, 4-37  
Pulse 2 on time, 4-37  
Pulse level, 4-36  
Pulse phase, 4-36  
MA close req sel, 3-33, 3-87, 3-88  
MA contactor absent, 3-33, 3-87, 3-88  
MA contactor fbk, 3-33, 3-87, 3-88  
MA pickup time, 3-87, 3-88, 4-29  
Magnetizing react Xm, 3-48, 4-15  
Man analog ref sel, 3-92, 3-93, 4-19  
Manual speed ref sel, 3-92, 3-93, 4-19  
Max forward speed, 3-106, 4-20  
Max reverse speed, 4-20  
Quantize Sim Spd, 3-106  
Ramp bypass, 3-94, 3-96, 5-9  
Ramp rate 2 select, 3-95, 3-96, 4-21, 5-9  
Ramp rate mode, 3-94, 3-95, 3-96  
Rated rotor temp, 3-48, 4-15  
Regen torque lim 1, 3-102, 4-26  
Regen torque lim 2, 3-102, 4-26  
Regulator type, 3-109, 3-110, 3-111  
Relay 1 select, 3-33  
Measure Lsigma, 4-32  
Relay 1 test, 3-32  
Measure R1, 4-32  
Relay 2 test, 3-32  
Measure R2, 4-32  
Relay 3 select, 3-33  
Meter 1 mode, 3-32  
Relay 3 test, 3-32  
Meter 1 offset, 3-32  
Mid pulse off time, 4-37  
Remote jog speed, 3-92, 3-93, 4-20  
Rev rotation fault, 3-104  
Minimum speed, 3-91, 3-92  
Motor ambient temp, 3-48, 3-49  
Motor ctrl alg sel, 3-51, 3-84, 3-112, 4-16  
Motor efficiency, 3-113, 4-12  
Motor OT fault mode, 3-59, 3-60  
Motor OT fault sel, 3-59, 3-60  
Motor poles, 3-22, 4-13  
Reverse select, 3-97, 3-98, 4-19, 5-8  
Rotate fail delay, 3-104  
Rotate fail flt lvl, 3-104  
Rotate fail spd lim, 3-104  
Rotor cold res R2, 3-48, 4-15  
Rotor hot res R2, 3-48, 4-15  
Rotor lkg react X2, 3-48, 4-15  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Index • 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Run permissive sel, 3-76, 4-19  
Run request select, 3-79, 3-82, 4-19, 5-8  
Sim A-N volt scale, 3-19  
Sim B-N volt scale, 3-19  
Sim C-N volt scale, 3-19  
Stator hot res R1, 3-48, 4-15  
Stator lkg react X1, 3-48, 4-15  
Stop PB select, 3-79, 3-82, 4-19  
Stop PB select, lan, 3-79, 3-82  
Sys ISBus node #, 3-36  
Sim const friction, 3-18, 4-27, 4-38  
Tach loss fault mode, 3-51  
Sim freq slew rate, 3-19  
Tach speed filter, 3-106  
Sim line frequency, 3-19  
Sim visc friction, 3-18  
Simulate mode, 2-36, 3-18, 3-20, 3-30, 4-7, 4-10  
Simulated inertia, 3-18, 4-27, 4-38  
Simulated load, 3-18, 4-27  
Simulated stiction, 3-18  
Torque feed fwd sel, 3-108, 3-109, 3-110, 5-7  
Torque lim 2 sel, 3-100, 3-102, 4-26, 4-27, 5-9  
Torque limit res, 4-25  
Torque mode sel, 3-108, 3-109, 3-110, 3-111, 4-24, 5-  
8
Torque overload, 4-25  
SLD1 compare mode, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17  
SLD1 drop out delay, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17  
SLD1 hysteresis, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17  
SLD1 input 1 abs val, 3-15, 3-16  
SLD1 input 1 select, 3-15, 3-16  
SLD1 input 2 select, 3-15, 3-16  
SLD1 pick up delay, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17  
SLD1 sensitivity, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17  
SLD2 compare mode, 3-15  
SLD2 drop out delay, 3-15  
SLD2 hysteresis, 3-15  
Torque ref select, 3-108, 3-109, 3-110, 4-24, 5-7  
Torque reg stop mode, 3-109, 3-111  
Transfer mtr req sel, 3-47, 4-28  
Type of Cell Test, 4-4  
Under freq alarm clr, 3-70, 4-34  
Under freq alm level, 3-70, 4-34  
Under freq flt level, 3-70, 4-34  
Use phase A-B, 4-32  
Use phase B-C, 4-32  
User NC fault sel, 2-35, 3-52  
User NO fault sel, 2-35, 3-52  
Utility feed, 3-71, 3-73  
SLD2 input 1 abs val, 3-15  
SLD2 input 1 select, 3-15  
Utility phase offset, 4-30  
SLD2 input 2 select, 3-15  
Utility swgr close, 4-29  
SLD2 pick up delay, 3-15  
Utility swgr open, 4-29  
SLD2 sensitivity, 3-15  
Utility volt scale, 4-30  
SLD3 compare mode, 3-15  
SLD3 drop out delay, 3-15  
SLD3 hysteresis, 3-15  
Variable inertia sel, 3-108, 3-109, 3-111  
Volt short time, 3-19  
X stop mode, 3-81, 4-18  
SLD3 input 1 abs val, 3-15  
SLD3 input 1 select, 3-15  
SLD3 input 2 select, 3-15  
X stop request sel, 3-81, 4-18, 5-8  
Xfrmr OT fault mode, 3-65  
Xfrmr OT fault sel, 2-34, 3-65  
Zero speed delay, 3-85  
SLD3 pick up delay, 3-15  
SLD3 sensitivity, 3-15  
Spd ctl loss delay, 3-104  
Zero speed level, 3-42, 3-77, 3-80, 3-81, 3-85, 3-104,  
4-17, 4-18  
Spd ctl loss flt lvl, 3-104  
phase leg, 4-5  
Spd fbk display fil, 3-106  
Spd reg init val sel, 3-109, 3-110  
Spd reg integral gn, 3-109  
Phase Lock Loop, 3-68, 3-69, 3-72, 3-73, 5-4  
Power Dip Response, 3-44, 3-49, 3-50, 4-27  
Power Supplies, 3-103  
Spd reg neg err lim, 3-109, 3-110, 3-111, 4-25  
Spd reg net gain, 3-108, 3-109  
Spd reg pos err lim, 3-109, 3-110, 3-111, 4-25  
Spd reg prop cmd gn, 3-109  
Spd reg prop fbk gn, 3-109  
Spd reg prop filter, 3-109  
Processor  
DSPXBoard, 2-2, 2-4, 2-5, 2-9, 2-10, 2-16, 2-17, 2-  
18, 2-19, 2-21, 2-22, 2-32, 2-33, 2-34, 2-36, 2-37,  
2-38, 5-1  
Profibus, 3-34, 3-36, 5-2  
Speed feedback fil, 3-106  
S
Speed loop sum sel, 3-106, 5-7  
Speed setpoint 0, 3-92, 3-93, 4-19  
SS relay driver sel, 3-33  
Signal Mapping  
Parameter Configuration, 1-1, 5-1  
switchgear, 3-47, 4-5, 4-7, 4-8, 4-10, 4-29  
SS relay driver test, 3-32  
Start permissive sel, 3-76  
Starting react Xst, 3-48, 4-15  
Stator cold res R1, 3-48, 4-15  
6 • Index  
Innovation Series Meduim Voltage GP – Type G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Constant float 0.0, 3-14  
Constant float 1.0, 3-14  
Constant float -1.0, 3-14  
Constant integer -1, 3-14  
Constant integer0, 3-14  
Constant integer1, 3-14  
T
tachometer, 3-13, 3-44, 3-50, 3-51, 3-105, 3-106, 3-  
107, 3-112, 4-16  
Timed overcurent, 3-62, 3-64  
Toolbox, Control System, 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 3-9, 3-25  
Current limit, 3-44, 3-101, 3-102, 4-26, 4-27  
DB heat sink temp, 3-56, 3-57  
DC bus charged, 3-52, 3-76, 3-77  
DC bus excursion, 3-52, 3-53  
DC bus feedback, 2-5, 3-49, 3-52, 3-53  
DC bus voltage, 2-7, 2-9, 2-10, 2-19, 2-21, 3-52, 3-  
53, 3-77, 4-7, 4-10, 4-36  
DC neut volt mag, 3-66  
Digital input 1, 3-31, 3-33, 3-52, 3-60, 3-65  
Digital input 1 test, 3-31  
Digital input 2, 3-31  
Digital input 2 test, 3-31  
Digital input 3, 3-31  
Digital input 3 test, 3-31  
Digital input 4, 3-31  
Digital input 4 test, 3-31  
Digital input 5, 3-31  
Digital input 5 test, 3-31  
V
Variable Mapping, 5-4  
Application of Feedback Signals, 3-13, 5-6  
Applying the LAN Heartbeat Echo Feature, 2-37, 5-2,  
5-4, 5-5  
Variable Maps, 1-1, 1-2, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-  
10, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2-34, 2-36, 3-4, 3-12, 3-13,  
3-26, 5-1, 5-4, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9  
Real Variable Map, 5-7, 5-8  
Variables  
100% Applied RPM, 3-22  
100% Flux, 3-23, 3-77  
100% Flux current, 3-23  
100% Motor current, 3-22, 4-25  
100% Motor power, 3-22  
100% Motor torque, 3-23, 3-101, 4-25  
100% Motor voltage, 3-22  
100% Slip, 3-23  
100% Torque current, 3-23  
A-B, Voltage offset, 2-21, 3-58, 3-59  
AC line frequency, 2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 3-19, 3-70  
AC line loss, 3-68, 3-69  
AC line magnitude, 3-68, 3-69, 3-72  
AC line voltage, 2-16, 2-17, 3-19  
AC line voltage mag, 3-19, 3-70, 3-72, 3-73  
Alarm request, lan, 2-36, 3-40, 5-8  
Ambient temp, 2-11, 2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 2-20  
Analog input 1, 2-23, 3-30, 3-32  
Analog input 1 volts, 3-30  
Digital input 6, 3-31, 3-33, 3-52, 3-60, 3-65  
Digital input 6 test, 3-31  
Droop comp ref, 3-39, 3-99, 5-7  
Droop comp ref, lan, 3-39, 5-7  
Droop disab req, lan, 3-40, 5-9  
Droop feedback, 3-99  
Droop output, 3-99  
DS heat sink temp, 3-56, 3-58  
Elect angle command, 3-72  
Electric angle fbk, 3-72  
Emergency stop act, 3-94, 3-97  
Enable spd reg out, 3-108  
Ext ref feedback, 3-48  
Ext ref phase AB, 3-48  
Fault number, 3-41, 5-7  
Analog input 2, 2-24, 3-30, 3-32  
Analog input 2 volts, 3-30  
Auto mode active, 3-42, 5-9  
Auto mode req, lan, 3-40, 5-9  
Auto speed ref, lan, 3-39, 5-7  
B-C, Voltage offset, 2-21, 3-58, 3-59  
BIC ambient temp, 3-56  
Bridge ambient temp, 3-56, 3-57, 3-58  
Bridge is on, 3-42, 3-75, 3-85, 5-8  
Calculated speed, 3-105, 3-106  
Capture buffer depth, 3-5  
Capture buffer ready, 3-5  
Capture buffer stat, 3-5  
Capture motor cmd, 3-47  
Capture motor req, 3-47  
Fault reset req, lan, 3-40, 3-74, 5-8  
Flux current, avg, 3-100, 3-101  
Flux decay active, 3-77  
Flux enable request, 3-86  
Flux enable status, 3-42, 3-75, 3-86  
Flux ref ratio, 3-44, 3-100, 3-101, 3-102, 3-103  
Flux reference, 3-39, 5-7  
Flux reference, lan, 3-39, 5-7  
Force False, 3-14, 3-60  
Force True, 3-14  
FPLL Freq Output, 3-34, 3-35, 3-37, 3-38, 5-4  
FPLL Phase error, 3-34, 3-35, 3-37, 3-38  
Frame PLL OK status, 3-34, 3-35, 3-37, 3-38, 5-4  
Full flux command, 3-83, 3-84  
Full flux req, lan, 3-40, 3-83, 3-84, 5-8  
Full flux request, 3-77, 3-80, 3-82, 3-84, 4-17, 4-18  
Gnd cur signal, 3-66, 3-67  
Capture samp period, 3-5  
Capture triggered, 3-5  
Capture trq feed fwd, 3-47  
Coast stop active, 3-77, 3-85, 4-19  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Index • 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gnd current, coarse, 3-54  
Gnd flt trip, 3-66, 3-67  
Line monitor volt, 3-70, 3-71, 3-73  
Line xfer enabled, 3-46  
Gnd flt warning, 3-66, 3-67  
GP Constant 1, 3-10  
GP Constant 2, 3-10  
Local dec command, 3-90, 3-91  
Local fault string, 3-33, 3-42, 3-55, 3-77, 4-27, 5-8  
Local fault test, 3-31  
GP Constant 3, 3-10  
GP filter 1 output, 3-11  
GP filter 2 output, 3-11  
Local inc command, 3-90, 3-91  
Local mode active, 3-82, 3-90, 3-91, 3-93, 3-97, 3-98,  
4-19  
GP filter 3 output, 3-11  
GP filter 4 output, 3-11  
Local rev request, 3-97, 3-98  
LP fuse stat, 3-66  
GP lan fbk bit 1, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 2, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 3, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 4, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 5, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 6, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 7, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk bit 8, 3-42, 3-43  
GP lan fbk reg 1, 3-41, 5-7  
GP lan fbk reg 2, 3-41, 5-7  
GP lan fbk reg 3, 3-41, 5-7  
GP lan fbk reg 4, 3-41, 5-7  
GP lan ref 1, 3-39, 5-7  
MA close command, 3-87  
MA cont enable req, 3-86, 3-87  
MA cont enable stat, 3-42, 3-86, 3-87  
MA cont test mode, 3-31  
MA contactor closed, 3-33, 3-87, 5-9  
Min speed output, 3-89  
Motor current, 3-41, 4-10, 5-7  
Motor current, lan, 3-41, 5-7  
Motor current, unfil, 3-41  
Motor flux, 3-23  
Motor power, 3-41, 5-7  
Motor power, lan, 3-41, 5-7  
Motor speed, 3-18, 3-105, 3-106  
Motor torque, lan, 3-41, 5-7  
Motor voltage, 3-41, 5-7  
GP lan ref 2, 3-39, 5-7  
GP lan ref 3, 3-39, 5-7  
GP lan ref 4, 3-39, 5-7  
GP lan req bit 1, 3-40, 3-52  
GP lan req bit 2, 3-40  
Motor voltage, lan, 3-41, 5-7  
Motoring torque lim, 3-101, 3-102, 4-26  
MOV fuse OK status, 3-66  
GP lan req bit 3, 3-40  
GP lan req bit 4, 3-40  
GP lan req bit 5, 3-40  
No faults active, 3-33, 3-42, 3-75, 3-85  
No trip fault, 3-33, 3-42, 3-75  
Normal, 2-19  
GP lan req bit 6, 3-40  
Number of channels, 3-5  
GP lan req bit 7, 3-40  
Output freq, unfil, 3-51, 3-105  
Output frequency, 3-105, 3-106  
Output volts, A-B, 3-58, 3-59, 4-35  
Output volts, B-C, 3-58, 3-59, 4-35  
Phase A current, 3-54, 3-60, 3-61, 4-35  
Phase B current, 3-54, 3-60, 3-61, 4-35  
Phase C current, 3-54, 3-60, 3-61, 4-35  
Phase imbalance avg, 3-68, 3-69  
Phase imbalance int, 3-68, 3-69  
Phase imbalance ref, 3-68, 3-69  
Phase imbalance sqr, 3-68, 3-69  
Phs A current offset, 2-20, 3-60, 3-61  
Phs B current offset, 2-20, 3-60, 3-61  
Phs C current offset, 2-20, 3-60, 3-61  
Phs imbalance limit, 3-68, 3-69  
Phs imbalance time, 3-68, 3-69  
PLL error, 3-68, 3-69, 3-72  
PLL frequency, 2-33, 3-72  
GP lan req bit 8, 3-40, 3-52  
Heartbeat fbk, lan, 3-37, 3-42, 5-8  
Heartbeat ref, lan, 2-37, 3-36, 3-37, 3-40, 5-8  
Heat sink A temp, 3-56, 3-57  
Heat sink B temp, 3-56, 3-57  
Heat sink C temp, 3-56, 3-57  
I/O test mode, 3-30  
Ia^2 filtered, 2-4, 2-6, 3-61, 3-62  
Ib^2 filtered, 2-4, 2-6, 3-61, 3-62  
Ic^2 filtered, 2-4, 2-6, 3-61, 3-62  
In cur or trq limit, 3-42  
Inertia, 3-18, 3-108, 3-109, 3-111, 4-40  
Ix command neg limit, 3-101  
Ix command pos limit, 3-101  
Jog active, 3-42, 3-83, 5-8  
Jog request, 3-40, 3-79, 3-82, 3-83, 3-90, 3-91, 3-92,  
3-93, 4-18, 4-19, 5-8  
Jog request, lan, 3-40, 3-82, 5-8  
LAN commands OK, 3-37, 3-79, 3-81, 3-82, 3-83, 5-  
4
PLL integral gain, 3-72  
PLL max frequency, 3-72  
PLL min frequency, 3-72  
LAN connection ok, 2-37, 3-37  
Lan diag fbk bit 1, 3-42  
Line monitor frq, 3-70, 3-71, 3-72  
PLL prop gain, 3-72  
PLL proven, 3-68, 3-69, 3-73  
Pos cntr mark, 3-13  
8 • Index  
Innovation Series Meduim Voltage GP – Type G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pos down edge smp, 3-13  
Pos up edge sample, 3-13  
Position counter, 3-13  
Quick stop active, 3-77, 3-85, 4-19  
Speed reg output, 3-108, 3-109, 3-110  
Speed reg prop term, 3-108  
Speed reg reference, 3-107, 3-108, 3-110  
Sqr wave osc output, 3-12  
Ramp rate 2 sel, lan, 3-40  
Sreg enable request, 3-86, 3-107  
Sreg enable status, 3-75, 3-86  
Standby command, 3-83, 3-84  
Standby enable req, 3-86  
Ramp ref enabled, 3-85, 3-94, 3-96  
Ready to run, 3-42, 3-75, 3-76, 3-77, 3-78, 3-81, 3-83,  
3-84, 3-85, 4-19  
Ref enable request, 3-86  
Standby enable stat, 3-86  
Regen torque limit, 3-101  
Relay 1 state, 3-33  
Start permissive, 3-76, 3-78  
Stator temp, 3-49  
Relay 2 state, 3-33  
Stop PB request, 3-79  
Relay 3 state, 3-33  
Stopped, 3-6, 3-8, 3-85, 3-86  
Sys ISBus error cnt, 2-37, 3-37, 3-38  
Sys ISBus error reg, 2-37, 3-37, 3-38  
System fault string, 3-42, 3-55, 3-77, 4-27, 5-8  
System fault test, 3-31  
Rev mode req, lan, 3-40, 5-8  
Reverse mode active, 3-42, 3-97, 3-98, 5-8  
Rotor temp, 3-49  
Run active, 3-42, 3-83, 5-8  
Run command, 3-83  
Tach speed, 3-51, 3-105, 3-106  
Tach speed, instr., 3-51, 3-105  
Torque calced, unfil, 3-41  
Run permissive, 3-76, 3-78, 3-79, 4-19  
Run ready and fluxed, 3-77, 3-85  
Run request, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-11, 3-40, 3-79, 3-82, 3-  
83, 4-18, 4-19, 5-8  
Run request, lan, 3-40, 3-79, 3-82, 5-8  
Running, 3-33, 3-42, 3-85, 3-86, 4-5, 4-8, 5-8  
Sequencer state, 2-3, 3-86  
Sim A-B line voltage, 3-20  
Sim A-N line voltage, 3-20  
Sim B-C line voltage, 3-20  
Sim B-N line voltage, 3-20  
Torque cmd neg limit, 3-101  
Torque cmd pos limit, 3-101  
Torque ctl neg frz, 3-107, 3-111  
Torque ctl pos frz, 3-107, 3-111  
Torque current limit, 3-101  
Torque current ref, 3-100, 3-101  
Torque enable req, 3-86, 3-100, 3-101  
Torque fdfwd, lan, 3-39, 5-7  
Torque feed forward, 3-39  
Torque mode active, 3-42, 5-8  
Torque mode req, lan, 3-40, 5-8  
Torque ref input, 3-108, 3-109, 3-110, 3-111  
Torque ref post lim, 3-99, 3-101  
Torque ref pre limit, 3-100, 3-102, 3-108, 3-109, 3-  
110  
Sim C-N line voltage, 3-20  
Simulate mode act, 2-36, 3-20, 4-7, 4-10  
Simulated speed, 3-18, 3-105  
SLD1 status, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17  
SLD2 status, 3-15  
SLD3 status, 3-15  
Solid state relay, 3-33  
Torque ref, lan, 3-39, 5-7  
Spd avd func output, 3-89, 3-94  
Spd ref offset, lan, 3-39, 5-7  
Spd reg integral ref, 3-108  
Torque reg enabled, 3-75, 3-86  
Total capture time, 3-5  
Transfer MA request, 3-46, 3-47  
Speed avd func input, 3-89, 3-91  
Speed feedback, 3-41, 3-42, 3-94, 3-105, 3-106, 5-7  
Speed feedback, lan, 3-41, 5-7  
Speed mode active, 3-42, 5-9  
Speed ref enabled, 3-75, 3-86, 3-96  
Speed ref, pre ramp, 3-89, 3-94, 3-95, 3-96  
Speed ref, ramped, 3-85, 3-94, 3-96, 3-106  
Speed reference, 3-39, 3-42, 3-85, 3-89, 3-91, 3-94, 3-  
97, 3-98, 3-99, 3-110  
Transfer motor cmd, 3-47  
Transfer motor req, 3-47  
Trip fault active, 3-7, 3-42, 3-75, 3-85, 5-8  
Trip request, lan, 2-36, 3-40, 5-8  
Trq cur ref pre lim, 3-101  
Trq lim 2 sel, lan, 3-40  
Unused boolean, 3-14  
Unused float, 3-14  
Unused integer, 3-14  
Speed reg antiwindup, 3-108, 3-111  
Speed reg error, 3-104, 3-108, 3-110, 3-111  
Speed reg fbk, 3-41, 3-42, 3-50, 3-80, 3-81, 3-85, 3-  
94, 3-96, 3-103, 3-104, 3-105, 3-106, 3-107, 3-  
108, 3-110, 4-17, 4-18  
Utility close cmd, 3-47  
Utility close status, 3-47  
Utility open command, 3-47  
Utility open status, 3-47  
VCO 1 unfiltered, 3-31  
Speed reg int term, 3-108  
VCO 2 unfiltered, 3-31  
Speed reg mode, 3-108, 3-110  
Speed reg net gain, 3-108  
VCO 3 unfiltered, 3-31  
Voltage offset valid, 3-59  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Index • 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X axis line voltage, 3-68, 3-69, 3-72, 3-73  
X stop active, 3-42, 3-76, 3-81, 4-18, 5-8  
X stop request, lan, 3-40, 3-81, 5-8  
Y axis line voltage, 3-68, 3-72, 3-73  
Zero speed active, 3-42, 3-85, 5-9  
VCO, 3-31, 4-32  
Reference Ramp Programmed Deceleration Speeds,  
4-23  
Reference Ramp Speed Independent Rate Set  
Selection, 4-21  
Reference Ramp Speed Independent Rates, 4-21  
Run Ready Permissive String, 4-19  
Simulator Mechanical Configuration, 4-27  
Simulator Mode, 4-27  
Speed/Torque Regulator Configuration, 4-23  
Speed/Torque Regulator Modes, 4-23  
Starting and Stopping the Drive, 4-19  
Stopping Configuration, 4-17  
Tachometer Loss Protection, 4-16  
Tachometer Pulses Per Revolution, 4-16  
Tachometer Support, 4-16  
W
Wizards  
Cell Test, 2-5, 2-25, 2-26, 2-27, 2-28, 2-29, 2-30, 2-  
31  
Cell Test Options, 4-4  
Cell Test Wizard, 4-4, 4-5  
DAC Setup, 4-10  
Drive Commissioning, 3-21, 3-23, 3-70, 3-71, 3-73,  
4-11, 4-12, 4-13, 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-17, 4-18, 4-  
19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-24, 4-25, 4-26, 4-27,  
4-28, 4-33  
AC Source Selection, 4-12  
Alternate Torque and Current Limits, 4-26  
Conclusion, 4-28  
Current Limits, 4-27  
DDI Increment and Decrement Rates (Local Mode),  
4-23  
Torque and Current Limit Selection, 4-26  
Torque and Current Limits, 4-25  
Torque and Current Limits Uniform, 4-25  
Torque Regulator Reference and Output, 4-24  
Torque with Speed Override Reference and Output,  
4-24  
Torque with Speed Override Speed Error, 4-24  
Torque with Speed Override Stopping Behavior, 4-  
25  
X-Stop Configuration, 4-18  
X-Stop Ramp Time, 4-18  
Drive Units, 4-11  
Exit Reminder, 4-28  
Ground Fault Setup, 3-54  
Failed Calculation, 4-26  
Line Protection  
Flying Restart, 4-17  
Conclusion, 4-34  
Generating Torque Limits, 4-26  
Hardware Fault Strings in Simulator Mode, 4-27  
Intelligent Part Number, 4-11  
Jog Speed Setpoints, 4-20  
Default Settings, 4-33  
Introduction, 4-33  
Overfrequency, 4-34  
Overvoltage, 4-33  
Manual Reference, 4-19  
Underfrequency, 4-34  
Maximum Speed References, 4-20  
Motor and Process Speed Referencing, 4-15  
Motor Crossover Voltage, 4-13  
Motor Data Sheet, 4-13, 4-14, 4-15  
Motor Data Sheet - Equivalent Circuit Data, 4-14  
Motor Data Sheet - Flux Curve, 4-15  
Motor Nameplate Data, 4-12  
Motor Poles, 4-13  
Motor Protection Class, 4-13  
Motoring Torque Limits, 4-26  
Normal Torque and Current Limits, 4-26  
Overview, 4-11  
Undervoltage, 4-33  
Line Protection Setup, 3-70, 3-71, 4-33, 4-34  
Line Transfer Tuneup, 3-46, 4-28, 4-29, 4-30  
Motor Capture Data, 4-29  
Motor Transfer Data, 4-28  
Operation, 4-29  
Overview, 4-28  
Motor Control Tuneup, 3-44, 3-45, 3-46, 4-28, 4-31,  
4-32  
Equivalent Circuit, 4-31  
Measurements, 4-32  
Operation, 4-32  
Parameter Calculation, 4-27  
Power Dip Ride-Through, 4-27  
Reference Ramp Bypass, 4-20  
Reference Ramp Mode, 4-20  
Reference Ramp Programmed Acceleration Rates,  
4-22  
Panel Meter Setup, 4-32  
Per Unit Setup, 3-23, 4-32  
Pulse Test, 4-34, 4-35, 4-36, 4-37  
Analog Output Configuration, 4-35  
Bridge State Configuration, 4-35  
Introduction, 4-34  
Reference Ramp Programmed Acceleration Speeds,  
Operation, 4-37  
4-22  
Timer Configuration, 4-37  
Reference Ramp Programmed Deceleration Rates,  
4-22  
Remaining Parameter Setup, 4-37  
Running the Bridge Cell Test, 4-8  
10 • Index  
Innovation Series Meduim Voltage GP – Type G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Running the Fiber-Optic Test, 4-5  
Simulator Setup, 4-38  
Conclusion, 4-38  
Hardware Fault String Override, 4-38  
Introduction, 4-38  
Simulator Mechanical Configuration, 4-38  
Simulator Mode, 4-38  
Speed Regulator Tuneup, 4-23, 4-28, 4-39, 4-40, 4-41  
1st Order Response, 4-40  
2nd Order Response, 4-40, 4-41  
2nd Order Response with Stiffness Filter, 4-41  
Calculate Speed Regulator Gains Command, 4-41  
Inertia Measurement Command, 4-39  
Manual Regulator Tuneup, 4-40  
Model, 4-39  
Speed Regulator Mode, 4-40  
System Inertia, 4-39  
GEH-6385 Reference and Troubleshooting, 2300 V Drives  
Index • 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
12 • Index  
Innovation Series Meduim Voltage GP – Type G Drives GEH-6385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7Rꢅ  
*(ꢀ,QGXVWULDOꢀ6\VWHPV  
'RFXPHQWDWLRQꢀ'HVLJQꢃꢀ5Pꢁꢀꢆꢇꢈ  
ꢈꢉꢊꢈꢀ5RDQRNHꢀ%OYGꢁ  
ꢀ
5HDGHUꢀ&RPPHQWV  
6DOHPꢃꢀ9$ꢀꢀꢆꢋꢈꢉꢌꢄꢍꢋꢇꢆꢀꢀ86$  
)D[ꢅꢀꢀꢈꢄꢉꢋꢊꢄꢌꢎꢏꢄꢎꢍꢈꢉ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢐ*(ꢀ,QWHUQDOꢀ'&ꢀꢎꢄꢆꢏꢎꢄꢎꢍꢉꢈꢑ  
:HꢀZHOFRPHꢀFRPPHQWVꢀDQGꢀVXJJHVWLRQVꢀWRꢀPDNHꢀWKLVꢀSXEOLFDWLRQꢀPRUHꢀXVHIXOꢁ  
<RXUꢀ1DPH  
7RGD\¶Vꢀ'DWH  
,IꢀQHHGHGꢃꢀKRZꢀFDQꢀZHꢀFRQWDFWꢀ\RX"  
)D[ꢀ1Rꢁ  
3KRQHꢀ1Rꢁ  
(ꢄPDLO  
<RXUꢀ&RPSDQ\¶Vꢀ1DPHꢀDQGꢀ$GGUHVV  
-REꢀ6LWH  
*(ꢀ5HTXLVLWLRQꢀ1Rꢁ  
3XEOLFDWLRQꢀ1Rꢁ  
<RXUꢀ-REꢀ)XQFWLRQꢀꢂꢀ+RZꢀ<RXꢀ8VHꢀ7KLVꢀ3XEOLFDWLRQ  
$GGUHVV  
3XEOLFDWLRQꢀ,VVXHꢂ5HYLVLRQꢀ'DWH  
*HQHUDOꢀ5DWLQJ  
([FHOOHQW *RRG )DLU 3RRU $GGLWLRQDOꢀ&RPPHQWV  
&RQWHQWV  
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
2UJDQL]DWLRQ  
7HFKQLFDOꢀ$FFXUDF\  
&ODULW\  
&RPSOHWHQHVV  
'UDZLQJVꢀꢂꢀ)LJXUHV  
7DEOHV  
5HIHUHQFLQJ  
5HDGDELOLW\  
6SHFLILFꢀ6XJJHVWLRQVꢀꢁ&RUUHFWLRQVꢂꢀLQIRUPDWLRQꢀWKDWꢀFRXOGꢀEHꢀH[SDQGHGꢀRQꢂꢀDQGꢀVXFKꢃꢄ  
3DJHꢀ1Rꢁ &RPPHQWV  
______  
______  
______  
______  
______  
______  
__________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________  
__________________________________________________________________________________  
2WKHUꢀ&RPPHQWVꢀꢀꢁ:KDWꢀ\RXꢀOLNHꢂꢀZKDWꢀFRXOGꢀEHꢀDGGHGꢂꢀKRZꢀWRꢀLPSURYHꢂꢀDQGꢀVXFKꢃꢄ BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
___________________________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________________________  
___________________________________________________________________________________________  
2YHUDOOꢀJUDGHꢀꢁ&RPSDUHGꢀWRꢀSXEOLFDWLRQVꢀIURPꢀRWKHUꢀPDQXIDFWXUHUVꢀRIꢀVLPLODUꢀSURGXFWVꢂꢀKRZꢀGRꢀ\RXꢀUDWHꢀWKLVꢀSXEOLFDWLRQ"ꢄ  
†ꢀ6XSHULRU  
†ꢀ&RPSDUDEOH  
†ꢀ,QIHULRU  
†ꢀ'RꢀQRWꢀNQRZ  
&RPPHQWꢀꢀ BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
'HWDFKꢀDQGꢀID[ꢀRUꢀPDLOꢀWRꢀWKHꢀDGGUHVVꢀQRWHGꢀDERYHꢃ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁ)ROGꢀKHUHꢀDQGꢀFORVHꢀZLWKꢀVWDSOHꢀRUꢀWDSH ꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁ  
3ODFH  
VWDPS  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB  
KHUHꢁ  
*(ꢀ,QGXVWULDOꢀ6\VWHPV  
'RFXPHQWDWLRQꢀ'HVLJQꢂꢀ5Pꢃꢀꢅꢆꢇ  
ꢇꢈꢉꢇꢀ5RDQRNHꢀ%OYGꢃ  
6DOHPꢂꢀ9$ꢀꢀꢅꢊꢇꢈꢋꢌꢍꢊꢆꢅꢀꢀ86$  
ꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁ)ROGꢀKHUHꢀILUVWꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁꢁ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ
*(ꢀ,QGXVWULDOꢀ6\VWHPV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Dyson Vacuum Cleaner DC37 User Manual
Eagle Electronics Fish Finder 642c User Manual
Fender Stereo Amplifier Combo Amplifiers User Manual
Fiesta Gas Grill ESD45055 BC301 User Manual
Fisher Paykel Oven BI453 User Manual
Flymo Lawn Mower RE420 User Manual
Fostex Computer Drive CD 1A User Manual
Fostex Microphone SF20C User Manual
Frigidaire Refrigerator FFHS2622 User Manual
Globalsat Technology GPS Receiver MR 350 User Manual